OPERATOR'S MANUAL

MARINE RADAR

FAR-2218
FAR-2218-BB
FAR-2228
FAR-2228-BB
FAR-2238S
FAR-2238S-BB
FAR-2238S-NXT
FAR-2238S-NXT-BB
FAR-2318
FAR-2328
FAR-2328W
FAR-2338SW
FAR-2338S
Model FAR-2338S-NXT

www.furuno.com
 7KHSDSHUXVHGLQWKLVPDQXDO
LVHOHPHQWDOFKORULQHIUHH

࣭)85812$XWKRUL]HG'LVWULEXWRU'HDOHU

$VKLKDUDFKR
1LVKLQRPL\D-$3$1

$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHG 3ULQWHGLQ-DSDQ $  129  

3XE1R 20($
*5(* )$5[[VHULHV


IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
• This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users.
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual.
Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
• Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you
see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment
settings.
• Save this manual for future reference.
• Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will
cancel the warranty.
• The following concern acts as our importer in Europe, as defined in DECISION No 768/2008/EC.
- Name: FURUNO EUROPE B.V.
- Address: Ridderhaven 19B, 2984 BT Ridderkerk, The Netherlands
• InstantAccess bar™ is a registered trademark of FURUNO Electric co., Ltd.
• SDHC is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of their
respective holders.
How to discard this product
Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in
the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance (http://www.eiae.org/) for the
correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery
Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter
on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and - terminals of bat-
tery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit.
In the European Union
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries
must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the
used batteries to a battery collection site according to your national
legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU. Cd

In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that
Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled.
Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to
local laws. Ni-Cd Pb

In the other countries

There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can in-
crease when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future.

i
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The operator must read the applicable safety instructions before attempting to operate the equipment.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

DANGER could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

WARNING could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,

CAUTION could result in minor or moderate injury.

Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action

WARNING
Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy that can be harmful,
particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance
while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting antenna at a close distance.
Distances at which RF radiation level of 100, 50 and 10 W/m2 are given in the table below.

Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a close distance in front of the wheel house, your admin-
istration may require halt of transmission within a certain sector of antenna revolution. This is
possible. Ask your FURUNO representative or dealer to provide this feature.

Model Transceiver Magnetron Antenna* 100 W/m2 50 W/m2 10 W/m2

Magnetron FAR-2218(-BB) XN12CF 0.6 m 1.4 m 4.4 m

radar RTR-105 (12 kW) FNE1201 XN20CF 0.4 m 0.9 m 3.0 m
FAR-2318 XN24CF 0.3 m 0.6 m 2.5 m
FAR-2228(-BB) XN12CF 1.3 m 2.7 m 9.5 m
RTR-106 (25 kW) XN20CF 1.0 m 1.7 m 6.8 m
FAR-2328
MG5436 XN24CF 0.7 m 1.3 m 5.5 m
XN20CF 0.5 m 1.2 m 5.5 m
FAR-2328W RTR-108 (25 kW)
XN24CF 0.3 m 0.9 m 4.0 m
FAR-2238S(-BB) SN24CF 1.7 m 2.4 m 3.8 m
RTR-107 (30 kW) SN30CF 1.4 m 2.1 m 3.4 m
FAR-2338S MG5223F
SN36CF N/A 0.5 m 4.6 m
FAR-2338SW RTR-109 (30 kW) SN36CF N/A 0.26 m 2.3 m
SN24CF N/A N/A N/A
Solid state FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)
RTR-111 (250 W) SN30CF N/A N/A N/A
radar
FAR-2338S-NXT SN36CF N/A N/A 1.0 m
* XN12CF: 4 ft, XN20CF: 6.5 ft, XN24CF: 8 ft, SN24CF: 8 ft, SN30CF: 10 ft, SN36CF: 12 ft

ii
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD. Use the proper fuse.
Do not open the equipment.
Use of a wrong fuse can result
Only qualified personnel should in damage to the equipment or
work inside the equipment. cause fire.
Keep heater away from equipment.
Turn off the radar power switch
before servicing the antenna Heat can alter equipment shape
unit. Post a warning sign near and melt the power cord, which
the switch indicating it should can cause fire or electical shock.
not be turned on while the
Do not place liquid-filled con-
antenna unit is being serviced.
tainers near the equipment.
Prevent the potential risk of being Fire or electrical shock can result
struck by the rotating antenna if a liquid spills into the equipment.
and exposure to RF radiation
hazard. Do not operate the equipment
with wet hands.
Do not disassemble or modify
the equipment. Electrical shock can result.

Fire, electrical shock or serious Before servicing the radar, turn

injury can result. off the appropriate external
breaker.
Immediately turn off the power
at the ship’s mains switchboard Power is not removed from the
if water leaks into the equip- radar simply by turning off its
ment or the equipment is emit- power switch.
ting smoke or fire.
This equipment has a valid
Continued use can cause fatal
damage to the equipment. latitude range of 85°N to 85°S.
Operation outside of this range
can result in a larger margin of
error when calculating position,
heading, bearing, etc.

iii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING
WARNIN CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied The plotting accuracy and response of
upon for the safety of vessel and crew. this TT meets IMO standards. Tracking
The navigator has the responsibility to accuracy is affected by the following:
check all aids available to confirm Tracking accuracy is affected by course
position. Electronic aids are not a change. One to two minutes is required to
substitute for basic navigational restore vectors to full accuracy after an
principles and common sense. abrupt course change. (The actual amount
depends on gyrocompass specifications.)
This TT automatically tracks automatically or
The amount of tracking delay is inversely
manually acquired radar targets and
proportional to the relative speed of the
calculates their courses and speeds,
target. Delay is on the order of 15 - 30
indicating them by vectors. Since the data
seconds for high relative speed; 30 - 60
generated by the auto plotter are based on
seconds for low relative speed.
what radar targets are selected, the radar
must always be optimally tuned for use with The target tracking and pertinent vector
the auto plotter, to ensure required targets calculation accuracy is influenced by the
will not be lost or unwanted targets such as following:
sea returns and noise will not be acquired - Echo intensity
and tracked. - The range measurement accuracy;
characterized by both random and biased
A target does not always mean a land-mass, measurement errors.
reef, ships or other surface vessels but can - The angular measurement accuracy;
imply returns from sea surface and clutter. characterized by beam shape, target glint
As the level of clutter changes with and bias errors.
environment, the operator should properly - Radar transmission pulsewidth
adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN - Gyrocompass heading error
controls to be sure target echoes are not - Speed log error
eliminated from the radar screen. - Curent and wind (set & drift)
- Course change (own ship and target)

The data generated by TT, AIS and

video plotter are intended for
reference only.
Refer to official nautical charts for detailed and
up-to-date information.

WARNING LABEL
Warning labels are attached to the equipment. Do not remove any label. If a label
is missing or damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about replacement.

WARNING DISPLAY UNIT & DANGER TRANSCEIVER UNIT

To avoid electrical shock, do not Electrical shock hazard.
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
PROCESSOR UNIT Turn off power before (RTR-105/106/107/108/109)
servicing.
Name: Warning Label 1 Name: Warning Label
Type: 86-003-1011-3 Type: 03-160-1042-0
Code No.: 100-236-233-10 Code No.: 100-302-750-10

iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD .................................................................................................................. xii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... xv

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW .................................................................................1-1

1.1 Controls Overview ......................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Control Unit RCU-014 ....................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 Control Unit RCU-015/RCU-016 ....................................................................1-3
1.2 How to Turn the Radar On/Off....................................................................................1-4
1.3 How to Adjust the Brilliance........................................................................................1-4
1.4 Display Indications......................................................................................................1-5
1.4.1 InstantAccess bar™ buttons ...........................................................................1-6
1.4.2 Radar display and shortcuts ...........................................................................1-7
1.4.3 Information and settings .................................................................................1-9
1.5 Menu Operations ......................................................................................................1-10
1.5.1 How to open and close the main menu ........................................................1-10
1.5.2 How to operate the menus ...........................................................................1-10
1.6 How to Use the On-screen Box Menus ....................................................................1-12
1.7 How to Use the CURSOR Menu ..............................................................................1-13
1.8 Cursor Data ..............................................................................................................1-14
1.8.1 How to change the cursor data attributes (B-type only) ...............................1-14
1.9 How to Set Up Function Keys...................................................................................1-15
1.10 How to Customize Operation....................................................................................1-16
1.11 How to Select the Interface for Heading Input..........................................................1-17
1.12 How to Set Own Ship’s Speed .................................................................................1-18
1.12.1 Automatic speed input (log or EPFS navigator) ...........................................1-18
1.12.2 Manual speed input ......................................................................................1-19
1.13 How to Set the Own Ship Position............................................................................1-20
1.14 How to Adjust the Date and Time.............................................................................1-21
1.15 User Settings ............................................................................................................1-22
1.15.1 How to reset the user settings ......................................................................1-23
1.15.2 How to save/load user settings ....................................................................1-24
1.16 How to Start/Stop Transmission ...............................................................................1-24
1.17 How to Tune the Receiver (Magnetron Radars Only) ..............................................1-25
1.17.1 How to select the tuning method ..................................................................1-25
1.17.2 How to initialize tuning..................................................................................1-25
1.17.3 How to tune the receiver manually ...............................................................1-25
1.18 How to Select a Pulselength.....................................................................................1-26
1.18.1 How to select a pulselength .........................................................................1-26
1.18.2 How to change the preset pulselength .........................................................1-26
1.19 How to Adjust Sensitivity ..........................................................................................1-27
1.20 How to Reduce Sea Clutter ......................................................................................1-27
1.20.1 How to select the method of clutter adjustment ...........................................1-27
1.20.2 How to fine-tune sea clutter reduction ..........................................................1-28
1.20.3 How to manually reduce sea clutter .............................................................1-28
1.20.4 How to use the BERTHING STC function ....................................................1-29
1.21 How to Reduce Rain Clutter .....................................................................................1-29
1.21.1 How to select the method of rain clutter reduction .......................................1-29
1.21.2 How to manually reduce the rain clutter .......................................................1-30
1.22 Interference Rejector ................................................................................................1-32
1.23 Echo Stretch .............................................................................................................1-33
1.24 Echo Averaging ........................................................................................................1-34
1.25 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Function..........................................................1-36

v
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.25.1 How to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function on/off ........... 1-36
1.25.2 How to adjust the gain in Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) mode.......... 1-36
1.25.3 How to get high sensitivity............................................................................ 1-37
1.25.4 How to suppress false echoes ..................................................................... 1-37
1.26 Noise Rejector.......................................................................................................... 1-38
1.27 Wiper........................................................................................................................ 1-38
1.28 How to Preset Controls for a Specific Navigation Purpose ...................................... 1-39
1.28.1 How to select a customized echo................................................................. 1-41
1.28.2 How to edit a customized echo .................................................................... 1-41
1.28.3 How to restore a user customized echo to the saved settings..................... 1-42
1.28.4 How to restore a user customized echo to the factory default settings........ 1-43
1.28.5 How to edit the available customized echoes .............................................. 1-43
1.29 How to Reject Second-trace Echoes ....................................................................... 1-44
1.30 Orientation Modes.................................................................................................... 1-45
1.30.1 How to select an presentation mode............................................................ 1-45
1.30.2 Description of presentation modes............................................................... 1-45
1.31 How to Select a Range Scale .................................................................................. 1-47
1.32 How to Measure Range ........................................................................................... 1-47
1.32.1 How to show/hide the range rings................................................................ 1-48
1.32.2 How to measure range with the variable range marker (VRM) .................... 1-48
1.32.3 How to set the VRM unit of measurement (B-type only) .............................. 1-49
1.32.4 How to show TTG to VRM ........................................................................... 1-49
1.33 How to Measure Bearing.......................................................................................... 1-50
1.33.1 Methods to measure bearing ....................................................................... 1-50
1.33.2 True or relative bearing ................................................................................ 1-51
1.34 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL........................................................................ 1-52
1.34.1 How to assess risk of collision using the offset EBL .................................... 1-52
1.34.2 How to set the origin point reference for EBL OFFSET ............................... 1-53
1.35 How to Measure Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ................................... 1-54
1.36 How to Off-Center the Display ................................................................................. 1-57
1.37 Target Trails ............................................................................................................. 1-58
1.37.1 True or relative trails .................................................................................... 1-58
1.37.2 Trail time ...................................................................................................... 1-59
1.37.3 Trail gradation .............................................................................................. 1-60
1.37.4 Trail level...................................................................................................... 1-60
1.37.5 Narrow trails (B-type only)............................................................................ 1-60
1.37.6 How to hide the trails temporarily................................................................. 1-60
1.37.7 Trail stabilization in true motion.................................................................... 1-60
1.37.8 How to erase/restart trails ............................................................................ 1-61
1.37.9 How to prevent sea clutter in true trails........................................................ 1-61
1.37.10How to show/hide OS trails .......................................................................... 1-62
1.37.11How to show/hide land trails (B-type only) ................................................... 1-62
1.37.12How to set the trail color (B-type only) ......................................................... 1-62
1.38 Target Analyzer (B-type only) .................................................................................. 1-63
1.38.1 How to activate/deactivate the target analyzer ............................................ 1-64
1.39 Target Alarm ............................................................................................................ 1-65
1.39.1 How to set a target alarm ............................................................................. 1-65
1.39.2 How to mute the target alarm....................................................................... 1-66
1.39.3 How to deactivate a target alarm ................................................................. 1-66
1.39.4 How to change target alarm attributes ......................................................... 1-66
1.40 PI (Parallel Index) Lines ........................................................................................... 1-67
1.40.1 How to set the maximum number of lines to display.................................... 1-67
1.40.2 How to change PI line bearing and interval.................................................. 1-67
1.40.3 How to change the PI line bearing reference (B-type only) ......................... 1-68
1.40.4 How to change the PI line orientation .......................................................... 1-68
1.40.5 How to reset the PI lines to default (ship’s heading) .................................... 1-68

vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.40.6 How to change PI line length........................................................................1-69

1.41 Zoom ........................................................................................................................1-70
1.42 How to Use Marks ....................................................................................................1-71
1.42.1 How to select a mark type ............................................................................1-71
1.42.2 How to select the mark inscription position ..................................................1-72
1.42.3 How to select the mark color (B-type only)...................................................1-72
1.42.4 How to inscribe marks ..................................................................................1-73
1.42.5 How to delete marks.....................................................................................1-74
1.42.6 How to hide the heading line marker ............................................................1-74
1.42.7 How to hide/show the stern mark .................................................................1-74
1.42.8 North mark....................................................................................................1-74
1.42.9 How to set up the own ship symbol ..............................................................1-75
1.42.10How to use the INS marker ..........................................................................1-75
1.42.11How to show/hide radar map marks .............................................................1-75
1.42.12How to set the barge marker ........................................................................1-76
1.42.13Antenna mark ...............................................................................................1-76
1.42.14How to set origin mark stabilization ..............................................................1-77
1.42.15How to inscribe origin marks ........................................................................1-77
1.42.16How to delete origin marks ...........................................................................1-78
1.43 Drop Mark.................................................................................................................1-78
1.43.1 How to inscribe a drop mark.........................................................................1-79
1.43.2 How to erase drop marks .............................................................................1-79
1.44 How to Adjust Brilliance of On-screen Data .............................................................1-79
1.44.1 How to change color schemes (palettes) .....................................................1-80
1.44.2 How to change the echo color......................................................................1-81
1.45 How to Display and Set Up Navigational Data .........................................................1-81
1.45.1 How to set up the navigational data .............................................................1-81
1.45.2 How to display navigational data..................................................................1-82
1.46 How to Use the Information Box...............................................................................1-82
1.47 Interswitch ................................................................................................................1-84
1.47.1 How to display antenna information .............................................................1-84
1.47.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations ........................................1-85
1.47.3 How to clear the interswitch .........................................................................1-86
1.48 Performance Monitor ................................................................................................1-87
1.48.1 How to activate/deactivate the performance monitor ...................................1-87
1.48.2 How to check the radar’s performance.........................................................1-88
1.49 How to Change the Reference Position ...................................................................1-89
1.50 Anchor Watch ...........................................................................................................1-90
1.51 How to Interpret the Alert Box ..................................................................................1-91
1.51.1 Alert descriptions ..........................................................................................1-91
1.51.2 Alert list.........................................................................................................1-91
1.51.3 Alert icons and their meanings .....................................................................1-93
1.52 Icing Prevention........................................................................................................1-94
1.53 How to Select a Display Mode (B-type Only) ...........................................................1-95
1.54 How to Manage SD-Card Data.................................................................................1-96
1.54.1 How to format the SD card ...........................................................................1-96
1.54.2 Cautionary notes on handling SD cards .......................................................1-96
1.54.3 Compatible SD cards ...................................................................................1-96
1.54.4 How to insert SD cards.................................................................................1-97
1.54.5 How to remove SD cards .............................................................................1-97
1.54.6 How to save data..........................................................................................1-98
1.54.7 How to read (load) data................................................................................1-98
1.54.8 How to delete data .......................................................................................1-98
1.55 How to Take a Screenshot .......................................................................................1-99
1.56 How to Use the Watch Alert .....................................................................................1-99

vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2. RADAR OBSERVATION .......................................................................................2-1

2.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Minimum range .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Maximum range ............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.3 X-band and S-band ........................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.4 Radar resolution............................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.5 Bearing accuracy ........................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.6 Range measurement...................................................................................... 2-3
2.2 False Echoes ............................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) ................................................................. 2-5
2.3.1 SART description ........................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.2 How to show SART marks on the radar display............................................. 2-6
2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SARTs............................................................ 2-6
2.4 RACON ...................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE) ................................................................................... 2-7
2.6 Solid state radar ......................................................................................................... 2-8

3. TARGET TRACKING (TT) .....................................................................................3-1

3.1 Precautions when Using Target Tracking .................................................................. 3-1
3.2 TT Controls ................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.3 TT Box Overview........................................................................................................ 3-2
3.4 How to Select the TT mode........................................................................................ 3-3
3.4.1 How to enable auto acquisition ...................................................................... 3-3
3.5 How to Acquire and Track Targets............................................................................. 3-4
3.5.1 How to manually acquire a target................................................................... 3-4
3.5.2 How to automatically acquire targets ............................................................. 3-4
3.6 How to Enter Own Ship Speed .................................................................................. 3-5
3.6.1 Echo-referenced speed input ......................................................................... 3-5
3.7 How to Cancel Target Tracking.................................................................................. 3-7
3.7.1 How to cancel tracking for individual TT targets ............................................ 3-7
3.7.2 How to cancel tracking for all TT targets........................................................ 3-7
3.8 Lost Target ................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.8.1 How to set the lost target filter........................................................................ 3-8
3.8.2 How to enable/disable the lost target alert ..................................................... 3-8
3.9 TT Symbols and Attributes......................................................................................... 3-9
3.9.1 TT symbols..................................................................................................... 3-9
3.9.2 How to select a TT symbol (B-type only) ....................................................... 3-9
3.9.3 How to adjust symbol brilliance.................................................................... 3-10
3.9.4 How to set the symbol color ......................................................................... 3-10
3.10 How to Display/Remove Target Data....................................................................... 3-10
3.10.1 TT pop up information .................................................................................. 3-10
3.10.2 How to display target data............................................................................ 3-11
3.10.3 How to remove target data........................................................................... 3-11
3.10.4 How to display, hide and sort the target list ................................................. 3-12
3.11 How to Assign a Preset Name to TT Targets (B-type only) ..................................... 3-13
3.11.1 How to activate the preset name function .................................................... 3-13
3.11.2 How to setup preset names ......................................................................... 3-13
3.11.3 How to assign a name to a TT ..................................................................... 3-14
3.12 Vector Modes ........................................................................................................... 3-15
3.12.1 Description of vectors................................................................................... 3-15
3.12.2 How to change the vector length (time) ....................................................... 3-17
3.13 Past Position Display ............................................................................................... 3-17
3.13.1 How to display past position points and select the plotting interval ............. 3-17
3.13.2 How to select the number of past position points to be displayed ............... 3-17
3.14 Set and Drift ............................................................................................................. 3-18
3.15 Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA)................................................................................... 3-19

viii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.15.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA ranges ........................................................3-19

3.15.2 How to acknowledge the TT collision alarm .................................................3-19
3.16 Acquisition Zone .......................................................................................................3-20
3.16.1 How to enable the acquisition zones ............................................................3-20
3.16.2 How to activate the first acquisition zone (AZ1) ...........................................3-20
3.16.3 How to set a polygon acquisition zone (AZ2) ...............................................3-21
3.16.4 How to sleep/deactivate an acquisition zone ...............................................3-21
3.16.5 How to acknowledge the acquisition zone alert ...........................................3-21
3.16.6 How to select the target type to acquire .......................................................3-22
3.16.7 How to change the acquisition zone reference ............................................3-22
3.16.8 How to set acquisition zone shape and stabilization ....................................3-22
3.17 Trial Maneuvers........................................................................................................3-24
3.17.1 Types of trial maneuvers ..............................................................................3-24
3.17.2 How to perform a trial maneuver ..................................................................3-25
3.17.3 How to stop the trial maneuver.....................................................................3-27
3.18 TT System Messages...............................................................................................3-28
3.19 TT Simulation Mode .................................................................................................3-29
3.20 Criteria for Tracking Target Selection.......................................................................3-30
3.21 Factors Affecting Target Tracking ............................................................................3-31

4. AIS OPERATION ...................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Controls for AIS ..........................................................................................................4-2
4.2 AIS Box Overview.......................................................................................................4-3
4.3 How to Show/Hide the AIS Display ............................................................................4-3
4.4 AIS Symbols and Their Meanings ..............................................................................4-4
4.5 How to Use the AIS Display Filter ..............................................................................4-6
4.6 How to Activate AIS Targets.......................................................................................4-7
4.6.1 How to activate specific targets manually ......................................................4-7
4.6.2 How to enable/disable the AIS auto activate function ....................................4-7
4.6.3 How to limit the functions of the AIS auto activate function............................4-8
4.7 How to Sleep AIS Targets ..........................................................................................4-8
4.7.1 How to sleep individual AIS targets ................................................................4-8
4.7.2 How to sleep all AIS targets ...........................................................................4-8
4.8 How to Set Up For a Voyage......................................................................................4-9
4.8.1 How to access the [VOYAGE DATA] menu ...................................................4-9
4.9 How to Display AIS Target Data...............................................................................4-10
4.9.1 AIS pop-up information.................................................................................4-10
4.9.2 How to display basic AIS target data............................................................4-11
4.9.3 How to display expanded AIS target data ....................................................4-12
4.9.4 How to remove target data from the display area ........................................4-12
4.10 How to Change AIS Symbol Attributes.....................................................................4-13
4.10.1 How to adjust the AIS symbol brilliance .......................................................4-13
4.10.2 How to change the AIS symbol color and size .............................................4-13
4.10.3 How to change the ATON symbol color .......................................................4-14
4.11 Past Position Display................................................................................................4-14
4.11.1 How to display past position points and select the plotting interval..............4-14
4.11.2 How to select the number of past position points to be displayed................4-15
4.11.3 Past position display orientation ...................................................................4-15
4.11.4 Stabilization in true motion ...........................................................................4-15
4.12 Lost Target ...............................................................................................................4-15
4.12.1 How to set the lost target filter......................................................................4-15
4.12.2 How to enable/disable the lost target alert ...................................................4-16
4.13 ROT Setting..............................................................................................................4-16
4.14 AIS Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA) ............................................................................4-17
4.14.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA ranges ........................................................4-17
4.15 How to Associate TT and AIS Targets .....................................................................4-18

ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.16 How to View Own Ship Data .................................................................................... 4-19

4.17 How to Use AIS Messages ...................................................................................... 4-20
4.17.1 How to create and save messages .............................................................. 4-20
4.17.2 How to transmit messages........................................................................... 4-21
4.17.3 How to view messages ................................................................................ 4-21
4.17.4 How to set up the AIS message notification................................................. 4-22
4.17.5 How to display AIS alert messages.............................................................. 4-22
4.18 AIS System Messages ............................................................................................. 4-22

5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION ............................................................................5-1

5.1 Orientation Modes...................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Radar Map ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.1 How to show/hide the radar map ................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 How to select a mark type.............................................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 How to select the mark inscription position .................................................... 5-3
5.2.4 How to select the mark color (B-type only) .................................................... 5-3
5.2.5 How to inscribe marks.................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.6 How to set origin mark stabilization................................................................ 5-4
5.2.7 How to delete marks ...................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.8 How to use the INS marker ............................................................................ 5-6
5.2.9 Radar map marks........................................................................................... 5-7
5.3 How to Align the Radar Map ...................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.1 How to disable the map alignment ................................................................. 5-8
5.4 Own Ship and Other Ship’s Track.............................................................................. 5-9
5.4.1 How to show/hide tracks ................................................................................ 5-9
5.4.2 How to set the plotting interval ..................................................................... 5-10
5.4.3 How to set the track color (A/B-types only) .................................................. 5-10
5.4.4 How to automatically plot target tracks (A/B-types only).............................. 5-11
5.4.5 How to delete tracks..................................................................................... 5-11
5.5 How to Use Waypoints............................................................................................. 5-13
5.5.1 How to set the data source for waypoints .................................................... 5-13
5.5.2 How to enter waypoints................................................................................ 5-13
5.5.3 How to erase individual waypoints ............................................................... 5-14
5.5.4 How to erase all waypoints .......................................................................... 5-15
5.5.5 How to display the waypoint list ................................................................... 5-15
5.5.6 How to use the waypoint arrival area function ............................................. 5-15
5.5.7 How to show/hide the waypoint name/number ............................................ 5-16
5.6 Routes......................................................................................................................5-16
5.6.1 How to set/edit an internal route .................................................................. 5-16
5.6.2 How to display routes................................................................................... 5-17
5.6.3 How to delete internal routes ....................................................................... 5-19
5.6.4 How to view the routes list ........................................................................... 5-20

6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................6-1
6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule................................................................................. 6-2
6.2 How to Replace the Fuse........................................................................................... 6-3
6.3 Life Expectancy of Major Parts .................................................................................. 6-3
6.4 Trackball Maintenance ............................................................................................... 6-4
6.5 Easy Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 6-4
6.6 Advanced-level Troubleshooting................................................................................ 6-5
6.7 Diagnostics.................................................................................................................6-7
6.8 Sentence Monitor ..................................................................................................... 6-11
6.9 Fallback Arrangements ............................................................................................ 6-12

x
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE .......................................................................................AP-1

APPENDIX 2 LONGITUDE ERROR TABLE (96 NM SCALE) .................................AP-8
APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS ..................................AP-10
APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND MEANING........................................................AP-18
APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS.............................................................................AP-19
APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS.........................................................................................AP-24
APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION ..........................................................................AP-28
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1
INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1

xi
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of FAR-22x8/23x8 Series Marine Radar
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO FAR-22x8/FAR-23x8 series of radars. We are
confident you will see why FURUNO has become synonymous with quality and reliability.

Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and
dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our ex-
tensive global network of agents and dealers.

Your radar is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment.
However, no machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and maintained
properly. Please carefully read and follow the recommended procedures for operation and main-
tenance.

We would appreciate hearing from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our purpos-
es.

Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO equipment.

Features
• The FAR-2xx8 series consists of the following models and configurations:
Magnetron radar
Frequency Size of Output Transceiver
Model
band monitor unit* power location
FAR-2218 19.0” 12 kW Antenna unit
FAR-2218-BB Local supply 12 kW Antenna unit
FAR-2318 23.1”/27” 12 kW Antenna unit
FAR-2228 X-band 19.0” 25 kW Antenna unit
FAR-2228-BB Local supply 25 kW Antenna unit
FAR-2328 23.1”/27” 25 kW Antenna unit
FAR-2328W 23.1”/27” 25 kW Transceiver unit
FAR-2238S 19.0” 30 kW Antenna unit
FAR-2238S-BB Local supply 30 kW Antenna unit
S-band
FAR-2338S 23.1”/27” 30 kW Antenna unit
FAR-2338SW 23.1”/27” 30 kW Transceiver unit
Solid state radar
Frequency Size of Output Transceiver
Model
band monitor unit* power location
FAR-2238S-NXT 19.0” 250 W Antenna unit
FAR-2338S-NXT S-band 23.1”/27” 250 W Antenna unit
FAR-2238S-NXT-BB Local supply 250 W Antenna unit
*: Viewing distances are as follows: MU-190/MU-270W: 1020 mm; MU-231: 1200 mm.
• Two methods of operation are available: RCU-014 (standard supply control unit) and RCU-015
(optional trackball unit). The ergonomically designed palm rest on the RCU-015 makes it easy
to use.
• Simple operation with “point-and-click” menu functionality.
• All functions can be accessed using only the trackball unit.

xii
 FOREWORD

• TT, AIS, Radar Map, Interswitch and FURUNO’s unique Target Analyzer are supplied as stan-
dard.
• CPA/TCPA alarms.
• Targets activate the user-set alarm zone when entering or exiting the zone.
• The Target Analyzer function helps to find targets in high noise areas (rain/snow), or where
there is interference from surface reflections.
• The FAR-2xx8 series complies with MED 2014/90/EU and also the following directives:
IEC62388, IEC 62288, IMO MSC. 192(79).
Signal processing functions
This radar has the signal processing functions listed in the table below.

Function Description Reference

Interference rejector Suppresses interference by other radars. See
Interference received simultaneously from multiple section 1.22
radars may be difficult to reduce.
Echo stretch Enlarges target echoes, especially small echoes. See
Suppress interference, sea clutter and rain clutter be- section 1.23
fore using echo stretch, to prevent enlargement of
unwanted echoes.
Echo averaging The radar samples echoes with each scan. See
Targets that show a large change with each scan are section 1.24
judged as clutter and are reduced to display only
echoes from legitimate targets.
Automatic clutter elimination Discriminates clutter from the radar echo, then reduc- See
es the clutter automatically. section 1.25
Noise rejector Reduces white noise then improves the on-screen See
S/N ratio by processing the weighted moving aver- section 1.26
age filter for the received echoes in the range direc-
tion. Use this function with caution. Weak target
echoes may disappear from the screen or the range
resolution may worsen.
Terminology standards used in this manual
This manual uses the following terminology standards:

Terminology Meaning or usage example

Select • Use the trackball on the control unit to move the cursor over the item to be
“selected”, then left-click.
• With a menu open: Press the appropriate menu number.
Left-click Press the left mouse button.
Right-click Press the right mouse button.
Control Unit Refers to the RCU-014 Control Unit, unless otherwise specified.
Open the menu. Press the MENU key to show the [MENU].
Close the menu. Press the MENU key to close the [MENU].
For the sake of brevity, all procedures in this manual use the terms “Open the menu.” and “Close
the menu”.

xiii
FOREWORD

Program numbers
Please access the following URL if you need software information:
http://www.furuno.com/en/merchant/chartradar/#software

System Program no. Version no. Remarks

Antenna unit (common to all antennas)
SPU 0359281 01.xx For magnetron radar
SPU 0359286 01.xx For solid state radar
MTR-DRV 0359293 01.xx
PM 0359296 01.xx
RF-Converter 0359302 01.xx For solid state radar
Processor Unit: RPU-025
MAIN 0359377 01.xx
SUB 0359380 01.xx
Control Unit: RCU-014/015/016
KEY 0359385 01.xx
xx: Denotes minor changes to the software.

xiv
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

NOTICE
The radar(s) must be interconnected to the following type approved sensors:
• Gyrocompass (or equivalent devices) meeting the requirements of the
IMO resolution A.424(XI).
• EPFS meeting the requirements of the IMO resolution MSC.112(73).
• SDME meeting the requirements of IMO resolution MSC.96(72).
The radar may be interconnected via HUB-3000 to other FURUNO processing
units having approved LAN ports.

Note: The footnotes for *1 to *7 are listed in "Notes" on page xix.

X-band - UP

ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT

(for FAR-2218(-BB)/2318, 12 kW) (for FAR-2228(-BB)/2328, 25 kW)
XN12CF-RSB128-105 XN12CF-RSB128-106
XN20CF-RSB128-105 XN20CF-RSB128-106
XN24CF-RSB128-105 XN24CF-RSB128-106

Sub display
Antenna Cable*5
100-115/220-230 VAC : Standard supply
1ø, 50-60 Hz : Optional or local supply
(for de-icer)
Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format)
Control Unit
RCU-014 or RCU-015
Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format)
Control Unit RCU-016
AIS Transponder
Monitor Unit*3
MU-190 or
100-230 VAC MU-231 or EPFS*2 (GPS)
MU-270W
PROCESSOR SDME (Speed log)
Intelligent Hub UNIT
100-230 VAC HUB-3000*6 RPU-025
AMS (IEC61162 format)

VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) Switching HUB
ECDIS
100-230 VAC HUB-100*7

VDR AMS (Contact)*4

(Analog RGB)
100-230 VAC Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS
1ø, 50-60 Hz
440 VAC Transformer Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS
1ø, 50-60 Hz

xv
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

S-band - UP

ANTENNA UNIT ANTENNA UNIT

(for FAR-2238S(-BB)/2338S, 30 kW) (for FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT, 250 W)
SN24CF-RSB129-107 SN24CF-RSB133-111
SN30CF-RSB129-107 SN30CF-RSB133-111
SN36CF-RSB129-107 SN36CF-RSB133-111

: Standard supply
Sub display
: Optional or local supply
100-115/220-230 VAC Antenna Cable
1ø, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer)

Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format)

Control Unit
RCU-014 or RCU-015
Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format)
Control Unit RCU-016

AIS Transponder
Monitor Unit*3
MU-190 or
100-230 VAC MU-231 or EPFS*2 (GPS)
MU-270W
PROCESSOR
UNIT
SDME (Speed log)
Intelligent Hub RPU-025
100-230 VAC HUB-3000*6
AMS (IEC61162 format)
VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) Switching HUB
100-230 VAC HUB-100*7 ECDIS

VDR
(Analog RGB) AMS (Contact)*4

100-230 VAC Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS

1ø, 50-60 Hz
440 VAC Transformer Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS
1ø, 50-60 Hz

xvi
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

X-band - DOWN

Antenna Unit
(for FAR-2328W, 25 kW)
100-115/220-230 VAC
XN20CF-RSB130
1ø, 50-60 Hz
XN24CF-RSB130
(for de-icer)

Signal cable Wave guide

Sub display TRANSCEIVER UNIT

RTR-108 : Standard supply
: Optional or local supply
Antenna Cable

Control Unit
RCU-014 or RCU-015 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format)

Control Unit RCU-016 Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format)

Monitor Unit*3 AIS Transponder

100-230 VAC MU-231 or
MU-270W PROCESSOR EPFS*2 (GPS)
UNIT
Intelligent Hub RPU-025 SDME (Speed log)
100-230 VAC HUB-3000*6
AMS (IEC61162 format)
VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) Switching HUB ECDIS
100-230 VAC HUB-100*7

VDR AMS (Contact)*4

(Analog RGB)
Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS
100-230 VAC
1ø, 50-60 Hz
Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS
440 VAC Transformer
1ø, 50-60 Hz

xvii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

S-band - DOWN

Antenna Unit
(for FAR-2338SW, 30 kW)
SN36CF-RSB131
: Standard supply
: Optional or local supply
100-115/220-230 VAC
1ø, 50-60 Hz
(for de-icer)

Signal cable Coaxial cable

Sub display TRANSCEIVER UNIT

RTR-109

Antenna Cable

Control Unit
RCU-014 or RCU-015 Gyrocompass*1 (AD-10 format)

Control Unit RCU-016 Gyrocompass*1 (IEC61162 format)

Monitor Unit*3 AIS Transponder

100-230 VAC MU-231 or
MU-270W EPFS*2 (GPS)
PROCESSOR
Intelligent Hub UNIT SDME (Speed log)
100-230 VAC HUB-3000*6 RPU-025
AMS (IEC61162 format)
VDR
(IEC61162-450 format) Switching HUB ECDIS
100-230 VAC HUB-100*7

VDR AMS (Contact)*4

(Analog RGB)
100-230 VAC Sub Monitor 1 of ECDIS
1ø, 50-60 Hz
440 VAC Transformer Sub Monitor 2 of ECDIS
1ø, 50-60 Hz

xviii
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

Category of units
Antenna units: Exposed to the weather.

Other units: Protected from the weather.

Notes
1) The gyrocompass must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution A.424(XI) (and/
or resolution A.821(19) for installation on HSC). The gyrocompass must also have an update
rate that is adequate for the ship’s rate of turn. The update rate must be better than 40 Hz
(HSC) or 20 Hz (conventional vessel).
2) The EPFS must be type approved for compliance with IMO resolution MSC.96(72).
3) These monitors have been approved by the IMO, MU-190 for CAT 2C and CAT 2HC, MU-231/
MU-270W for CAT 1C and CAT 1HC. If a different monitor is to be used on IMO vessels, its
effective diameter must meet the applicable Category requirements:
• CAT 1C and CAT 1HC: effective diameter 320 mm or higher;
• CAT 2C and CAT 2HC: effective diameter 250 mm or higher.
For installation, operation and viewing distance of other monitor, see its manuals.
For BB type, a monitor unit is prepared by user.
4) Characteristics of contact output for Alarm:
• (Load current) 250 mA;
• (Polarity) Normally Open: 2 ports, Normally Close: 2 ports;
• Serial I/O for alarm is also possible, which complies with IEC 61162-1.
5) For X-Band TR-UP radars only, a junction box is required for antenna cable extension to
lengths greater than 100 m. The maximum cable length is 400 m.
6) For configurations with 3 or more radars/ECDIS (FMD-3100/FMD-3200/FMD-3300) connect-
ed, connect via the HUB-3000. For 2 radars, HUB-100 can be used.
7) For configurations with a VDR connected, connect via the HUB-100.

xix
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

This page is intentionally left blank.

xx
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.1 Controls Overview

Two types of control units are available for your FAR-2xx8: a full keyboard (RCU-014)
or palm control (RCU-015/RCU-016).

Most operations can be done with either type of Control Unit. Throughout the manual,
procedures are outlined using the RCU-014, unless otherwise specified.

1.1.1 Control Unit RCU-014

You can control almost all aspects of your radar from the RCU-014. The figure and
table below show an overview of the control unit with a brief description of the controls.

BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN

OFF ON OFF ON

1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE

4 5 6
F1 F2 OFF CU/TM INDEX MENU ACQ
CENTER RESET LINE

F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 TARGET
CANCEL ENTER
ACK TX TRAILS BRILL MARK
- CANCEL

No. Control Name Description

1 Power button Turn the power on or off. See section 1.2.
2 EBL controls • EBL keys: Turn the EBLs on or off.
• EBL knob: Move the selected EBL.
See section 1.33.
3 BRILL knob Adjust echo brilliance and screen brilliance. See section 1.3.
A/C RAIN knob Adjust auto/manual clutter reduction for rain. See section 1.21.
A/C SEA knob Adjust auto/manual clutter reduction for rough seas. See
section 1.20.
GAIN knob Adjust the gain (sensitivity). See section 1.19.
4 VRM controls • VRM keys: Turn the VRMs on or off.
• VRM knob: Move the selected VRM.
See section 1.32.
5 Functions keys (F1 to Perform a pre-registered function. See section 1.9.
F4)
ALARM ACK key Acknowledge active alerts. See section 1.51.
5 STBY TX key Toggle the radar operation between transmit (TX) and standby
(STBY). See section 1.16.

1-1
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Control Name Description

6 1, HL OFF key • With the menu open: Select menu item "1".
• Press and hold to hide the heading line. Release to re-show the
heading line. See section 1.42.6.
2, EBL OFFSET key • With the menu open: Select menu item "2".
• Sets the positive/negative value to “+”. See section 1.14 and
section 1.10.
• Offset or reset the EBL. See section 1.34.
3, MODE key • With the menu open: Select menu item "3".
• Change the orientation mode. See section 1.30.
4, OFF CENTER key • With the menu open: Select menu item "4".
• Enable or disable off-center. See section 1.36.
5, CU/TM RESET key • With the menu open: Select menu item "5".
• Course Up mode: Reset the heading line to 000°. See
section 1.30.
• True Motion mode: Move Own Ship position 75% of the radius
in opposite direction of the current heading. See section 1.30.
6, INDEX LINE key • With the menu open: Select menu item "6".
• Short press: Select a PI line. See section 1.40.
• Long press: Show or hide the selected PI line. See section 1.40.
7, VECTOR TIME key • With the menu open: Select menu item "7".
• Change the vector time. See section 3.12.2.
8, VECTOR MODE key • With the menu open: Select menu item "8".
• Sets the positive/negative value to “-”. See section 1.14 and
section 1.10.
• Toggle between true and relative vectors. See section 3.12.
9, TARGET LIST key • With the menu open: Select menu item "9".
• Show or hide the TT/AIS target list. See section 3.10.4.
CANCEL TRAILS key Without the menu open (see section 1.37.2):
• Short press: Change the trail display time.
• Long press: Erase displayed trails.
With the menu open (see section 1.5):
• Go back one level in the menu. Closes the menu if the top level
is displayed.
• Cancel changes made to a menu setting.
0, BRILL key • With the menu open: Select menu item "0".
• Change the color scheme. See section 1.44.
ENTER MARK key Inside the Operational Display Area (ODA):
Inscribe a mark. See section 1.42.
With the menu open:
Confirm changes, open the selected menu. See section 1.5
7 MENU key Open or close the menu the menu. See section 1.5.
Note: The MENU key will not open/close the menu in the following
situations:
• VRM or EBL is being set.
• DROP MARK or MARK is being inscribed.
• Alarm Zone (AZ) or TARGET ALARM is being set.
RANGE controls Increase or decrease the range. See section 1.31.
ACQ key • Manually acquire the cursor-highlighted target for Target Track-
ing (TT).

1-2
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Control Name Description

7 TARGET DATA key • Show the information for the cursor-highlighted target.
• Change the selected TT target’s symbol (B-type only).
• Activate a sleeping AIS target. See section 3.2.
TARGET CANCEL key • Cancel tracking for the selected target.
• Sleep the selected AIS target.
• Long press: Cancel tracking for all TT targets. See section 3.2.
8 Trackball controls See section 1.1.2.

1.1.2 Control Unit RCU-015/RCU-016

The RCU-015 and RCU-016 offer an easy to use mouse-like control interface, without
the bulkiness of the RCU-014. You can access all your radar functions from the RCU-
015/RCU-016, however, only the function keys are available as short-cut keys.

F1

F2

F3

F4

No. Control Name Description

1 Power button* Turn the power on or off.
See section 1.2.
2 Functions keys (F1 to F4) Perform a pre-registered function.
See section 1.9.
3 Right mouse button Short press:
• Show the pop up menu for the highlighted item.
• Cancel changes to the currently selected setting.
• With pop up menus shown: Hide pop up menus.
Long press:
• Change the screen brilliance to [50].
4 Scrollwheel • Change settings.
• Highlight a menu item.
5 Left mouse button Select a highlighted object or menu item.
6 Trackball • Moves the cursor.
• Highlight an object or menu item.
*: The RCU-016 Control Unit has no power button. To turn the power on or off when
using a RCU-016 Control Unit, use the power button on the RCU-014 Control Unit.

1-3
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.2 How to Turn the Radar On/Off

The power button ( ) is located at the top-left corner of the RCU-014 and RCU-015
Control Units.

Note: The RCU-016 Control Unit has no power button. To turn the power on or off
when using a RCU-016 Control Unit, use the power button on the RCU-014 Control
Unit.
To turn the power on, open the power switch cover, then press the power button.

The LED to the left of the power button lights up (green color) and the system begins
the startup process. The indication "Initializing......" appears at the center of the
screen.

When the startup process is complete, the system begins warm-up procedures to pre-
pare the magnetron for transmission. The warm-up can take up to three minutes.

During the warm-up, indications for total on-time (magnetron on-time since installa-
tion) and total transmission time (since installation) appear below the warm-up count-
down timer. These indications are also displayed when the radar is in standby mode.

When the warm-up process is complete, the radar goes into standby (STBY) mode
and the indication "RADAR STBY" (IMO-types) or "STBY" (A/B/R-types) appears.

Note: Do not turn on the power directly after it has been turned off. Wait several sec-
onds before you reapply the power, to be sure the radar starts up properly.
To turn the power off, open the power switch cover, then press the power button.

Note: Solid state radars do not have a magnetron, therefore they have no warming
period.

1.3 How to Adjust the Brilliance

The screen brilliance (brightness) for monitors can be adjusted as shown below.

Note: The following procedure applies only to monitors supplied by FURUNO for this
system. For other monitors, see the monitor operator’s manual to adjust the brilliance.

Brilliance adjustment from the Control Unit (RCU-014)

Rotate the BRILL knob clockwise to increase the brilliance (brighter), or rotate the
BRILL knob counter-clockwise to reduce the brilliance (darker).

Brilliance adjustment from the on-screen box

Select the [BRILL] box, the spin the scrollwheel on the Control Unit upwards to reduce
the brilliance (darker) or downwards to increase the brilliance (brighter).

[BRILL] box

Note: The above scrollwheel operation is based on default settings for [2 MOUSE
WHEEL DIR]. See section 1.10.

1-4
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.4 Display Indications

Note: The example screen below may differ slightly from your display, depending on
the monitor purchased in your configuration. The overall information, however, is the
same.
The on-screen display for your radar system is divided into three main areas, as
shown in the figure below.

SCREEN
SHOT

• 1: InstantAccess bar™. See section 1.4.1.

• 2: Radar display and function boxes. See section 1.4.2.
• 3: Information and settings. See section 1.4.3.

Display specifications

MU-190 MU-231 MU-270W

Nominal viewing distance 1.02 m 1.20 m 1.02 m
Text height (min. font) 3.53 mm 4.23 mm 3.64 mm
Text width (min. font) 2.36 mm 2.97 mm 2.43 mm

1-5
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.4.1 InstantAccess bar™ buttons

Upper half

Button Description
Standby/Transmit button.
Toggle between standby (STBY) and transmit (TX).

Pulselength button.
PULSE Selects the pulselength.
L
Tune button.
TUNE Toggles between automatic and manual tuning. (See section 1.17.1.)
MAN Note: For SSD antennas, this button appears as "TX CH x" (“x” de-
notes the channel used for transmission).
Interference Rejector button.
IR Activates/deactivates the interference rejector feature.
OFF
Echo Stretch button.
ES Activates/deactivates the echo stretch function.
OFF Note: This item is grayed out under the following conditions:
• ACE function is active.
• No position data is input (excludes Dead Reckoning).
Echo Average button.
EAV Activates/deactivates the echo average function.
OFF
ACE button.
ACE Activates/deactivates the ACE (Auto Clutter Elimination) function.
OFF
Lower half

Button Description
Radar Map button.
MAP Shows/hides the radar map marks.
OFF
HEADING LINE button.
HL Left-click and hold to hide the heading line.
OFF
CU/TM RESET button
CU/TM • Puts the ship’s heading at the top of the screen in course-up mode
RESET the moment this button is pressed.
• Resets the ship's position to a point of 75% radius opposite to the ex-
tension of the heading line passing through the display center in true
motion modes.
Own Ship AIS button.
OWN Shows the AIS VOYAGE DATA for AIS data setup.
AIS
AIS Message button.
• Displays received AIS messages.
AIS • Opens the [AIS Message] menu.
Brilliance button.
PLT1 • Adjusts the screen brilliance
100 • Opens the [BRILLIANCE] menu.
• Selects the color palette. See section 1.44.1.

1-6
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.4.2 Radar display and shortcuts

Operational Display Area

No. Name Description

- Operational Display Area Radar echoes are displayed here.
1 [RANGE] box Shows/changes the current range in use.
2 [REF POINT] box Shows/changes the point of reference.
3 Indications Shows indications for SART, shuttle ferry mode, etc.
4 [WATCH] box • Shows the watch alert countdown timer.
• Resets the watch alert countdown.
5 [ECHO ADJUST] box Place the cursor on a box to adjust the setting.
• [GAIN] bar: Shows the level of gain in use.
• [SEA] bar: Shows the level and mode of sea clutter re-
duction.
• [RAIN] bar: Shows the level and mode of rain clutter re-
duction.
6 Cursor position details Shows the location (coordinates) of the cursor with the
estimated TTG to the cursor position.
7 [MAP ALIGN] indication Shows/hides the map alignment status.
8 [MENU] box Opens/closes the menu.
9 User settings box • Loads pilot settings.
• Opens the [USER SET] menu.
10 [TGT LIST] box Shows the target details list for tracked TTs and active
AIS targets.
11 [TRIAL MANEUVERS] box • Activates/deactivates trial maneuvers.
• Sets up trial maneuver parameters.

1-7
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

No. Name Description

12 [ACQUISITION ZONE] box • Adjust acquisition zone settings for target alarms.
• Toggle between sentry zone and acquisition zone alert
modes.
13 [VRM] box • Activate/deactivate the VRM (Variable Range Marker).
• Adjust the active (selected) VRM.
• Shows VRM range and TTG.
14 [EBL] box • Activate/deactivate the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line).
• Adjust the active (selected) EBL.
• Shows EBL bearing.
15 [MAP MARK] box • Selects a map mark to use.
• Inscribes the selected map mark.
• Shows bearing and range from mark to cursor.
16 [PI Lines] box • Selects PI line set to use.
• Shows/hides the selected PI lines.
• Shows the angle, reference and range interval for the
PI lines.
17 [NOISE REJECTOR] indication Shows the noise rejector function’s ON/OFF status.
18 [TUNING LEVEL] bar • Shows the level of tuning in use. See section 1.17.
• Adjusts the tuning (manual only). See section 1.17.3.
Note: The [TUNING LEVEL] bar is not shown for solid
state radars.
19 [PICTURE] box Customize the way in which echoes are displayed.
20 [ANTENNA SELECTION] box Selects the antenna to use for radar images.
21 [PRESENTATION MODE] box Change the presentation (orientation) mode for the radar
images.
22 [DROP MARK] box Shows the bearing and range to the drop mark(s).
23 Screenshot button Saves a screenshot of the entire displayed area.
Note: Requires SD card to be inserted in the Processor
Unit. Shown in gray and not selectable if no SD card is in-
serted.

1-8
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.4.3 Information and settings

No. Description
1 Date/Time
Shows date and time (with offset indication).
Working indicator
Stops rotating if the system is not functioning normally
(screen freeze, etc.).
2 Own Ship information
Shows heading, speed, water tracking speed*1, COG,
SOG*2, coordinates and sensor used for data input.
3 Information box
• Shows information for selected TT or AIS targets.
• Shows the currently selected menu.
• Shows navigational data.
• Shows the performance monitor graph.
• Shows the zoomed area.
4 TT/AIS settings
Contains settings for vectors, CPA, TCPA, lost targets, trails,
etc.
5 Alert box
Shows active alerts and contains the buzzer silence button
and a shortcut to the alert list.
6 Guidance box
Shows operational guidance for the Control Unit’s left button
and right button.
*1: Direction is indicated with an arrow facing PORT or STBD.
*2: Where the data source for COG/SOG is a satellite log, the in-
52601
AIS
COM ERROR
dication shows "SLOG".

1-9
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.5 Menu Operations

1.5.1 How to open and close the main menu

The main menu can be accessed from the control unit or from the on-screen box. The
[MAIN MENU] appears in the information box at the right side of the screen.

From the control unit (RCU-014)

Press the MENU key on the control panel.

From the on-screen box

Select the [MENU] box, then press the left button.

Echo processing functions

Manages marks and tracks
Navigation tools (PI lines/EBL/VRM)
Sets target alarm functions
Sets TT and AIS functions
Manages stored data
Sets data display box items
Processes nav lines and waypoints
Sets up the radar; changes function key settings

Note: For the sake of abbreviation in procedures, the above methods are written col-
lectively as “Open the menu.” and “Close the menu.”

1.5.2 How to operate the menus

1. Open the menu.
2. Roll the scrollwheel to select a menu item, then left-click. The menu item currently
selected is highlighted and shown in reverse video. You can also select a menu
item by pressing the corresponding numeric key on the control unit.

Menu selection is
highlighted and in
reverse video.

Select menu items with arrows ( ) to access the next menu layer.
In this example, the [ECHO] menu is accessed, then the
[CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu is accessed.
The next menu layer appears. Menu items with arrows, as shown in the above ex-
ample figure, have their own menu layer. You can select these items to show the
respective menu.

1-10
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

3. Roll the scrollwheel to select a menu item, then left-click. You can also select a
menu item by pressing the corresponding numeric key.
When required. repeat this step to access the next menu.
In the example, [1 ECHO] is selected, which opens the [ECHO (1/2)] menu. Next,
[2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO] is selected, which opens the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO (1/
2)] menu. Finally, [3 ECHO STRETCH] is selected, in order to change settings.
Menus such as the [ECHO] menu and [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu have more
than one page. In this case, the currently displayed page is indicated in brackets
to the right of the menu title.
To view the next page of a menu, select [0 NEXT].
To go back one layer (or page) in the menu, left-click [1 BACK], or right-click.
4. Roll the scrollwheel to select the desired setting, then left-click. The selected set-
tings is highlighted and displayed in reverse video.
In the above example, the selected setting at [3 ECHO STRETCH] is [1].
Note 1: For some menu items, the software keyboard, shown in the figure below,
is displayed at the bottom of the menu. Select the number/character desired with
the cursor, then left-click. When you finish entering the desired numbers/charac-
ters, left-click the [END] button on the software keyboard.

Note 2: Unless otherwise stated, operations in this manual use the scrollwheel for
procedures which require menu selection, or settings changed.
5. Close the menu.

1-11
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.6 How to Use the On-screen Box Menus

Some radar functions can be accessed using the on-screen box as a shortcut to the
respective menus. A “X” at the right side of an on-screen box indicates that there is a
menu shortcut available.

Note: The cursor changes shape according to its location. When placed outside the
operational display area the cursor is an arrow ( ) shape. When placed inside the
operational display area, it is a cross ( ).

For the purpose of this example, place the cur-

Select the palette
sor on the palette indication (displayed as indication, then
"PLTx", where x is the currently selected palette right-click.
number), inside the brilliance settings box at the
bottom-left of the screen.

The selected item appears highlighted with a

light-blue colored box.

Right-click to show the [BRILL1] box menu.

Similar shortcuts are available from the follow-

ing on-screen boxes/indications:

• [PICTURE] box.
• [AIS] box.
• [TT] box.
• [HDG] indication.
• [SPD] indication.
• [POSN] indication.
• [PLT] indication.
• [ANTENNA SELECTION] box.
• User settings box.
• [MARK] box.
• Time indication ("UTC" or "Local").
• [TRAIL] indication.

1-12
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.7 How to Use the CURSOR Menu

Functions that require the use of the cursor, such as
EBL offset and zoom, can be activated directly from
the guidance box or from the [CURSOR] menu, either
method with the cursor inside the operational display
area. Below is the procedure for choosing cursor-re-
lated functions from the [CURSOR] menu.

1. Select the operational display area, then press

the right button.
The [CURSOR] menu appears.
2. Select the desired function, then left-click.
3. The guidance box shows "XX / EXIT" (XX = func-
tion selected). Use the trackball to place the cur-
sor where desired.
4. Left-click to execute the function selected at step
3.
5. To quit the selected function, right-click when the
guidance box shows "XX / EXIT" (XX = function
selected).
The table below list the contents of the cursor context menu with a brief descrip-
tion.
Menu Item Description
Page 1
TARGET DATA / ACQ TT: Acquires target; displays data for selected
tracked target.
AIS: Activates sleeping AIS target; displays data
for selected AIS target.
TARGET CANCEL TT: Cancels tracking on selected tracked target.
AIS: Sleeps selected AIS target.
TT TGT DATA / ACQ Acquires selected echo as tracked target.
REF MARK Inscribes reference mark, for target-based speed
input.
EBL OFFSET Offsets EBL to measure range and bearing be-
tween two targets.
OFFCENTER Shifts screen center to selected location.
ZOOM Zooms selected location.
TARGET TRACK ON* Shows the target tracks.
TARGET TRACK OFF* Hides the target tracks.
MARK DELETE Deletes selected mark (plotter mark, origin mark
or waypoint mark).
OWN TRACK DELETE Deletes own ship's tracks.
TGT TRACK DELETE* Deletes the selected target’s tracks.
MAP ALIGN Aligns charts (maps) with the radar picture.
TRAIL ERASER* Erases trails.
Page 2
TARGET DATA / ACQ SETTING Change target tracking settings.
TARGET CANCEL SETTING Change target cancel settings.
*: Shown on A/B-types only.

1-13
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.8 Cursor Data

The cursor data display shows the cursor’s latitude and longitude position or the cur-
sor’s X-Y co-ordinates.

Place the cursor on the [CURSOR DATA] box at the top-right side of the display then
press the left button to switch between display formats.

The data box shows the cursor location, bearing/range to the cursor location and the
time to go (TTG) to the cursor location.

Press the left button

to switch between Cursor’s X-Y
Bearing/range display formats co-ordinates
displayed displayed
33°59.156’N Cursor positon’s 33°59.156’N
135°06.328’E latitude/longitude 135°06.328’E
0.24.4ºR Bearing/range to X: +1.667NM
4.028NM cursor position. Y: +3.694NM
TTG 00:05 TTG to cursor position TTG 00:05

Note 1: For the X-Y co-ordinates display, the Y-axis is the upper/lower half of the
screen, the upper half of the screen is “plus” and the lower part of the screen is “mi-
nus”. The X-axis is the left/right-side of the screen, right is “plus”, left is “minus”.
Note 2: When displaying latitude and longitude position and the cursor has been
aligned (on the [CURSOR] menu), the indication "MAP ALIGN" appears at the right
side of the screen (in yellow).
Note 3: Cursor data reads "- - -.-" when the cursor is placed outside the operational
display area.

1.8.1 How to change the cursor data attributes (B-type only)

You can change the cursor bearing reference, cursor range unit, cursor size and also
align the cursor by latitude/longitude. Changing some of these settings affects the in-
dications in the cursor data display.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [3 EBL•VRM•CURSOR SET].
4. Select [9 CURSOR]. The [CURSOR] menu ap-
pears.
5. Select the item you want to change, referring to the
list below.
• [2 CURSOR BEARING]: Sets the bearing reference.
• [3 CURSOR RANGE]: Sets the unit for cursor range.
• [4 CURSOR SIZE]: Sets the cursor size.
• [5 CURSOR L/L ALIGN]: Set whether to align the cursor with latitude/
longitude.
6. Close the menu.

1-14
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.9 How to Set Up Function Keys

Some menu functions and menus can be assigned to a function key. This allows one-
touch access to the assigned function or menu.

To activate an assigned function, press the corresponding function key (F1, F2, F3 or
F4).

The current presets are listed at the bottom of the menu page and the function keys
are preset with the following functions:

F1: Interference Rejector, F2: Echo Stretch, F3:

AUTO-SEA, F4: AUTO-RAIN.

You can change the function assigned to each key us-

ing the following procedure.

1. Open the [MAIN MENU].

2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS].
3. Select [6 FUNCTION KEY SETUP]. The function
key setup menu appears.
4. Select the function key to set up.
5. Referring to the table of available functions be-
low, select a function category, then left-click.

Function
Available function
category
ECHO CUSTOM SELECT, IR, ES, EAV, NOISE REJ, ANT SELECT,
PULSE LENGTH, AUTO-SEA, AUTO-RAIN, TUNE SELECT, 2ND
ECHO REJ, STC CURVE, STC RANGE, PM, SART, ECHO TRAIL,
TRAIL T/R, WIPER*, ACE HIGH SENSITIVITY
STD KEY ALERT ACK, STBY TX, HL OFF, EBL OFFSET, ORIENTATION-
MODE, OFF CENTER, CU-TM RESET, PI LINE, VECTOR TIME,
VECTOR MODE, TARGET LIST, BRILL, MARK, MENU, RANGE
UP, RANGE DOWN, ACQ, TARGET DATA, TARGET CANCEL
TT•AIS TT-DISP, AIS-DISP, TARGET DATA & ACQ, PAST POSN INTER-
VAL, REF MARK, CPA LIMIT, CPA, TCPA, AZ1, AZ2, TARGET
LIST SORT, TRIAL MANEUVER, TRIAL MODE CHANGE, AIS
MESSAGE, AIS SCALED SYMBOL
DELETE DATA MARK DELETE, MARK ALL DELETE, OWN TRK DELETE, OWN
TRK ALL DELETE, TGT TRK DELETE*, TGT TRK ALL DELETE*
OPERATION BUZZER STOP, ECHO AREA*, ECHO COLOR, PALETTE,
RING(ON/OFF), ZOOM, MOB, ALARM1, ALARM2, WATCH ALERT
RESET, TLL*, MAP ALIGN, ANCHOR WATCH, DROP MARK,
SCREEN SHOT
*: B-types only.
6. Select the appropriate function to assign, then left-click.
You can check the currently assigned functions in the bottom half of the menu.
7. Repeat the procedure as necessary to set up other function keys.
8. Close the menu.

1-15
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.10 How to Customize Operation

Several operation items can be customized to suit
your needs.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTING].
3. Select [5 OPERATION]. The [OPERATION]
menu appears.
4. Referring to the table below, press the menu item
number to select the appropriate menu item to
customize. For the purpose of the this example,
press the 3 MODE key to set up the key beeps.

Menu items Description

[2 MOUSE WHEEL Sets the direction of the wheel drive (scrollwheel).
DIR] • [NORMAL]: Scroll downwards to increase, or upwards to de-
crease the value.
• [REVERSE]: Scroll directions are reverse of [NORMAL].
[3 KEY BEEP] Changes the key beep volume.
Select [OFF] to silence the key beeps. Select [LOW], [MID],
[HIGH] to adjust the volume for key beeps.
[4 OWN SHIP VEC- Select how the own ship vector is displayed.
TOR] • [OFF]; Own ship vector is not displayed.
• [HDG]: Vector is displayed in heading direction.
• [COURSE]: Vector is displayed in course direction.
[5 STERN UP RM] Select [ON] to show HEAD UP RM display in reversed.
Note: This item is shown for A/B-types only.
[6 SHUTTLE FERRY] Sets the shuttle ferry mode to use.
• [OFF]: Shuttle ferry mode is deactivated.
• [MODE1]: Shuttle ferry mode is activated. See "Shuttle ferry
mode" on next page.
• [MODE2]: Shuttle ferry mode is activated. See "Shuttle ferry
mode" on next page.
Note: Shuttle ferry mode requires an external switch.
[7 ICING PREVEN- Select [ON] to rotate the antenna without transmission, to pre-
TION] vent ice buildup. See section 1.52.
[8 HDG FINE AD- Adjusts the heading line location. 0.0°, the default setting,
JUST] shows the heading line pointing towards the top of the screen.
5. Select the required setting by pressing the menu item number. For this example,
set [3 KEY BEEP] to [HIGH]. Press the 3 MODE key to highlight [HIGH].
For [8 HDG FINE ADJUST] and other menu items with a setting range, spin the
scrollwheel, or use the number keys to adjust the required setting.
Note: Regarding input for [8 HDG FINE ADJUST], when using the number keys,
the indication is first selected as a whole. At this time, you can toggle between plus
“+” or minus “-”. Press the 8 key for “-”, press the 2 key for “+”. If single digits are
highlighted, toggle is not possible. In this case, press the CANCEL TRAILS key
to re-highlight the whole indication.

1-16
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

6. Press the ENTER MARK key to confirm and apply the selection.
7. Close the menu.

Shuttle ferry mode

The shuttle ferry mode changes the orientation of the display when the external switch
is turned on. (Refer to the Installation Manual (IME-36520-x; x denotes version num-
ber) for switch installation.)

There are two variations: Standard display ([SHUTTLE FERRY] is set to [OFF]) and
reversed display ([SHUTTLE FERRY] is set to [MODE1] or [MODE2]).

When the display is reversed for shuttle ferry mode, the following changes also occur:

• Echoes are displayed 180° opposite to normal display.

• Bearing for speed data is re-calibrated to 180° opposite to normal.
• Wind direction based on speed input is re-calibrated to 180° opposite to normal.
• Where [Mode2] is selected, data input from the gyrocompass is re-calibrated to 180°
opposite to normal.
Note: Gyrocompass data input is not re-calibrated for [Mode1].

Standard display: Gyro Reversed display: Gyro

input is displayed normally. input is displayed in reverse.

1.11 How to Select the Interface for Heading Input

When a gyrocompass is connected, the ship’s heading appears on the right side of the
screen, in the data display area.

Heading input format can be selected as follows:

1. Place the cursor on the [HDG X] indication in the heading box at the top-right of
the screen, then right-click. The [HDG] context menu appears.
2. Select [2 HDG SOURCE], then press the EN- Select the [HDG] indication
TER MARK key. then right-click.

3. Select [GYRO1] or [GYRO2] as appropriate, 185.7°T GYRO1

then press the ENTER MARK key.

4. Close the menu.
Note 1: The heading sensor must be able to follow a
minimum ROT of 20° per second. Heading sensors
with a lesser capability may degrade the perfor-
mance of echo averaging, trails and TT. The data refresh rate should also be as short
as possible. If the refresh rate is too long, the ability to follow courses lessens, thereby
affecting the performance of echo averaging, trails and TT.
Note 2: For IMO-types, Where the heading source is other than the heading sensor
(for example, and EPFS device), the sensor indication is displayed in yellow color.

1-17
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.12 How to Set Own Ship’s Speed

The TT and azimuth stabilized presentation modes require own ship speed input and
compass signal. The speed can be entered from a log (STW, SOG) or EPFS (SOG)
or manually on the menu.

Note: Where the own ship speed exceeds 99.9kn, the displayed speed is "99.9kn".

1.12.1 Automatic speed input (log or EPFS navigator)

1. Place the cursor on the [SPD X] indication in the

heading box at the top-right of the screen, then
right-click. The [SPD] context menu appears.
2. Select [2 SHIP SPEED], then press the ENTER
MARK key.
3. Select the appropriate source for automatic
speed input, then press the ENTER MARK key.

Selection Explanation Stabilization Mode

[LOG (BT)]*1 Log, speed over ground (SOG) Ground stabilization
[LOG (WT)] Log, Speed Thru Water (STW) Sea stabilization
[EPFS] Speed input by GPS navigator Ground stabilization
[MANUAL] Manually input speed Sea stabilization
[REF] Echo-referenced speed input Ground stabilization
[ECDIS]*2 Speed input by ECDIS Ground stabilization or Sea
Stabilization (Dependent on
ECDIS settings).
*1: Set and drift may be required to display [LOG (BT)] correctly in deep waters.
To change set and drift, see section 3.14.
*2: Where [ECDIS] is selected as the speed source, [4 OWN SHIP POSN] in the
[OWN SHIP INFO] menu is automatically set to [ECDIS] also. See section 1.13.
4. If you selected [MANUAL] as the speed data source, see section 1.12.2 to set the
speed.
5. Close the menu.

Notes on speed input

It should be noted that in determining a target's aspect by radar, the calculation of its
true track is dependent on the choice and accuracy of the own ship's course and
speed input. A ground-stabilized target plot may accurately calculate the ground track
of the target, but the target's heading may be significantly different from its track when
experiencing set, drift or leeway. Similarly, a sea stabilized target plot may be inaccu-
rate when own ship and the target, are experiencing different rates of set, drift or lee-
way.

• IMO Resolution A.823(19) for TT recommends that a speed log to be interfaced with
a TT should be capable of providing through-the-water speed (forward speed).

1-18
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

• Be sure not to select a [LOG] option when a speed log is not connected. If the log
signal is not provided, the ship speed readout at the top of the screen will be blank.
In the event of a log error, enter speed manually.
• The [SPD] is shown as "*.* kn" and the label "NO LOG(BT) SIGNAL" or "NO
LOG(WT) SIGNAL" (in yellow-orange) appears and the alert buzzer sounds if no log
signal is present for 30 s.
• When the speed input in use is interrupted or lost, the system automatically chang-
es to another speed input (stabilization reference) and outputs the "SPD SOURCE
CHG" alert.
• On IMO-type radars with AIS in use, [MANUAL] and [REF] are shown in gray to in-
dicate they are not available for selection.
• A single-axis water log cannot measure speed when the wind is coming from the
leeway direction.
• When [ECDIS] is selected as the speed data source and communication with the
ECDIS is interrupted or lost for 30 seconds, the Alert "ECDIS COM ERROR" is re-
leased.
• When speed stabilization is changed at the ECDIS and [ECDIS] is selected as the
speed data source, the Alert "SPD SOURCE CHG" is released.

1.12.2 Manual speed input

If the speed log is not working, enter speed manually as below. In this case the speed
data type is shown as "MANUAL" and is speed thru water (STW). Manual speed input
is not available on IMO-type radars when the AIS feature is active.

1. Place the cursor on the [SPD X] indication in the heading box at the top-right of
the screen, then right-click. The [SPD] context menu appears.
2. Select [2 SHIP SPEED], then press the ENTER MARK key.
3. Select [MANUAL], then press the ENTER MARK key.
4. Select [3 MANUAL SPEED INPUT], then press the ENTER MARK key.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to set the speed.
6. Press the ENTER MARK key to confirm the new setting.
7. Close the menu.

1-19
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.13 How to Set the Own Ship Position

You can select the data source for own ship’s position as follows:

1. Place the cursor on the [POSN X] indication in

the data display area, then right-click. The [OWN
SHIP POSN] menu appears.
2. Select [2 POSITION SOURCE] or [3 MANUAL L/
L INPUT] as appropriate, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
3. If [2 POSITION SOURCE] is selected at step 2,
select the appropriate position source, referring to
the list below, then press the ENTER MARK key.
[2 POSITION SOURCE] uses navigational aids.
Select the navigational aid to use. Available op-
tions are listed with a brief description in the table below:
Available options Description
[EPFS1] Use the device assigned as EPFS1 for position data.
[EPFS2] Use the device assigned as EPFS2 for position data.
[LAN] Use the device connected to the LAN1 port for position data.
[ECDIS] Use the connected ECDIS for position data.
[DEAD RECKONING] Position data is derived from dead reckoning (manual input)
Note 1: Where [2 POSITION SOURCE] is set to [DEAD RECKONING], the indi-
cation "DR" appears at the bottom of the [OS POSN] box.
Note 2: Where [2 POSITION SOURCE] is set to [DEAD RECKONING] or [MAN-
UAL L/L INPUT], the AIS function cannot be used.
Note 3: Where [2 POSITION SOURCE] is set to [ECDIS], the source for own ship
speed data is automatically set to [ECDIS] also.
Note 4: On IMO-type radars with AIS in use, [DEAD RECKONING] is shown in
gray to indicate it is not available for selection.
Note 5: Speed and heading data is required in order to correctly display [DEAD
RECKONING] position data.
4. To set [3 MANUAL L/L INPUT], do the following:
1) Select [3 MANUAL L/L INPUT]. The first digit of the latitude is highlighted.
2) Spin the scrollwheel to set the value, then left-click. The cursor moves to the
next digit.
You can also use the number keys on the Control Unit to input the value.
3) Repeat step 2 to set the latitude and longitude.
5. To share [OS POSN] data across the same network, do the following:
1) Select [SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT], then press the ENTER MARK key.
2) Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key to share data. To disable [OS
POSN] data sharing, select [OFF], then press the ENTER MARK key.
Note: A navigational aid must be selected at [2 POSITION SOURCE] to share
[OS POSN] across the same network.
6. Close the menu.

1-20
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.14 How to Adjust the Date and Time

Date and time are displayed at the top-right of the screen in the DATE/TIME box. You
can left-click the date/time format indication to toggle between [UTC] format and [LO-
CAL] format.

Date Time
Date/time format indication
Left-click: Toggle UTC and LOCAL time. 19 / SEP / 2016
Right-click: Open the [DATE] menu. 15 15
You can also adjust the local time and switch between time formats from the menu.

To adjust the local time, follow the procedure below.

1. Place the cursor on the Date/time format indication in the [DATE/TIME] box, then
right-click to show the [DATE] menu.

Back to [OWN SHIP INFO] menu

Date and time format

Local time offset

2. Select [2 DATE-TIME], then select [UTC] or [LOCAL] as appropriate.

• [UTC]: Date and time are displayed in UTC format.
• [LOCAL]: Date and time are shown with the local time offset applied.
3. Select [3 ADJUST LOCAL TIME], then press the ENTER MARK key.

Time indication highlighted as a whole. Single digit is highlighted. Toggle

Toggle between “+” and “-” is possible. between “+” and “-” is not possible.
4. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the number keys to input the desired offset.
The offset must be in 30 minute increments.
Note: Regarding input for [3 ADJUST LOCAL TIME], when using the number
keys, the indication is first selected as a whole. At this time, you can toggle be-
tween plus “+” or minus “-”. Press the 8 key for “-”, press the 2 key for “+”. If single
digits are highlighted, toggle is not possible. In this case, press the CANCEL
TRAILS key to re-highlight the whole indication.
5. Close the menu.

1-21
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.15 User Settings

The user functions shown in the table below can be reset to their default settings by
enabling the [PILOT SETTING] option in the [USER SET] menu. Functions not shown
in the table below maintain their previous setting.

The unit can store two separate user settings, for the functions listed below, in the in-
ternal memory. These settings can also be recalled. Functions not shown in the table
below cannot be stored or recalled.

Function Setting(s) Menu/On-screen box

GAIN Maintained as per [GAIN] box
previous setting.
SEA [AUTO] [SEA] box
RAIN [AUTO] [RAIN] box
TUNE [AUTO] [TUNE] box (Magnetron radars only)
TX CH Maintained as per previous setting. (Solid State radars only)
Range [6 NM] [RANGE] box
Range rings [OFF] [MAIN MENU] o [NAV TOOLS] o [RANGE
RINGS]
VRM1 Display [ON] [VRM1] box
Distance [0.250 NM]
VRM2 Display [OFF] [VRM2] box
Distance [0.000 NM]
EBL1 Display [ON] [EBL1] box
Bearing Maintained as per
previous setting.
Reference Maintained as per [MAIN MENU] o [NAV TOOLS] o
previous setting. [EBL•VRM•CURSOR SET] o [EBL•CURSOR
BEARING]
EBL2 Display [OFF] [EBL2] box
Bearing Maintained as per
Reference previous setting. [MAIN MENU] o [NAV TOOLS] o
[EBL•VRM•CURSOR SET] o [EBL•CURSOR
BEARING]
PI Lines Display [OFF] [PI Line] box
Interval
Orientation
Bearing (True [MAIN MENU] o [NAV TOOLS] o [PI LINES]
or Relative) o [PI LINE BEARING] *1
Number of PI [MAIN MENU] o [NAV TOOLS] o [PI LINES]
lines o [SET MAXIMUM PI LINE]
Mode [MAIN MENU] o [NAV TOOLS] o [PI LINES]
(Parallel or o [PI LINE MODE]
Perpendicular)
Presentation Mode [NORTH UP TM] [PRESENTATION MODE] box
Stabilization mode (Sea/ [EPFS] (Ground) [SPEED] box o [SHIP SPEED]
Ground)
Off-centering On-centering OFF CENTER key.*2
Target Display, time [ON], [6 MIN] [TRAIL MODE] box
trails Mode [TRUE] [PAST POSN] box
Continued on following page.

1-22
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Function Setting(s) Menu/On-screen box

Continued from previous page.
Past position [OFF] [PAST POSN] box
Vector mod [REL] [VECTOR] box
Vector time [6 MIN]
AZ1 [OFF] [AZ1] box
AZ2 [OFF] [AZ2] box
TT acquisition mode [MAN100] [TT TARGET] o [TT SELECT]
AIS display [DISP ALL] [AIS] box
Association [ON] (TT > AIS) [MAIN MENU] o [TT•AIS] o [TARGET ASSO-
CIATION] o [ASSOCIATION TGT TYPE]
Lost Target Alert [OFF] (Disabled) LOST TARGET ALERT box
CPA/ ON/OFF [ON] [CPA LIMIT] box
TCPA CPA [2 NM]
alarm TCPA [12 MIN]
*1: This menu is not available for IMO/A-types and the setting is fixed to [TRUE].

*2: Has the same effect as selecting the True Motion presentation mode.

1.15.1 How to reset the user settings

1. Select the [USER SET] box, then right-

USER Select the [USER SET]
click to display the [USER SETTINGS] box, then right-click.
SET
menu.
2. Select [PILOT SETTING], then press
the ENTER MARK key.
3. Select [YES], then press the ENTER USER SETTINGS
MARK key. 1 BACK
4. Close the menu. 2 PILOT SETTING
NO / YES
Note 1: Items not shown in the above table
3 USER 1 SAVE
keep their previous settings when [PILOT
NO / YES
SETTING] is activated.
4 USER 1 LOAD
Note 2: TT tracking is continued after [PI- NO / YES
LOT SETTING] is activated. 5 USER 2 SAVE
NO / YES
Note 3: The radar map displays the same
6 USER 2 LOAD
map as before [PILOT SETTING] is acti-
NO / YES
vated.

1-23
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.15.2 How to save/load user settings

1. Select the [USER SET] box, then right-click to display the [USER SETTINGS]
menu.
2. Select [USER1(2) LOAD] or [USER1(2) SAVE] to recall or save user settings, re-
spectively, then press the ENTER MARK key.
3. Select [YES], then press the ENTER MARK key.
4. Close the menu.
When loading settings, the following points apply:

• If the newly loaded settings cannot be applied to items not listed in the table above,
then these items keep their previous settings.
• TT tracking is continued after the settings are loaded.
• The radar map displays the same map as before the settings were loaded.

1.16 How to Start/Stop Transmission

The radar is ready to transmit when the message "STBY" appears in the operational
display area. Transmission can be started using one of the following procedures:

• Using the control unit: Press the STBY TX key.

• Using the on-screen box: Left-click the button on the InstantAccess bar™.

When the radar is switch to TX (transmit) status, most settings (such as brilliance,
range, pulse width, etc) are restored with the same settings as before standby.
For magnetron radars, it is recommended to place the radar in standby when trans-
mission is not required, to reduce wear on the magnetron. You can also set a “blank
sector” where transmission is stopped (see the Installation Manual for details).

How to stop antenna rotation

Antenna rotation can be stopped using one of the following procedures:

• Turn the antenna switch off.

• Turn antenna rotation off from the menu (See installation manual).

Screen freeze
The screen is not refreshed if the screen has frozen. An audio alarm is released 30
seconds after a screen freeze. The ALARM ACK key flashes and a contact alert sig-
nal is also released. To return the radar to normal operation, turn the radar off, then
on again.

Quick start
Provided that the radar was in use and the magnetron (transmitter tube) is still warm,
you can switch to transmit mode without the three minute warm-up time. If the radar
was turned off by mistake or you wish to restart the radar promptly, wait several sec-
onds before you press the POWER switch.

1-24
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.17 How to Tune the Receiver (Magnetron Radars

Only)
Your magnetron radar has a tuning function (automatic or manual). For solid-state ra-
dars, tuning is not available.

1.17.1 How to select the tuning method

1. Select the [TUNE] button, at the top of the InstantAccess bar™, to change the tun-
ing method. The tuning box is displayed as "TUNE AUTO" or "TUNE MAN", de-
pending on the currently selected tuning method.
2. Left-click to toggle between automatic and manual tuning.

Tuning method Tuning

Shown as “TUNE MAN” level
or “TUNE AUTO”. indication

1.17.2 How to initialize tuning

Automatic tuning is initialized at installation. However,

if you feel that the automatic tuning is not functioning
properly, re-initialize it by following the procedure be-
low.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 ECHO], then press the ENTER MARK
key.
3. Select [4 TUNING INITIALIZE], then press the
ENTER MARK key.
The indication "TUNE INIT" appears in yellow
characters at the top of the display during the initialization.
4. Close the menu.

1.17.3 How to tune the receiver manually

1. Select the 48-mile range from the [RANGE] box. Left-click to lower the range;
right-click to raise the range.
2. Select manual tuning following the procedure in section 1.17.1.
3. Place the arrow on the tuning level indication.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust tuning. The best tuning point is where the bar graph
swings maximum. The tuning control position is indicated with a triangle, dis-
played inside the tuning bar.

1-25
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.18 How to Select a Pulselength

The pulselength in use is indicated on the PULSE button ( PULSE ) of the InstantAc-
L
cess bar™, at the top-left of the screen.The table below shows the indications and their
meaning.

(PULSE) indication (PULSE) indication

S1 (short pulse 1) M2 (medium pulse 2)
S2 (short pulse 2) M3 (medium pulse 3)
M1 (medium pulse 1) L (long pulse)
Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales and function keys. If
you are not satisfied with the current pulselength settings, you can change them as
shown in the procedure below.

1.18.1 How to select a pulselength

The pulselength can be changed using the procedure below.
1. Place the cursor in the [PULSE] box at the top left corner of the screen.
2. Left-click to decrease, right-click to increase the pulselength; or spin the scroll-
wheel to cycle through pulselengths.
The order in which the pulselengths are cycled is shown in the table below. "*" in-
dicates the default preset for each range setting.
Range (PULSE) indication Range (PULSE) indication
0.5 NM S1*, S2 6 NM M1, M2*, M3, L
0.75 NM S1*, S2, M1 12 NM M1, M2, M3*, L
1.5 NM S1*, S2, M1, M2 24 NM M2, M3, L*
3 NM S2*, M1, M2, M3
Note: Available pulselengths are restricted depending on the range.

1.18.2 How to change the preset pulselength

To change the preset pulselength for a range setting, follow the procedure below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO].
4. Select [9 PULSE].
5. Select the desired range, then select the required
pulselength.
6. Close the menu.

1-26
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.19 How to Adjust Sensitivity

The gain control adjusts the sensitivity of the receiver.

The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If
you set up for too little sensitivity, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand
excessive sensitivity yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed
because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on
the display.
To adjust receiver sensitivity, adjust the gain control so background noise is just visible
on the screen.

How to adjust the GAIN from the control unit (RCU-014)

Rotate the GAIN knob. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease the gain, or clockwise to in-
crease the gain.

How to adjust the GAIN from the on-screen box

1. Place the cursor in the [GAIN] box at the top of the screen.

GAIN 40 Place the cursor inside the gain

level indication, then spin the
scrollwheel.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the gain. The setting range is [0] to [100].

1.20 How to Reduce Sea Clutter

Echoes from waves cover the central part of the display with random signals known
as sea clutter. The higher the waves, and the higher the antenna above the water, the
further the clutter extends. When sea clutter masks the picture, reduce it with the A/C
SEA control, either manually or automatically.

Note 1: When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is de-
creased more than when only one is changed. For that reason adjust them carefully.
Note 2: The echo average function (see section 1.24) is useful for reducing reflections
from the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than station-
ary ones when echo average is active.

1.20.1 How to select the method of clutter adjustment

1. Place the cursor in the [SEA AUTO] or [SEA MAN] (whichever is shown) level in-
dication at the top of the display.

Place the cursor on the [AUTO] or

[MAN] indication, then left-click.

SEA MAN 40

2. Left-click to display [SEA AUTO] or [SEA MAN] as appropriate.

1-27
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.20.2 How to fine-tune sea clutter reduction

Auto A/C SEA allows for fine tuning of the A/C SEA circuit, within ±20 dB. Accordingly,
with the bar reading set to 50, gain is not lowered to minimum as with manual A/C SEA
on close-in ranges. Further, the auto A/C SEA level is low because the average value
of the original input echo is low in areas where there are no sea surface reflections.
For example, when the ship is alongside a quay and the radar picture shows echoes
from both land and sea, you can observe the size of the echoes because the STC
curve changes with the size of the echoes.

Note: The auto A/C function can erase weak target echoes. Adjust the control care-
fully, watching the display.

How to fine-tune sea clutter reduction from the control unit (RCU-014)
Rotate the AC/SEA knob. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease the AC/SEA, or clockwise
to increase the A/C SEA.

How to fine-tune sea clutter reduction from the on-screen box

1. Select [SEA AUTO], following the procedure in section 1.20.1.
2. Place the arrow on level indicator inside the A/C SEA box at the top of the display.

SEA AUTO 20 Place the cursor inside the

level indication, then spin the
scrollwheel.
3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, spin the scrollwheel to adjust the
clutter reduction. The setting range is [-50] to [50].

1.20.3 How to manually reduce sea clutter

Sea clutter at A/C SEA control adjusted;

screen center sea clutter reduced

Note: The proper setting of the A/C SEA should be such that the clutter is broken up
into small dots, and small targets become distinguishable. If the setting is set too low,
targets will be hidden in the clutter, while if the setting is too high, both sea clutter and
targets will disappear from the display. In most cases adjust the control until clutter has
disappeared to leeward, but a little is still visible windward. Be careful not to remove
all sea clutter, because you may erase weak echoes. Further, the possibility of losing
weak echoes is greater when you use both A/C SEA and A/C RAIN to reduce clutter.

How to reduce sea clutter manually from the control unit (RCU-014)
Rotate the AC/SEA knob. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease the AC/SEA, or clockwise
to increase the A/C SEA.

1-28
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

How to reduce sea clutter manually from the on-screen box

1. Select [SEA MAN], following the procedure in section 1.20.1.
2. Place the arrow on level indicator inside the A/C SEA box at the top of the display.

SEA MAN 40 Place the cursor inside the

level indication, then spin the
scrollwheel.
3. While observing the A/C SEA level indicator, spin the scrollwheel to adjust the
clutter reduction. The setting range is [0] to [100].

1.20.4 How to use the BERTHING STC function

The [BERTHING STC] function allows you to show the main bang echo, even with the
range set at 0.5 NM or less with AUTO SEA at maximum setting. This is particularly
useful when attempting to berth, as it gives a clearer view of the berthing area and your
ship’s location.
To use the [BERTHING STC] function, follow the procedure below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [0 NEXT]. The second page of the [ECHO]
menu appears.
4. Select [5 BERTHING STC].
5. Select [ON] to activate, or [OFF] to deactivate,
this function.

1.21 How to Reduce Rain Clutter

Use the AUTO RAIN and A/C RAIN to reduced rain clutter. AUTO RAIN reduces rain
clutter in the picture and A/C RAIN reduces clutter picked up by the antenna.

Note 1: When both sea clutter and rain clutter are reduced, the sensitivity is de-
creased more than when only one is changed. For that reason adjust them carefully.
Note 2: The echo average function (see section 1.24) is useful for reducing reflections
from the sea surface. However, high-speed targets are harder to detect than station-
ary ones when echo average is active.

1.21.1 How to select the method of rain clutter reduction

1. Place the cursor in the [RAIN AUTO] or [RAIN MAN] (whichever is shown) level
indication at the top of the display.
Place the cursor inside the
level indication, then left-click.

RAIN MAN 40
2. Left-click to display [RAIN AUTO] or [RAIN MAN] as appropriate.
Note: Unlike sea clutter reduction, rain clutter cannot be finely adjusted when set
to [AUTO].

1-29
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.21.2 How to manually reduce the rain clutter

The vertical beam width of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when
the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect rain clutter (rain,
snow, or hail) in the same manner as normal targets.

Rain clutter at A/C RAIN control adjusted;

screen center rain clutter reduced

Note: The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver sensitivity as the A/C SEA control
does but rather in a longer time period (longer range). The higher the setting the great-
er the anti-clutter effect. When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the
A/C RAIN control to split up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making
recognition of solid targets easier. Be careful remove all rain clutter, because you can
erase weak echoes. Further, the possibility of losing weak echoes is greater when you
use both A/C RAIN and A/C SEA to reduce clutter.

How to fine-tune rain clutter reduction from the control unit (RCU-014)
Rotate the A/C RAIN knob. Rotate anticlockwise to decrease the A/C RAIN, or clock-
wise to increase the A/C RAIN.

How to fine-tune rain clutter reduction from the on-screen box

1. Select [RAIN MAN], following the procedure in section 1.21.1.

RAIN MAN 40 Place the cursor inside the

level indication, then spin the
scrollwheel.
2. While observing the A/C RAIN level indicator, spin the scrollwheel to increase or
decrease the level. 100 levels (0-100) are available.
Note: The detection range is reduced when the RAIN is used to show targets in rain.
Generally, the amount of rain, TX pulse length and TX frequency are factors in deter-
mining how the detection range is affected. The figure below illustrates this.

1-30
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

How to interpret the graph

Using the graph below as an example, a radar target originally detected on the 8 NM
range can only be detected in rain at the ranges shown below:

16
4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
(NM)

16 mm/h rain - short pulse

Detection(NM)

14 4 mm/h rain - short pulse 16 mm/h rain (short pulse)

16 mm/h rain - long pulse
4 mm/h rain - long pulse
detection

12
4 mm/h rain (long pulse)
10
First

16 mm/h rain (long pulse)

ofoffirst

16 mm/h rain - short pulse

48mm/h rain - short pulse
16 mm/h rain - long pulse
Range

46mm/h rain - long pulse

range
of of

4
Reduction
Reduction

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Original range of first detection (NM)
Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at S-band

16
16 mm/h rain - short pulse
4 mm/h rain - short pulse
14
Reduction of Range of First Detection (NM)

16 mm/h rain - long pulse

4 mm/h rain - long pulse 4 mm/h rain (short pulse)
12
4 mm/h rain (long pulse)
10
16 mm/h rain (short pulse)
8

4
16 mm/h rain (long pulse)
2

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Original range of first detection (NM)
Reduction of rain to first detection due to rain at X-band
The author thanks the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) for permission to reproduce Information from its Interantional
Standard IEC 62388 ed.1.0 (2007). All such extracts are copyright of IEC, Geneva, Switzerland. All rights reserved. Further
information on the IEC is available from www.iec.ch. IEC has no responsibility for the placement and context in which the extracts
and contents are reproduced by the author, or is IC in any way responsible for the other content or accuracy therein.

Accordingly, the short pulse may be preferable in rain on ranges less than 10 NM.

1-31
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.22 Interference Rejector

Mutual radar interference can occur in the vicinity of an-
other shipborne radar operating in the same frequency
band. It is seen on the screen as a number of bright
spikes either in irregular patterns or in the form of usually
curved spoke-like dotted lines extending from the center
to the edge of the picture. Activating the interference re-
jector circuit can reduce this type of interference. The in-
terference rejector is a kind of signal correlation circuit. It
compares the received signals over successive trans-
missions and reduces randomly occurring signals. There
are three levels of interference rejection depending on the number of transmissions
that are correlated.

You can access this feature from the InstantAccess bar™, or from the menu. The avail-
able settings are: [OFF], [1], [2] or [3].

How to reject interference from the InstantAccess bar TM

To adjust the interference rejector, select the [IR] button ( IR ) on the InstantAc-
OFF
cess bar™, then left-click to cycle through the rejection levels.

The available settings, in cyclic order, are: [OFF] o [1] o [2] o [3] o [OFF]...

Level [3] provides the highest level of rejection.

How to reject interference from the menu

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO].
4. Select [2 INT REJECTOR].
5. Select the required setting.
6. Close the menu.

1-32
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.23 Echo Stretch

The echo stretch feature enlarges targets in the range and bearing directions to make
them easier to see, and it is available on any range. There are three types of echo
stretch, 1, 2 and 3, and the higher the number the greater the amount of stretch.

Note: The echo stretch magnifies not only small target pips but also returns (clutter)
from sea surface, rain and radar interference. For this reason, make sure these types
of interference have been sufficiently reduced before activating the echo stretch.
You can access this feature from the InstantAccess bar™, or from the menu. The avail-
able options are: [OFF], [1], [2] or [3].

How to use echo stretch from the InstantAccess bar TM

To set echo stretch, select the [ES] button ( ES ) on the InstantAccess bar™, then
OFF
left-click to cycle through the settings.

The available settings, in cyclic order, are: [OFF] o [1] o [2] o [3] o [OFF]...

How to use echo stretch from the menu

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO].
4. Select [3 ECHO STRETCH].
5. Select the required setting.
6. Close the menu.

1-33
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.24 Echo Averaging

The echo averaging feature effectively reduces sea clutter. Echoes received from sta-
ble targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position every ro-
tation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear
at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echoes are averaged over succes-
sive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable over successive frames, it is present-
ed in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans and its
brilliance reduced, making it easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.

Echo averaging uses a scan-to-scan signal correlation technique based on the true
motion over the ground of each target. Thus, small stationary targets such as buoys
will be shown while reducing random echoes such as sea clutter. However, true echo
averaging is not effective for picking up small targets running at high speeds over the
ground.

Note 1: With echo average active it is harder to detect high-speed targets than sta-
tionary ones.
Note 2: Do not use the echo averaging function under heavy pitching and rolling; loss
of targets can result.
Note 3: Echo averaging requires heading, position and speed data.
Before using the echo averaging function, reduce sea clutter with the A/C SEA control.
Leave a little sea clutter on the screen so as not to erase weak targets. The available
settings options are shown in the table below.

Setting
Description
(level)
[OFF] Echo averaging is not enabled
[1], [2] Detects targets hidden in sea clutter. [2] is more effective than [1] in detecting
targets hidden in strong sea clutter. However, [1] is more effective than [2] in
displaying high-speed targets. Select the setting best suited to current con-
ditions. For effective monitoring of high-speed craft, you should use [2] to-
gether with the Wiper function.
[3] Stably displays unstable targets; distinguishes high-speed craft.
You can access this feature from the InstantAccess bar™, or from the menu.

How to adjust the echo average function from the InstantAccess bar TM

Select the [EAV] button ( EAV ) on the InstantAccess bar™, then left-click to select
OFF
the desired level of echo averaging.

1-34
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

How to use the echo average function from the menu

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO].
4. Select [4 ECHO AVERAGE].
5. Select the required setting.
6. Close the menu.

How to highlight fast-moving targets

Normally, when echo averaging is in use, fast-moving targets may be displayed weak-
ly, or not at all. The fast target emphasis function highlights fast-moving targets, but
can also highlight sea-surface reflections and other noise.

To use the fast target emphasis function, follow the procedure below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [0 NEXT].
4. Select [6 EAV EMPH-FAST TGT].
5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.
6. Close the menu.

1-35
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.25 Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) Function

This radar has the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function. This function detects
sea and rain clutter from received echoes’ and automatically reduces sea and rain
clutter according to the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) threshold setting.

Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the
screen.

1.25.1 How to turn the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function

on/off
You can activate/deactivate the ACE function with one of the two methods outlined be-
low.

From the InstantAccess bar TM

Place the cursor on the [ACE] button, then left-click to toggle between [ON] and [OFF].

From the control unit (RCU-014)

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO].
4. Select [0 NEXT].
5. Select [4 ACE].
6. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate, then press
the ENTER MARK key.
7. Close the menu.
When [ACE] is activated, the [SEA] box and [RAIN] box are gray colored and cannot
be adjusted, and the echo averaging function is disabled. The [GAIN] box changes to
[GAIN ACE], as shown in the figure below.

ACE turned off. ACE turned on.

GAIN 30 GAIN ACE 30

SEA MAN 30 SEA MAN 30
RAIN MAN 30 RAIN MAN 30
Note: When [PERFORMANCE MON] (see section 1.48) or [SART] (see section 2.3)
is [ON], [ACE] is disabled and cannot be activated.

1.25.2 How to adjust the gain in Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE)

mode
Rotate the GAIN knob to adjust the sensitivity.

ACE can also be adjusted by placing the cursor inside the [GAIN ACE] level indication,
then spinning the scrollwheel.

1-36
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.25.3 How to get high sensitivity

When the ACE function is [ON], the high sensitivity mode is also available. This re-
quires a function key to be assigned with the [ACE HIGH SENSITIVITY] function (see
section 1.9).

To use high sensitivity mode, activate the ACE feature, then press the assigned func-
tion key.

You can select the level for the high sensitivity mode as follows:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO], then press the ENTER MARK key.
3. Select [0 NEXT].
4. Select [2 ACE], then press the ENTER MARK key.
The [ACE] menu appears.
5. Select [2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT], then press
the ENTER MARK key.
6. Select the level from [1], [2] or [3].
7. Close the menu.

1.25.4 How to suppress false echoes

When the ACE function is [ON], the echo signals can appear on the screen at posi-
tions where there is no target or disappear when there are targets (see section 2.2).
You can suppress these false echoes.

Note: This procedure is only available when the Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE)
function is [ON].
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [1 ECHO], then press the ENTER MARK key.
3. Select [0 NEXT].
4. Select [2 ACE], then press the ENTER MARK key.
5. Select [3 SUPPRESS SECTOR], then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the number keys, to set the start angle for sector sup-
pression.
If you use the number keys, the cursor moves from left to right. When all three dig-
its are input, the cursor moves to the ANGLE item.
If you use the scrollwheel, left-click when the start angle is set.
To cancel any changes, press the ENTER MARK key.
7. Left-click, or press the ENTER MARK key to confirm the start angle. The cursor
moves to the [ANGLE] item.
8. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the number keys, set the angle range of the sector to
be suppressed.
If you use the number keys, the cursor moves from left to right. When all three dig-
its are input, the setting process is complete.
If you use the scrollwheel, left-click when the angle range is set.
To cancel any changes, press the ENTER MARK key.
9. Close the menu.

1-37
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.26 Noise Rejector

White noise can show itself on the screen as random “speckles” spread over the entire
radar image. This equipment reduces the white noise, then improves the on-screen S/
N ratio by processing the weighted moving average filter for the received echoes in
the range direction.
Note: Use this function with caution. Weak target echoes may disappear from the
screen or the range resolution may worsen.
To remove this noise do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [2 CUSTOMIZED ECHO].
4. Select [7 NOISE REJECTOR]. Noise Rejector
indication
5. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate, then press
the ENTER MARK key. The indication for noise rejection is located at the top-left
of the screen.
The indication changes according to the selected setting.

1.27 Wiper
The wiper feature automatically reduces the brilliance of weak signals (noise, sea clut-
ter, rain clutter, etc.) and unwanted signals such as radar interference to clear the pic-
ture of unwanted echoes. Its effect depends on the wiper setting used and whether
each averaging is turned on or off, as described below.

Wiper setting 1 Wiper setting 2

Echo averaging [OFF] Condition A Condition A
Echo averaging on([1] or [2]) Condition A Condition B
Condition A: The brilliance of unwanted weak echoes, such as noise, sea clutter and
rain clutter, is reduced to clear up the picture.

Condition B: Echo averaging is automatically acti-

vated when the wiper feature is turned on, allowing
you to instantly see how the picture is affected with
echo averaging turned off and turned on.

To activate the wiper feature, do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [9 WIPER].
4. Select the desired setting.
The options are: [OFF], [1] or [2].
5. Close the menu.

1-38
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.28 How to Preset Controls for a Specific Navigation

Purpose
Every time your navigating environment or task changes, you must adjust the radar,
which can be a nuisance in a busy situation. Instead of changing radar settings case
by case, it is possible to assign the function keys to provide optimum settings for often-
encountered situations.
The radar's internal computer offers several picture preset options to be assigned to
each function key for your specific navigating requirements. For instance, one of the
presets is [ROUGH SEA], and is designed to be used in heavy rain.

Three user-programmable presets are also provided (labeled as [CUSTOM1], [CUS-

TOM2] and [CUSTOM3]), so that you can have the radar automatically set to those
conditions which are not covered by the provided setup options.

Below are the preset options provided with this radar.

Preset Description
[CUSTOM1], [CUSTOM2] User-defined custom settings.
and [CUSTOM3]
[NEAR] Optimum setting for short range detection using a range
scale of 3 NM or less on calm seas.
[FAR] Optimum setting for long range detection, on a range
scale of 6 NM or larger.
[NEAR BUOY] Optimum setting for detecting buoys within 3 NM range.
[FAR BUOY] Optimum setting for detecting buoys on a range scale of
6 NM or larger.
[ROUGH SEA] Optimum setting for rough weather or heavy rain.
[SHIP] Optimum setting for detecting other vessels.
[HARBOR] Optimum setting for harbor berthing.
[BIRD] Optimum setting for detecting birds.
[COAST] Optimum setting for coastal travel.
Each picture option defines a combination of several radar settings for achieving op-
timum setup for a particular navigating situation. These include gain, target analyzer,
hatching, ACE, ACE gain, interference rejector, echo stretch, echo average, noise re-
jector, automatic anti-sea and anti-rain clutter, video contrast, pulse length and sea
and radar conditions.

Changing these features from the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu changes the original
function key settings. To restore the original settings for a particular customize option,
it is necessary to select the default setting. For this reason, we recommended that you
use the user-programmable presets ([CUSTOM1], [CUSTOM2] or [CUSTOM3]) when
frequent adjustment of the radar image is necessary.
The default settings for the custom presets are listed on the following pages.

1-39
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Default settings

AUTO AUTO TARGET

IR ES EA NR HATCHING*
SEA RAIN ANALYZER*
CUSTOM1 1 1 1 OFF MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
CUSTOM2 1 1 1 OFF AUTO-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
CUSTOM3 1 1 1 OFF MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
NEAR 1 1 1 OFF MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
FAR 1 2 1 OFF AUTO-40 MAN-0 OFF OFF
NEAR BOUY 1 1 2 OFF MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
FAR BUOY 1 2 2 OFF AUTO-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
ROUGH SEA 1 OFF 2 OFF MAN-50 MAN-40 OFF OFF
SHIP 1 2 1 OFF MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
HARBOR 1 OFF 1 OFF MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
BIRD 1 OFF 1 OFF MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
COAST OFF OFF OFF OFF MAN-30 MAN-0 OFF OFF
LOW
STC STC ACE VIDEO
LEVEL GAIN ACE
CURVE RANGE GAIN CONTRAST
ECHOES
CUSTOM1 3 8 0 85 OFF 50 2-B
CUSTOM2 3 8 0 85 OFF 50 2-C
CUSTOM3 3 8 0 85 ON 50 2-B
NEAR 3 8 0 85 OFF 50 1-B
FAR 3 8 0 85 ON 60 4-B
NEAR BOUY 3 8 0 85 OFF 50 1-C
FAR BUOY 3 8 0 85 OFF 50 4-C
ROUGH SEA 3 9 0 85 OFF 35 2-C
SHIP 3 8 0 85 ON 50 2-B
HARBOR 3 8 0 75 ON 50 1-C
BIRD 3 8 0 85 OFF 50 3-C
COAST 3 8 0 85 OFF 50 2-C
*: Available for B-type radars only.

Default settings for [PULSELENGTH]

0.125 NM
0.75 NM 1 NM* 1.5 NM 2 NM* 3 NM
to 0.5 NM
CUSTOM1 S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
CUSTOM2 S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
CUSTOM3 S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
NEAR S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
FAR S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
NEAR BOUY S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
FAR BUOY S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
ROUGH SEA S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
SHIP S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
HARBOR S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
BIRD S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
COAST S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 M1
Table continued on the following page.
*: These ranges are available for B-type radars only.

1-40
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

4 NM* 6 NM 8 NM* 12 NM 16 NM* 24 NM

Table continued from the previous page.
CUSTOM1 M1 M2 M2 L L L
CUSTOM2 M1 M2 M2 L L L
CUSTOM3 M1 M2 M2 L L L
NEAR M1 M3 M3 M3 M3 L
FAR M1 M3 M3 L L L
NEAR BOUY M1 M2 M2 M3 M3 L
FAR BUOY M1 M3 M3 L L L
ROUGH SEA M1 M2 M2 M3 M3 L
SHIP M1 M2 M2 L M3 L
HARBOR M1 M2 M2 M3 M3 L
BIRD M1 M2 M2 M3 M3 L
COAST M1 M2 M2 M3 M3 L
*: These ranges are available for B-type radars only.

1.28.1 How to select a customized echo

Left-click the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box at the top left

of the screen to cycle through the options and select a
customized echo option.
The available options depend on the settings selected
for [3 SELECT CUSTOM] in the [ECHO] menu. See section 1.28.5.

1.28.2 How to edit a customized echo

1. Select a customize echo option to edit (see

section 1.28.1).
2. Right-click the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box to dis-
play the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu.
3. Set the items below referring to the sections
shown.
• [2 INT REJECTOR] : section 1.22
• [3 ECHO STRETCH] : section 1.23
• [4 ECHO AVERAGE] : section 1.24
• [5 TARGET ANALYZER]* : section 1.38
• [6 HATCHING]* : section 1.38
• [7 NOISE REJECTOR] : section 1.26
• [8 VIDEO CONTRAST TYPE]
• [9 PULSE] : section 1.18
• [2 CONDITION] : section 1.28.2
• [4 ACE] : section 1.25
*: Available for B-type radars only.
Note: To set [2 CONDITION] and [4 ACE], select [0 NEXT] to show the second
page of the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu.
4. Select [8 VIDEO CONTRAST TYPE], then press the ENTER MARK key.

1-41
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

5. Select [1], [2], [3] or [4] (Dynamic Range) or [A], [B], [C] (Curve) as appropriate
then press the ENTER MARK key. Video contrast and curve change depending
on setting for [VIDEO CONTRAST] (set at installation), as shown in the figure be-
low.

[VIDEO CONTRAST] set to [ADVANCE] at installation:

CONTRAST

CONTRAST

CONTRAST

CONTRAST
4
3 2
1
A B C

LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL

[VIDEO CONTRAST] set to [LEGACY] at installation:

CONTRAST CONTRAST
4 C
32 B
1 A

1 to 4: Control dynamic range. 1 provides the widest dynamic range; 4 is the nar-
rowest dynamic range.
A: Low level echo brilliance is reduced and noise and clutter are also reduced.
B: Low and high level echoes are displayed evenly.
C: High level echoes' outer edge has gradation to indicate the echo level, with the
higher level echo at the core.
6. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
7. Select [2 CONDITION].
8. Select [2 STC CURVE].
9. Select the appropriate setting for the current sea conditions, then press the EN-
TER MARK key. The available settings are: [2], [2.5], [3], [3.5], [4.2]. A higher set-
ting is recommended for rough weather.
10. Select [3 STC RANGE].
11. Set the distance for STC effectiveness, then press the ENTER MARK key. A high-
er setting eliminates farther surface reflections.
12. If necessary, select [4 LOW LEVEL ECHO] to reject low level echoes. The setting
range is [0] to [8]. The higher the figure, the stronger the low level echo that is
erased.
13. Select [1 BACK] to show the second page of the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO] menu.
14. To save custom settings, select [SAVE] from [3 DEFAULT].

1.28.3 How to restore a user customized echo to the saved settings

If you get lost in operation while changing the settings for a user customized echo, you
can easily restore the settings for that user customized echo saved at section 1.28.2.

1. Right-click the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box to display the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO]

menu.
2. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
3. Select [3 DEFAULT].
4. Select [USER].
5. Close the menu.

1-42
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.28.4 How to restore a user customized echo to the factory default

settings
You can restore customized echo options to their factory default settings (see the ta-
bles on page 1-40 for a list of the default settings).

1. Right-click the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box to display the [CUSTOMIZED ECHO]

menu.
2. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
3. Select [3 DEFAULT].
4. Select [FACTORY], then press the ENTER MARK key.

1.28.5 How to edit the available customized echoes

To edit which customizations are available from the

[CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box, follow the procedure be-
low.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [0 NEXT].
4. Select [3 SELECT CUSTOM]. The [SELECT
CUSTOM] menu appears.
5. Select the customization you want to edit.
The customizations are listed over two menu pages. Select [0 NEXT] to see the
next page, or select [1 BACK] to return to the previous menu page.
6. Select [ON] to make the customization available from the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO]
box, or select [OFF] to hide the customization from the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box.
Note: The factory default setting for all items in this menu is [ON].
7. Close the menu.

1-43
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.29 How to Reject Second-trace Echoes

In certain situations, echoes from very distance targets can appear as false echoes
(second-trace echoes) on the screen. This occurs when the return echo is received
one transmission cycle later, or after a next radar pulse has been transmitted.

Pulse
interval

Actual ranges
Second-trace
echo

Measured ranges

This equipment lengthens the pulse repetition period to reject false echoes.

Note: This function decreases the number of echo

hits. Use this function carefully so that the possibility
of detecting small targets and high-speed craft does
not lessen.
To reject second trace echoes, do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [3 2ND ECHO REJ].
4. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key.
Select [OFF] to disable rejection.
5. Close the menu.

1-44
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.30 Orientation Modes

This radar has the following orientation modes available:

Mode Description
Relative Motion (RM) modes
[HEAD UP RM] Not stabilized
[STERN UP RM]* The radar image is rotated 180°. Graphics and relative and
true bearings are also rotated 180°.
[STAB HEAD UP RM] Head-up with compass bearing scale (True Bearing) where
the bearing scale rotates with the compass reading.
[COURSE UP RM] Compass-stabilized relative to ship’s orientation at the time of
selecting COURSE UP.
[NORTH UP RM] Compass-stabilized with reference to North.
True Motion (TM ) modes
[NORTH UP TM] Land objects and sea are stationary. Requires compass
and speed data.
*: [STERN UP RM] is only available for A/B-types.

1.30.1 How to select an presentation mode

Select the [ORIENTATION MODE] box at the top left
corner of the screen, then left-click to cycle through
the available orientation modes.

Loss of gyrocompass signal

When the compass signal is lost, "NO GYRO SIGNAL" appears in yellow-orange in
the [ALERT] box, the orientation mode automatically becomes HEAD UP, and TT and
AIS targets, map and chart are erased. Stop the alert with the ALARM ACK key or
left-click the [ALERT] box. Check the GYRO data.

1.30.2 Description of presentation modes

HEAD UP mode
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the Heading line
North marker
line that connects the center with the top of the display
indicates your heading. Targets are shown at their
measured distances and their directions relative to
your heading. The short dotted line on the bearing
scale is the north marker.

1-45
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

COURSE UP mode
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the North marker Heading line
currently selected course at the top of the screen.
When you change the heading, the heading line
moves with the course selected. If you select a new
course, select the course up mode again to display
the new course at the top of the display. Targets are
shown at their measured distances and their direc-
tions relative to the set course, which is at the 0-de-
gree position. The heading line moves according to
the yawing and any course change.

NORTH UP mode
Targets are shown at their measured distances and North marker
Heading line
their true (compass) directions from your ship. North is
at the top of the screen. The heading line changes its di-
rection according to your heading.

STAB HEAD UP mode

Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the HEAD UP mode. The difference
from normal HEAD UP presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing scale. The
bearing scale is heading sensor stabilized. That is, it rotates in accordance with the
heading sensor signal, enabling you to know own ship's heading at a glance.

This mode is available when the radar is interfaced with a gyrocompass. If the gyro-
compass fails, the bearing scale returns to the state of HEAD UP mode.

True motion mode

Your ship and other objects in motion move with their true courses and speed. All fixed
targets, like landmasses, appear as fixed echoes in ground stabilized TM. When your
ship reaches a point that is 50% of the radius of the display, the position is reset. The
ship appears at 75% radius opposite to the extension of the current course. You can
manually reset your ship symbol if you highlight the [CU/TM RESET] indication at the
top of the screen, then left-click.

Heading North
line marker

(a) True motion (b) Your ship has reached a (c) Your ship is automatically
is selected point 50% of display radius reset to 75% of display radius

Note: The position of the own ship marker and bearing scale change according to ref-
erence position and off-centering.

1-46
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

• ANT: When OFF CENTER is active, the bearing scale intervals change accordingly.
• CCRP: When the CCRP moves outside the operational display area, the bearing
scale intervals may not be displayed correctly.

STERN UP mode
The STERN UP mode rotates the HEAD UP
mode picture, relative and true bearings and
display graphics 180°. This mode is useful on
dual-radar tugboats when backing up; one ra-
dar shows HEAD UP and another shows
STERN UP. To enable the STERN UP mode,
turn on [STERN UP] on the [OPERATION]
menu.
Heading line North marker
Note: STERN UP mode is only available for
A/B-types.

1.31 How to Select a Range Scale

The selected range scale and range ring interval are shown at the upper left corner on
the screen. When a target of interest comes closer, reduce the range scale so that it
appears in 50-90% of the display radius.
1. Place the cursor in the [RANGE] box at the top left corner of the screen.

RANGE box

In the above example, the range scale is set to 0.125 NM and the interval between
range rings is set to 0.025 NM.
2. Left-click to lower the range; right-click to raise the range.
You can also select the range with the RANGE key on the control unit. Press "+" to
increase the range, or press "-" to reduce the range. Press and hold a key to succes-
sively change the range upwards or downwards.

1.32 How to Measure Range

The range to a target can be measured three ways: with the fixed range rings, with the
cursor, or with the VRM.
Use the fixed range rings to get an estimate of the range to a target. The rings are the
concentric solid circles on the display. The number of rings is automatically set by the
current range scale. The distance between the rings is the range ring interval, and the
current interval appears at the upper-left position on the screen. To measure the range
to a target with the range rings, count the number of rings between the center of the
display and the target. Check the range ring interval and estimate the distance of the
echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring.

1-47
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.32.1 How to show/hide the range rings

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS] to show the [NAV TOOLS] menu.
3. Select [4 RANGE RINGS].
4. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
5. Close the menu.

1.32.2 How to measure range with the variable range marker (VRM)
There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you can
distinguish them from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be distinguished from
each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on the No. 2 VRM are
longer.

350 000 010

340 020
330 030 Target echo
320 040
310 050 VRM1
300 060

290 070

280 080

270 090
VRM2
260 100

250 110

240 120
230
130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

There are two methods for measuring range with the VRMs, using the VRM key and
on-screen menu box operation.

VRM1 VRM2
Range to VRM 28.11 NM 36.44 NM Currently active VRM is highlighted.
TTG 50:00 TTG 60:00

TTG to VRM
Using the VRM keys
1. Press the VRM ON key to activate the VRM1 box. Press the VRM ON key again
to activate the VRM2 box. Press the VRM ON key again to switch between active
VRMs. The currently active VRM marker is displayed as shown in the above fig-
ure.
2. Rotate the VRM knob to align the active VRM with the inner edge of the target,
then read the distance at the lower right of the screen. In the above figure, the ac-
tive VRM reads "36.44 NM".
Each VRM remains at the same geographical distance when you operate the
RANGE key or the [RANGE] box. This means that the apparent radius of the VRM
ring changes in proportion to the selected range scale.
3. Press the VRM OFF key to hide the VRMs.

1-48
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

On-screen menu box operation

1. Select the appropriate [VRM] box.
2. The guidance box reads "VRM ON/".
Left-click to turn on the VRM.
The guidance box now reads "VRM SET L = DELETE /".
Further, the box is highlighted and the corresponding VRM appears.
3. Left-click again and the cursor jumps to inside the operational display area. The
guidance box now reads "VRM FIX L = DELETE / EXIT".
4. Move the trackball to adjust the VRM.
Note: The maximum VRM distance is set by the current display range and can be
set as high as twice the distance of the display range.
5. Left-click to anchor the VRM and fix its readout, or right-click to cancel and return
the VRM to its previous location (range).
6. To hide the VRM, left-click the [VRM] box to show "VRM SET L = DELETE /" in
the guidance box, then press and hold the left button on the trackball.

1.32.3 How to set the VRM unit of measurement (B-type only)

VRMs can be displayed in the following units of measurement:

• NM (Nautical Miles) • km (Kilometers)

• SM (Statute Miles) • kyd (Kiloyards)
To change the unit of measurement, do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [3 EBL•VRM•CURSOR SET].
4. Select [VRM1] or [VRM2] as appropriate.
5. Select the unit of measurement, then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.
Note: Changes made to the measurement units also affect active VRMs.

1.32.4 How to show TTG to VRM

TTG (Time To Go) to a selected VRM can be displayed as follows:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [3 EBL•VRM•CURSOR SET].
4. Select [3 VRM TTG].
5. Select [OFF], [1], [2] or [1&2] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
• [OFF]: No TTG to VRM displayed.
• [1]: TTG from OS to VRM1 displayed.
• [2]: TTG from OS to VRM2 displayed.
• [1and2]: TTG from OS to VRM1 and VRM2 displayed.
6. Close the menu.

1-49
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.33 How to Measure Bearing

The Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs) are used to take bearings of targets.There are
two EBLs, EBL1 and EBL2. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending out from the
own ship position up to the circumference of the radar picture. The two EBLs can be
distinguished from each other by the different lengths of their dashes; the dashes on
EBL2 are longer.

Each EBL has an EBRL (Electronic Bearing Range Line, indicated as a short line,
crossing the EBL at right angles). When VRM is not displayed and only EBL is dis-
played, the EBRL shows the range from the EBL origin.

When VRMs are displayed with EBLs the VRM overlaps the EBRL. The value for
EBRL and VRM is the same and is displayed in the VRM box at the bottom-right of the
screen.

350 000 010

340 020
330 030
320
EBL range
040
markers
310 050

300 060
Target echo
290 070

EBL2 280 080 EBL1

270 090

260 100

250 110

240 120
230
130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

1.33.1 Methods to measure bearing

There are two methods for measuring bearing, using the EBL key and on-screen
menu box operation.

Using the EBL keys

1. Press the EBL ON key to activate the [EBL1] box. Press the EBL ON key again
to activate the EBL2 box. Press the EBL ON key again to switch between active
VRMs. The currently active EBL marker is displayed as shown in the figure below.
EBL1 EBL2
045.3 °R 287.1 °R Currently active EBL is highlighted.
2. Rotate the EBL knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the active EBL bisects
the target of interest, then read its bearing at the lower-left corner of the screen.
3. Press the EBL OFF key to erase the active EBL.Bsiyou

1-50
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

On-screen menu box operation

1. Select the appropriate EBL box.
2. The guidance box reads "EBL ON/". Press the left button to turn on the EBL.The
guidance box now reads "EBL SET L=DELETE /".
3. Press the left button again and the cursor jumps to inside the operational display
area. The guidance box now reads "EBL FIX L=DELETE/".
4. Rotate the ADJUST knob clockwise or counterclockwise until the active EBL bi-
sects the target of interest, then push the ADJUST knob to anchor the EBL. Read
the bearing at the lower-left corner of the screen.
5. Press the EBL OFF key to erase EBLs.

1.33.2 True or relative bearing

The EBL readout is affixed by "R" (relative) if it is relative to own ship's heading, "T"
(true) if it is referenced to the north. True or relative indication is available regardless
of presentation mode.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [3 EBL•VRM•CURSOR SET].
4. For IMO/A/R-type radars, select [5 EBL•CURSOR BEARING].
For B-type radars, select [2 EBL1] or [3 EBL2] as appropriate.
5. Select the [REL] or [TRUE] as required, then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.
Note: The EBL and its indication change according to gyrocompass changes as fol-
lows:
Gyro heading EBL changes
HEAD UP / relative EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged.
HEAD UP / true EBL indication does not change, however the EBL
marker moves accordingly
COURSE UP / relative EBL indication does not change, however the EBL
marker moves accordingly.
COURSE UP / true EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged.
NORTH UP / relative EBL indication does not change, however the EBL
marker moves accordingly
NORTH UP / true EBL indication and EBL marker are unchanged.

1-51
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.34 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL

The origin of the EBL can be placed anywhere to enable measurement of range and
bearing between any two targets. This function is also useful for assessment of the
potential risk of collision. It is possible to read CPA (Closest Point of Approach) by us-
ing the EBL range marker as shown in (a) in the illustration below. If the EBL passes
through the sweep origin (own ship) as shown in (b) in the illustration below, the target
ship is on a collision course.

350 000 010 350 000 010

340 020 340 020
330 030 330 030
320 040 320 040

310 050 310 050

300 A 060 300 A 060

290 070 290 070

280
A1
080 280 A1 EBL 080

270 EBL 090 270 range 090

260 range 260

marker 100
100

250 marker 110

250 110

240 240 120

120
230 230 130
130
No. 1
No. 1 220 140 220 140
210 150 (a) EBL 210 150
(b)
EBL 200
190 180 170
160 200
190 180 170
160

1.34.1 How to assess risk of collision using the offset EBL

There are two methods for assessing risk collision. You can use the control unit or the
[CURSOR] menu.

Using the control unit (RCU-014)

1. Press the EBL ON key to display or activate an EBL (EBL1 or EBL2).
2. Place the cursor on a target appearing as threatening (indicated as “A” in the ex-
ample figure on the previous page).
3. Press the EBL OFFSET key and the origin of the active EBL shifts to the cursor
position.
4. Press the EBL OFFSET key again to anchor the EBL origin.
5. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL knob until the
EBL bisects the target at the new position (A1). The EBL readout shows the target
ship's course, which can be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing refer-
ence setting.
Note: If relative motion is selected, it is also possible to read CPA by using the
range marker as shown in left-hand figure at the top of the next page. If the EBL
passes through the sweep origin (own ship) as illustrated in the right-hand figure
above, the target ship is on a collision course.
6. To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, then press the EBL OFFSET
key.

1-52
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Using the on-screen box

1. Select the operational display area, then right-click. The [CURSOR] context menu
appears.
2. Select [EBL OFFSET].
3. Select the operational display area, then left-click. The EBL line is attached to the
cursor.
4. Place the offset EBL on the target appearing as threatening, then left-click.
5. After waiting for a few minutes (at least 3 minutes), operate the EBL used in step
4 until it bisects the target at the new position (A1). The EBL readout shows the
target ship's course, which can be true or relative depending on the EBL bearing
reference setting.
6. To return the EBL origin to the own ship's position, repeat steps 1 to 3.
7. Close the menu.

1.34.2 How to set the origin point reference for EBL OFFSET
The origin point of the offset EBL can be ground stabilized (geographically fixed), north
stabilized (true) or referenced to own ship’s heading (relative).

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [EBL•VRM•CURSOR SET].
4. Select [EBL OFFSET BASE].
5. Select [STAB GND], [STAB HDG] or [STAB NORTH] as appropriate, then press
the ENTER MARK key.
• [STAB GND]: Reference to latitude and longitude. Origin position is always
fixed regardless of your ship's movement.

• [STAB HDG]: Reference to heading. The relationship between origin posi-

tion and own position is kept always.

• [STAB NORTH]: Reference to North. The origin position changes with North
position.
6. Close the menu.

1-53
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.35 How to Measure Range and Bearing Between

Two Targets
EBL2
Range 350 000 010
340 020
Marker 330 030
320 040
310 050 Range
Target 2 060 Marker
300
EBL1 Target 4
290 070
Target 1 R2
280 080

270 090
Target 3
260 EBL 100

250 origin 110

240 120
230 130
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

Range/bearing between targets 1 and 2

EBL1 EBL2 VRM1 VRM2

045.3 °R 287.1 °R 28.11 NM 36.44 NM
TTG 50:00 TTG 60:00

Range/bearing between targets 3 and 4

How to measure range and bearing from the [CURSOR] menu

This procedure uses EBL1 and VRM1 as an example and is written on the premise
that neither of the EBLs or VRMs is active.

1. Place the cursor on the EBL1 box, then left-click. EBL1 is now active.
2. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click to show the
[CURSOR] context menu.
3. Select [EBL OFFSET]. The cursor is displayed with a red surround, indicating that
the [EBL OFFSET] mode is now active.
4. With the cursor in the operational display area, left-click. EBL1 moves to the cur-
sor location.
5. Place the offset EBL on the target of interest (Target 1), then left-click.
6. Right-click to deactivate the [EBL OFFSET] mode. The red surround on the cursor
disappears.
7. Place the cursor on the [EBL1] box, then spin the scrollwheel until EBL1 intersects
the secondary target (Target 2 in the example figure).
8. Place the cursor on the [VRM1] box, then spin the scrollwheel until the range
marker on EBL1 aligns with Target 2. The readouts for EBL1 and VRM1, at the
bottom of the screen, indicate the bearing and range between the Target 1 and
Target 2.
9. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (shown as “Target
3” and “Target 4” in the above example) by using EBL2 and VRM2.
Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T"
depending on EBL relative/true settings in the [EBL•VRM•CURSOR SET] menu.

1-54
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

How to measure range and bearing from the control unit (RCU-014)
Range and bearing can be measure using the EBL OFFSET key.

1. Press the EBL ON key to activate EBL1.

2. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then press the EBL OFFSET
key. EBL1 moves to the cursor.
3. Place the cursor (EBL1 moves with the cursor) on a target of interest. (Shown as
“Target 1” in the above example), then press the EBL OFFSET key.
4. Rotate the EBL knob to move the EBL until it passes through another target of in-
terest. (Shown as “Target 2” in the above example).
5. Place the cursor on the [VRM1] box.
6. Rotate the VRM knob until the range marker on the EBL is on the inside edge of
Target 2. The readouts for EBL1 and VRM1, at the bottom of the screen, indicate
the bearing and range between the Target 1 and Target 2.
7. You can repeat the same procedure on third and fourth targets (shown as “Target
3” and “Target 4” in the above example) by using the No. 2 EBL and the No. 2
VRM.
Bearing is shown relative to own ship with suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix "T"
depending on EBL relative/true settings in the [EBL•VRM] menu.

How to reset the EBL origin to the center of the screen

1. Place the cursor on the box for the EBL to reset, then left-click. The selected EBL
is now active and highlighted.
2. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click. The [CUR-
SOR] context menu appears.
3. Select [EBL OFFSET]. The cursor is now displayed with a red surround.
4. Left-click to return the EBL to the center of the display.
5. Right-click to deactivate the [EBL OFFSET] mode. The red surround on the cursor
disappears.

1-55
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

How to link EBL and VRM OFFSET

You can link the EBL and VRM offset to show the VRM range ring with one target as
the center-point. This may helpful if the range marker on the EBL is difficult to see.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [3 EBL•VRM•CURSOR].
4. Select [8 VRM OFFSET].
5. Select [LINK EBL] to link the offset EBL is now displayed with the VRM range ring,
as indicated in the figure below.

350 000 010

340 020
330 030
320 040
310 050
Linked VRM1
300 060

EBL1
290 070

280
Target 2 080

270 090

260 Target 1 100

250 110

240 120
230 130
220
EBL origin 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

Select [OFF] to deactivate the link between the offset EBL and the VRM.
6. Close the menu.

1-56
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.36 How to Off-Center the Display

Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced to expand the view field without
switching to a larger range scale. The sweep origin can be off-centered to the cursor
position, but not more than 75% of the range in use; if the cursor is set beyond 75%
of the range scale, the sweep origin will be off-centered to the point of 75% of the limit.

Cursor
Cursor

Put cursor where desired Off-centered display

and do appropriate
off-center procedure.
This feature is not available on the 96 nm range or in the true motion mode.

If the conning position is outside the effective radar display, some parts of the bearing
scale are not shown. For details, see section 1.49.

How to off-center the display from the control unit (RCU-014)

1. Place the cursor at the position where you wish to move the sweep origin.
2. Press the OFF CENTER key. The sweep origin is now off-centered at the cursor
position.
3. To cancel off-centering, press the OFF CENTER key again.

How to off-center the display from the on-screen menu

1. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click to show the
[CURSOR] menu.
2. Select [OFF CENTER]. The cursor is now displayed with a red surround, indicat-
ing that [OFF CENTER] mode is active.
3. Move the cursor to the position where you wish to move the sweep origin, then left
click. The display is now centered at the cursor position.
Note: If you need to move off-center position, you can reset the off-center while
the cursor is displayed with the red surround by left-clicking the operational dis-
play area.
4. Right-click to cancel [OFF CENTER] mode.
5. To reset the sweep origin to the center of the operational display area, repeat
steps 1 to 2, then left-click the operational display area.
Note: When the conditions shown below are met, off-center cannot be canceled. This
is because the radar antenna position is located at a position greater than 75% of the
effective radar display.
• Own ship marker is large.
• The distance between antenna position and conning position is large.
• Short-distance display range.
To cancel the off-center in these cases, select a larger range, then cancel the off-
center.

1-57
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.37 Target Trails

The trails of the radar echoes of targets can be displayed
in the form of synthetic afterglow. Target trails are shown
either relative or true and can be sea or ground stabi-
lized. True motion trails require a compass signal, and
position and speed data. When the range is changed,
trails are continued for targets which were already dis-
played in the previous range. Newly detected targets
have no trail when first detected.
True target trails -
Stationary targets
1.37.1 True or relative trails are not smeared.

You can display echo trails in true or relative motion.

Relative trails show relative movements between targets
and own ship. True motion trails present true target
movements in accordance with their over-the-ground
speeds and courses.

Note 1: The [TRAIL MODE] box is shown in yellow un-

der following conditions: Relative target trails -
• [TRAIL MODE] is set to [TRUE] and presentation Targets move relative
to own ship, stationary
mode is set to [HEAD UP RM]. targets are smeared.
• [TRAIL MODE] is set to [TRUE] and presentation
mode is set to [STERN UP].
The reference for the past position displays for AIS and TT is also switched whenever
trail reference is switched.
Note 2: The [TRAIL MODE] box is shown in yellow under the following conditions:
• [TRAIL MODE] is set to [TRUE] and presentation mode is set to [HEAD UP RM].
• [TRAIL MODE] is set to [TRUE] and presentation mode is set to [STERN UP RM].

1. Select the [TRAIL] box at the bottom-right of the screen, then right-click. The
[TRAIL MENU] appears.

Right-click the
[TRAIL box] to show
the [TRAILS] menu.

[TRAIL] box Trail time Trail mode indication

2. Select [TRAIL MODE].

1-58
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

3. Select the appropriate trail mode, then press the ENTER MARK key.
• [REL]: Relative target trails. Targets move relative to own ship and stationary
targets appear smeared.
• [TRUE]: True target trails. Targets true movements are shown, stationary tar-
gets are not smeared.
4. Close the menu.
You can also click the trail mode indication to toggle between relative and true trails.

1.37.2 Trail time

Trail time is the interval at which the trail is plotted on-screen. You can change the trail
time as follows:

Using the control unit (RCU-014)

1. Press the CANCEL TRAILS key to cycle through and select the desired setting.

00:00
Trail time
Trail time setting
Trail mode and stabilization.
Displayed as: “TRUE-S”, “TRUE-G” or “REL”.
S: Sea stablized, G: Ground stabilized, REL: Relative

The options, in order, are: [OFF] o [15 sec] o [30 sec] o [1 min] o [3 min] o [6
min] o [15 min] o [30 min] o [CONT] o [OFF]...

Using the on-screen box

1. Place the cursor on the trail time setting inside the TRAIL box, at the bottom-right
of the screen.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to change the trail time. The time is changed in the order
shown above.
Note 1: The timer displays the elapsed time of the selected trail. Use caution when
using this feature, as the displayed time is not the overall trail time. Also, when the trail
timer is displayed, the trail accuracy of other ship’s echoes may be lowered. When the
trail time reaches the preset interval, the timer disappears.
Note 2: The [CONT] option sets the trail time plotting as continuous. When the plotting
time reaches 29:59, the timer is hidden. The timer reappears when [TRAIL ALL
CLEAR] is selected, or when the range is changed.

1-59
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.37.3 Trail gradation

The trail afterglow can be displayed in a single tone or with gradual shading.

Single Multiple
(Monotone shading) (Gradual shading)
1. Select the [TRAIL] box at the bottom-right corner of the screen, then right-click to
display the [TRAIL MENU].
2. Select [3 TRAIL GRADATION].
3. Select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] (Multiple) as appropriate, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
4. Close the menu.

1.37.4 Trail level

The level, or intensity, of the afterglow that extends from radar targets can be selected
as below.

1. Select the [TRAIL] box at the bottom-right corner of the screen, then right-click to
display the [TRAIL MENU].
2. Select [5 TRAIL LEVEL].
3. Select the appropriate setting, then press the ENTER MARK key. The higher the
number, the greater the intensity of the afterglow.
4. Close the menu.

1.37.5 Narrow trails (B-type only)

Target trails can be painted with thinner lines if desired. This csection 1.37.2an be
useful when there are a lot of targets on the screen and it is hard to distinguish one
from another.

1. Select the [TRAIL] box at the bottom-right corner of the screen, then right-click to
display the [TRAIL MENU].
2. Select [8 NARROW TRAIL].
3. Select the appropriate setting from [OFF], [1] or [2], then press the ENTER MARK
key. A trail with a setting of [2] is thinner than a trail with a setting of [1].
4. Close the menu.

1.37.6 How to hide the trails temporarily

Following the procedure outlined in section 1.37.2, set the trail time to [OFF]. The trails
are hidden from view, but are continued. To show the trails again, repeat the proce-
dure, setting the trail time to any interval other than [OFF].

1.37.7 Trail stabilization in true motion

True motion trails can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. The [TRAIL] box shows
current stabilization as "TRUE-G" or "TRUE-S". To change stabilization mode, open
the [SHIP SPEED MENU] menu and set [SHIP SPEED] to [LOG(BT)] (ground stabili-
zation) or [LOG(WT)] (sea stabilization).

1-60
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.37.8 How to erase/restart trails

All trails can be erased (including those in the memory) and restarted to start fresh
trails. There are three methods you can use to erase trails.

To erase all trails displayed in the operational display area:

• Select the [TRAIL] box, then press and hold the left button on the trackball; or
• Press and hold CANCEL TRAILS key.

To erase a section of a trail (B-types only):

1. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click to show the
[CURSOR] menu.
2. Select [TRAIL ERASER]. The cursor is now displayed with a red surround and a
dashed circle, indicating that [TRAIL ERASER] mode is active.
3. Press the left button to change the diameter of the dashed circle, as shown in the
figure below.

4. Place the cursor on the trail whose section you want to erase, then press and hold
the left button.
5. With the left button pressed, drag the cursor over the section of the trail you want
to erase. The section of trail “covered” by the dashed circle is erased.
6. Release the left button.
7. Right-click to deactivate the [TRAIL ERASER] function. The cursor is no longer
highlighted and the dashed circle disappears.

1.37.9 How to prevent sea clutter in true trails

You can prevent the display of sea clutter in true trails about your ship to clear the ra-
dar picture. Your ship's trails can also be shown or hidden.

1. Select the [TRAIL] box at the bottom-right corner of the screen, then right-click to
display the [TRAIL MENU].
2. Select [7 SUPPRESS AROUND OS].
3. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
Note: When [6 OS TRAIL] is set to [ON], [7 SUPPRESS TRAILS] is automatically
fixed at [ON]. To disable the sea clutter suppression feature, change [6 OS TRAIL]
to [OFF], then change the setting for [7 SUPPRESS TRAILS].
4. Close the menu.

1-61
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.37.10 How to show/hide OS trails

To show or hide the OS trail at any time, follow the procedure below.

1. Select the [TRAIL] box at the bottom-right corner of the screen, then right-click to
display the [TRAIL MENU].
2. Select [6 OS TRAIL].
3. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
Note: When [6 OS TRAIL] is set to [ON], [7 SUPPRESS TRAILS] is automatically
fixed at [ON]. To disable the sea clutter suppression feature, change [6 OS TRAIL]
to [OFF], then change the setting for [7 SUPPRESS TRAILS].
4. Close the menu.

1.37.11 How to show/hide land trails (B-type only)

You can improve the on-screen display visibility by hiding trails generated by land-
masses and non-moving objects. Hiding the trails has the following possible benefits:

• Land-masses have no trail, allowing you to use relative trails near coastlines.
• Only moving echoes create a trail, improving target identification.
1. Select the [TRAIL] box at the bottom-right corner of the screen, then right-click to
display the [TRAIL MENU].
2. Select [9 HIDE LAND TRAILS(T)] or [0 HIDE LAND TRAILS(R)] as appropriate.
3. Referring to the table below, select the appropriate setting, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
Trails for non-moving objects
Setting Trails for moving objects
Large objects Small objects
[OFF] Trails are shown Trails are shown Trails are shown
[1] Trails are hidden Trails are shown Trails are shown
[2] Trails are hidden Trails are hidden Trails are shown
4. Close the menu.
Note: When option [1] or [2] is selected trails for echoes outside the displayed area
are not generated. It is important to note that, where the displayed area is moved by
functions such as off-centering or true motion, newly displayed echoes do not have
trails.

1.37.12 How to set the trail color (B-type only)

You can change the trail color to suit your requirements.

1. Select the [TRAIL] box at the bottom-right corner of the screen, then right-click to
display the [TRAIL MENU].
2. Select [4 TRAIL COLOR].
3. Select the required color, referring to the list below.
• GRN: Green • BLU: Blue
• CYA: Cyan • MAG: Magenta
• WHT: White • YEL: Yellow
4. Close the menu.

1-62
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.38 Target Analyzer (B-type only)

The target analyzer function analyzes echoes and assists the operator to determine
dangerous targets. This function is particularly useful under heavy rain/snow or where
there is surface reflection, which can cause interference and noise.

The target analyzer function can also place hatching over heavy rain areas, reducing
the visible interference and allowing a clearer view of potential targets.

Echoes are displayed in five different colors to assist the operator in identifying tar-
gets. The colors and their respective echoes change depending on the echo color se-
lected from the [BRILL] menu (see section 1.44) are shown in the table below.

Selected echo color

Echo
YEL GRN WHT AMB M-GRN M-CYA
Surface reflection Green Green Green Green Green Green
Rain Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray
Moving target Red Red Red Red Pink Pink
Approaching target Pink Pink Pink Pink White White
Other echoes Yellow Green White Amber Red to green Red to blue
The following example figures show the manner in which this function affects dis-
played echoes.

No echo adjustment Minimal echo adjustment

(Target analyzer off, EAV off, hatching off) (Target analyzer on, EAV off, hatching off)
Rain, moving targets and surface reflections Echoes are colored, surface reflections are
are all displayed with no filtering. filtered, rain is displayed.

Moderate echo adjustment Maximum echo adjustment

(Target analyzer on, EAV on, hatching off) (Target analyzer on, EAV on, hatching on)
Echoes are colored, surface reflections and Echoes are colored, surface reflections are
rain are filtered. filtered, rain is displayed in gray colored
hatching.

1-63
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Note 1: This function works best when the settings for [GAIN], [STC], [RAIN], [NOISE
REJECT] and [VIDEO CONTRAST] are properly adjusted (surface reflections are dis-
played in green and rain is displayed in gray).
Note 2: This function recognizes moving targets as approaching targets. Buoys and
other stationary objects are not recognized as approaching targets by this function.
Note 3: The target analyzer function requires a short period of time to analyze echoes
and display them on-screen. If your antenna revolves at more than 40 rpm, moving
targets may not be displayed correctly. For this reason, caution is advised when using
the target analyzer function.
Note 4: The target analyzer function’s performance may be affected by factors such
as target size, weather and sea conditions, physical equipment configuration, offset
settings and other factors.

What is “hatching”?
Where echo averaging may hide light rain on the display, the hatching feature, when
activated, places a gray “veil” over the areas where rain is detected. This allows the
operator to see where the rain is without affecting the quality of the displayed echoes.

1.38.1 How to activate/deactivate the target analyzer

1. Select the [CUSTOMIZE ECHO] box, then right-click.
2. Select [5 TARGET ANALYZER].
3. Select [OFF] to deactivate the function, or [ON] to activate the function, then press
the ENTER MARK key.
4. Select [HATCHING].
5. Select [OFF] to deactivate the function, or [ON] to activate the function, then press
the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

1-64
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.39 Target Alarm

The target alarm serves to alert the navigator to targets (ships, landmasses, etc.) en-
tering a specific area, with audiovisual alerts.

The operator can set the alarm zones at

any location, with any size, however, the CAUTION
zones must be inside the operational The alarm should not be relied upon as the
display area. sole means for detecting possible collision
situations.
Note: The target alarm boxes are not A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls
displayed when the setting for [AZ/ALR should be properly adjusted to be sure the
SELECT] in the [TT•AIS] menu is set to alarm system does not overlook target
echoes.
the default setting [AQUISITION
ZONE]. To enable this function, set [AZ/
ALR SELECT] in the [TT•AIS] menu to [TARGET ALARM ZONE].

1.39.1 How to set a target alarm

The procedure below shows how to set a target alarm using the figure below as an
example. The alarm boxes are labeled [1:] and [2:], and are located at the bottom-right
of the screen, near the VRM boxes.

TGT ALR
TT / AIS Alarm zone 1 is selected
1:MUTE (highlighted) and inactive.
2:WORK Alarm zone 2 is set and active.

1. Select the appropriate alarm box, then left-click. The cursor jumps into the opera-
tional display area and the indication "SET" appears inside the target alarm box
selected.
2. Using the trackball, move the cursor to Point A, then left-click.
3. Using the trackball, move the cursor to Point B, then left-click.
The indication “SET” is replaced with “WORK” in the box. The target alarm zone’s
lines are shown as dashed lines.
350 000 010
340 020
330 030
320 040 Other alarm zone examples
310 050 Target
300 060
alarm Point A
290
280 A B 070 X
270
080 zone Point B
260
090 X
100 X
250 110 Point A X
240

230
120

130
Point B
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

Note 1: To create a 360° alarm zone, set Point B at the same location as Point A.
Note 2: Two alarm zones can be set simultaneously. The second alarm zone is only
available when the first alarm zone is active, however.
Note 3: When the target alarm zone is not within the range in use the indication "UP
RNG" appears to the right of the target alarm box. In this case select a range that will
display the target alarm zone.

1-65
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.39.2 How to mute the target alarm

A target in the target alarm zone produces both visual (flashing) and audible (beep)
alarms. To silence the audio alarm select the appropriate target alarm box then left-
click. The target alarm box indication shows "MUTE". This will deactivate the audio
alarm but will not stop the flashing of the offending target. You can also stop the alarm
by deactivating the target alarm zone (see section 1.39.3).

To reactivate the audio alarm, select the target alarm box then left-click to show
"WORK" in the box.

1.39.3 How to deactivate a target alarm

Select the target box to be deactivated, then press and hold the left button on the
Control Unit.

Note: When both alarm zones are active, the second ([2:]) alarm zone must be deac-
tivated before the first ([1:]) can be deactivated.
If both zones are active when you try to deactivate zone [1:], the system releases two
audible beeps and shows the message "DELETE ALR2 FIRST".

1.39.4 How to change target alarm attributes

You can select the echo strength level that triggers the alarm, the condition that gen-
erates the alarm and the volume of the audio alarm as follows:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [4 ALERTS].
3. Select [6 TARGET ALARM].
4. Select [2 ALR1 MODE] or [3 ALR2 MODE] as appropriate, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
5. Select [IN] or [OUT] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
[IN]: Targets entering the alarm zone trigger the alarm.
[OUT]: Targets leaving the alarm zone trigger the alarm.
6. Select [4 LEVEL].
7. Select the appropriate level of echo strength to trigger the alarm, then press the
ENTER MARK key. [1] is the highest strength, [4] is the lowest strength.
8. Select [1 BACK] to return to the [ALERT] menu.
9. Select [3 ALERT VOLUME].
10. Select [OFF], [LOW], [MID] or [HIGH] as appropriate, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
Note 1: This setting is applied to all alarms output from this radar system.
Note 2: The [OFF] options is not shown for IMO/R-type radars.
11. Close the menu.

1-66
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.40 PI (Parallel Index) Lines

PI lines are useful for keeping a constant distance be-
tween own ship and a coastline or a partner ship when
navigating.

You can control the presentation and interval of the PI

lines from the [PI Line] box, which is at the lower-left PI lines
corner of the screen.
[PI Line] box

PI line number PI line status

PI line bearing
PI line interval and reference

1.40.1 How to set the maximum number of lines to display

The maximum number of PI lines to display can be selected from [1], [2], [3] or [6] lines
as below. The actual number of lines visible can be less depending on line interval.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [2 PI LINES]. The [PI LINES] menu ap-
pears.
4. Select [3 SET MAXIMUM PI LINES].
Up to six sets of PI lines are available depending
on the maximum number of PI lines selected on
the menu.
• [1]: Six sets of PI lines (PI1 to PI6) are avail-
able.
• 2, 3 or 6: Four sets of PI lines (PI1 to PI4)
5. Select the appropriate option, then press the EN-
TER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

1.40.2 How to change PI line bearing and interval

1. If not already displayed, show a PI line, referring to section 1.40.1.
2. Place the arrow on the PI line bearing and reference indication in the [PI Line] box.
3. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the PI line bearing, between 000.0° to 359.9°.
4. Place the cursor on the PI line interval.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the PI line interval.
A negative interval value moves to the PI line to one side of the line which inter-
sects the own ship position. A positive interval value moves the line to the other
side of the own ship position.

1-67
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.40.3 How to change the PI line bearing reference (B-type only)

IMO/A/R-type radars’ PI line bearing reference is fixed to North (True). For B-type ra-
dars however, PI line bearing reference can be relative to own ship’s heading (Rela-
tive) or referenced to North (True) as below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [2 PI LINES].
4. Select [2 PI LINE BEARING].
5. Select [REL] or [TRUE] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

1.40.4 How to change the PI line orientation

PI lines orientation can be selected from parallel or perpendicular. This function is
available when [SET MAXIMUM PI LINES] is set for other than [1].

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [2 PI LINES].
4. Select [4 PI LINE MODE].
5. Select [PARALLEL] or [PERPENDIC] as appropriate, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

1.40.5 How to reset the PI lines to default (ship’s heading)

You can automatically return PI lines to default orientation (ship’s heading), 0-degrees
for parallel orientation, 90-degrees for perpendicular orientation. This is faster than do-
ing it manually.

From the PI line box

Place the cursor on the PI line number box indication, then press and hold the left but-
ton.

From the menu

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [2 PI LINES].
4. Select [5 RESET PI LINES]. The PI lines are reset.
5. Close the menu.

1-68
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.40.6 How to change PI line length

You can change the length of the PI lines. This function is only available when [SET
MAXIMUM PI LINES] is set to [1]. If not already displayed, you can show PI lines for
which you wish to change the length by referring to section 1.40.1.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [3 NAV TOOLS].
3. Select [2 PI LINES].
4. Select [6 TRUNC RANGE 1].
5. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the front PI line length. The available range is 0.000
NM to 24.000 NM. All PI lines beyond this mark will be hidden.
7. Left-click to confirm the setting.
8. Select [7 TRUNC RANGE 2].
9. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key.
10. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the front PI line length. The available range is 0.000
NM to 24.000 NM. All PI lines beyond this mark will be hidden.
11. To change the length of other PI lines, activate the line you wish to adjust, then
repeat steps 1 through 10.
12. Close the menu.

Heading line PI line

OS location
TRUNC RANGE 1 length setting

TRUNC RANGE 2 length setting

1-69
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.41 Zoom
The zoom function enlarges an area of interest as large as twice the normal viewing
size, in the [INFORMATION BOX]. Zoom can be selected using the control unit or from
a preset function key (see section 1.9 for how to assign functions to the function keys).

Zoom is not available when the [INFORMATION BOX] setting for [TARGET DATA] is
[LARGE].

To enable/disable the zoom magnification, select the appropriate zoom setting

([2TIMES]: Enables magnification at 2u, or [3TIMES]: Enables magnification at 3u)
from the [ZOOM] option in the [INFORMATION BOX] menu. (See section 1.46.)

1. Select the operational display area, then right-click to show the [CURSOR] con-
text menu.
2. Select [ZOOM].
3. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then left-click. The cursor is
now displayed with a zoom box.
4. Place the cursor and zoom box at the location you wish to zoom, then left-click to
anchor the box.
If the zoom box is not placed where you intended to place it, left-click twice, then
move the box to the correct place. Left-click to anchor the box.
5. Right-click to complete the procedure. The selected area is displayed on the right-
side of the screen and the cursor returns to normal shape.

Zoom box is placed at

the location to be
zoomed and the cursor
returns to its normal
shape.
Cursor with
zoom box

To disable the zoom function, repeat steps 1 to 3. At step 3, the zoom box is removed
from the display.

Note: Where the zoom function is assigned to a function key, press the function key
to cycle through the zoom settings in the following order: [OFF] o [2TIMES] (2u mag-
nification) o [3TIMES] (3u magnification) o [OFF]...
This operation works in direct relation with the settings selected from the [ZOOM] op-
tion in the [INFORMATION BOX] menu. To use the zoom function on a different area,
do the procedure (step 1 to step 5) listed above.

1-70
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.42 How to Use Marks

Marks can be entered at any location inside the operational display area, however, no
mark can be entered at the location of an on-screen box. A total of 20,000 marks can
be inscribed at any one time.

Note: The location and orientation of mark symbols and mark lines can change, de-
pending on the display presentation mode, as shown in the table below.
Presentation mode Mark symbol Mark line
HEAD UP RM/STERN UP Location is changed ac- Location and orientation
RM/STAB HEAD UP RM cording to heading and own are changed according to
ship position. heading and own ship posi-
Orientation is unchanged. tion.
COURSE UP RM/NORTH Location is changed ac- Location and orientation
UP RM/NORTH UP TM cording to own ship posi- are changed according to
tion. own ship position.
Orientation is unchanged.

1.42.1 How to select a mark type

1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
RADAR MAP (1/2)
1 BACK
2 ORIGIN MARK STAB
GND / SEA
3 MARK TYPE
ORIGIN MARK(No.) /
ORIGIN MARK(SYM) /
OWN MAP MARK /
AIS
MARK WP 1~50 /
WP 51~100 /
AIS 1 WP 101~150 /
WP 151~198 /
OWN SHIP SHAPE
Right-click 4 MARK POSITION
CURSOR / OS / L/L
00º00.000’N
000º00.000’E
RADAR-MAP 0 / 20000
OWN TRACK 0 / 20000
TGT TRACK 0 / 15000
0 NEXT
2. Select [3 MARK TYPE].
3. Select the appropriate type of marker, referring to the table below, then press the
ENTER MARK key.
Mark kind Description
[ORIGIN MARK(No.)] Inscribes the origin mark symbol, with mark number.
[ORIGIN MARK(SYM)] Inscribes the origin mark symbol, with no mark number.
[MAP MARK] Inscribes the selected map mark.
[WP 1-50] Inscribes waypoint marker 1 through 50.
[WP 51-100] Inscribes waypoint marker 51 through 98.
[WP 101-150] Inscribes waypoint marker 101 through 150.
[WP 151-198] Inscribes waypoint marker 151 through 198.
[OWN SHIP SHAPE] Inscribes a mark with the same shape as own ship.
4. Close the menu.

1-71
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.42.2 How to select the mark inscription position

You can select the location at which the marker is inscribed from the following:

Location Description
[CURSOR] You can select the location using the Control Unit.
[OWN SHIP] Marker is placed at own ship position.
[L/L] Marker is placed at the co-ordinates selected.
1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
2. Select [4 MARK POSITION].
3. Referring to the table above, select the appropriate location, then press the EN-
TER MARK key.

How to set the co-ordinates

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [L/L], the co-ordinates settings are dis-
played. Co-ordinates can be set one digit at a time, as shown in the figure below.
Currently selected digit is highlighted by the cursor.
Left-click to move to the next digit.
Roll the scrollwheel to change the value.
N - North (Latitude)
028º 00.200 S S - South (Latitude)

153º 43.100 E W - West (Longitude)

E - East (Longitude)

1) Spin the scrollwheel to change the value, then left-click to move to the next
digit.
2) Repeat step 1 to adjust the Latitude and Longitude as appropriate.
4. Close the menu.

1.42.3 How to select the mark color (B-type only)

B-type radars of this series allow the change of mark colors. For all other types, the
color is fixed and cannot be changed.

1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
2. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
3. Select [3 MARK COLOR].
4. Select the appropriate color, then press the ENTER MARK key. Available options
are shown in the table below.
Menu Menu Menu
Color Color Color
indication indication indication
RED Red CYA Cyan BLU Blue
GRN Green MAG Magenta YEL Yellow
WHT White
5. Close the menu.

1-72
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.42.4 How to inscribe marks

You can inscribe marks anywhere inside the operational display area, however, marks
cannot be inscribed in the same location as a menu box.

Depending on the setting for [4 MARK POSITION] the method to inscribe a mark is
slightly different.

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [CURSOR]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. The cursor
moves inside the operational display area.
3. Place the cursor on the location (inside the operational display area) you wish to
inscribe the mark, then left-click to anchor the mark.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for multiple mark inscription, or right-click to complete the pro-
cedure.

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [OWN SHIP]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. The selected
mark is inscribed at the OS position.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for multiple mark inscription, or right-click to complete the pro-
cedure.

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [L/L]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. RADAR MAP
menu appears and the first digit of the latitude is selected.
3. Referring to section 1.42.3, set the latitude and longitude.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for multiple mark inscription, or right-click to complete the pro-
cedure.

1-73
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.42.5 How to delete marks

Marks can be deleted one at a time, or all at once.

How to delete marks individually

1. Select the operational display area, then right-click to show the [CURSOR] con-
text menu.
2. Select [MARK DELETE]. The cursor changes to a highlighted cursor.
3. Place the highlighted cursor on the mark to be deleted, then left-click.
4. Repeat step 3 to delete another mark, or press the right button to return the cur-
sor to normal function.

How to delete all marks

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [8 DELETE DATA].
4. Select [2 ALL MARKS].
5. Select [YES], then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

1.42.6 How to hide the heading line marker

The heading line is a line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar dis-
play area and appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in HEAD UP mode. The
orientation of the line changes the orientation depending on the ship orientation in
NORTH UP and True Motion modes.

To temporarily extinguish the heading line to look at targets existing dead ahead of
own ship, press and hold the HL OFF key, or place the cursor on the [HL OFF] box at
the left of the display then left-click and hold. In addition to the heading line, the stern
marker and all graphics within the operational display area are also erased. To redis-
play the heading line, etc., release the key or the left button.

1.42.7 How to hide/show the stern mark

The stern marker, which is a dotted line, appears opposite to the heading line. To dis-
play or erase this marker do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [STERN MARK].
4. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
5. Close the menu.

1.42.8 North mark

The north mark is displayed as a short dotted line on the inside edge of the operational
display area. In HEAD UP mode, the north mark moves according to the own ship
bearing.

1-74
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.42.9 How to set up the own ship symbol

The own ship symbol marks own position on the display. It can be turned on or off and
its configuration selected from the [MARK] menu. Two configurations are available:
minimized symbol and scaled symbol. If the largest dimension of the symbol gets
smaller than 6 mm, the scaled symbol will disappear and the own ship mark will be
shown as a minimized symbol. The scaled symbol is scaled to indicate the length and
beam of the vessel. Ship’s dimensions should be entered at installation to use the
scaled ship symbol.

Antenna Heading line

Heading line
position X
Beam line
Beam line

Scaled symbol Minimized symbol

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [2 OWN SHIP MARK].
4. Select [MINIMIZED] or [SCALED] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK
key.
5. Close the menu.

1.42.10 How to use the INS marker

You can receive predicted position data by connecting this radar to an INS.
Note: This function is only available if [ECDIS] is set to [SERIAL] or [LAN] at installa-
tion. Consult your dealer for details.
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [6 ECDIS MARKS DISPLAY].
4. Select [7 PREDICTOR].
5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

1.42.11 How to show/hide radar map marks

You can show or hide marks on the radar map.

1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
2. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
3. Select [2 MAP DISPLAY].
4. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
5. Close the menu.

1-75
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.42.12 How to set the barge marker

You can mark the locations of barges on the display with icons.

Note: This function is not available if [ECDIS] is set to [SERIAL] or [LAN] at installa-
tion. Consult your dealer for details.
Set up barge information as follows:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [6 BARGE MARK].
4. Select [2 BARGE MARK DISPLAY].
5. Select [ON] to display barge marks, [OFF] to hide barge marks, as appropriate,
then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Select [3 BARGE SIZE]. Spin the scrollwheel to enter the [LENGTH] and [WIDTH]
of the barge.
7. Select [4 BARGE ARRANGEMENT]. This item lets you set a single barge or a
barge chain. Spin the scrollwheel to select a value, then left click to move the cur-
sor to the next line. Select number of barges (max. 9) to display. As you spin the
scrollwheel the squares light or extinguish and the number of barges selected ap-
pears at the right side.
First row of barge [ARRANGEMENT] is displayed
as the right side of the barge icon on-screen.

4
9
X 9
9
4

Own ship icon

You can also use the number keys on the Control Unit to select the number of
barges.
8. Close the menu. The barge mark is now displayed as shown in the example figure
on the previous page.

1.42.13 Antenna mark

When [2 OWN SHIP MARK] in the [2 MARKS] menu is set to [SCALED], the antenna
location is shown as a blue cross. The location of the antenna, and therefore the an-
tenna mark, is set at installation.

1-76
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.42.14 How to set origin mark stabilization

You can mark any prominent target or a point of particular interest using the origin
mark feature. Twenty origin marks may be entered: 10 standard origin marks (with
number) and one each of the 10 symbol origin marks. The marks may be geographi-
cally fixed (ground stabilized) or sea stabilized. To display the origin marks, heading
signal and own ship position data are required.

Origin marks can be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or moving (sea stabi-
lized).

1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
2. Select [2 ORIGIN MARK STAB].
3. Select [GND] or [SEA] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
4. Close the menu.

1.42.15 How to inscribe origin marks

You can inscribe origin marks anywhere inside the operational display area, however,
marks cannot be inscribed in the same location as a menu box.

Depending on the setting for [4 MARK POSITION] the method to inscribe a mark is
slightly different.

Note: The following procedures assume that [3 MARK TYPE] is set to either [ORIGIN
MARK(No.)] or [ORIGIN MARK(SYM)]. For how to set the mark type, see
section 1.42.1.

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [CURSOR]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate origin mark, then left-click. The cur-
sor moves inside the operational display area.
3. Place the cursor on the location (inside the operational display area) you wish to
inscribe the origin mark, then left-click to anchor the origin mark.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for multiple origin mark inscription, or right-click to complete
the procedure.

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [OWN SHIP]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate origin mark, then left-click. The se-
lected mark is inscribed at the OS position.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for multiple origin mark inscription, or right-click to complete
the procedure.

1-77
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [L/L]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate origin mark, then left-click. RADAR
MAP menu appears and the first digit of the latitude is selected.
3. Referring to section 1.42.3, set the latitude and longitude.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for multiple origin mark inscription, or right-click to complete
the procedure.
When an origin mark is inscribed, the MARK box shows the range and bearing from
own ship to the origin mark.

1.42.16 How to delete origin marks

Unlike other marks, you can only delete origin marks individually. To delete origin
marks, follow the procedure below.

1. Select the operational display area, then right-click to show the [CURSOR] con-
text menu.
2. Select [MARK DELETE]. The cursor changes to a highlighted cursor.
3. Place the highlighted cursor on the origin mark to be deleted, then left-click.
4. Repeat step 3 to delete another origin mark, or press the right button to return
the cursor to normal function.

1.43 Drop Mark

The operator can inscribe a drop mark at a selected location to find the range and
bearing from own ship to the mark. This can be useful for marking a point to avoid
while navigating to a destination.

To active the drop mark feature, do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [4 DROP MARK].
4. Select [ON] to enable [DROP MARK]. Two indications appear at the bottom of the
screen.

Drop mark boxes show the mark number,

bearing and range to the mark.
5. Close the menu.

1-78
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.43.1 How to inscribe a drop mark

1. Select a drop mark box, then left-click.
2. Place the cursor at the location to inscribe the drop mark, then left-click.
The drop mark box shows the range and bearing to the marked location.

1.43.2 How to erase drop marks

Select the drop mark to be erased, then press and hold the left button. The mark is
erased and the range/bearing indications are no longer shown.

1.44 How to Adjust Brilliance of On-screen Data

On-screen markers and alphanumeric readout brilliance can be adjusted using the fol-
lowing procedure:

1. Place the cursor on the [PLT] indication, inside the brilliance settings box at the
bottom-left of the screen.

PLT1 Place cursor here, then

100 left-click to change
brilliance preset,
right-click to open the
[BRILL] menu.

The indication appears highlighted with a light-blue colored box.

Right-click to show the [BRILL1] box menu.
2. Select the appropriate item to adjust.
Menu item Description
Page 1
[2 ECHO COLOR] Changes the color used to display echoes.
[3 PALETTE] Changes the color scheme (see paragraph 1.44.1).
[4 CONTROL PANEL] Adjusts control panel back-light brilliance.
[5 CHARACTERS] Adjusts on-screen text brilliance.
[6 CURSOR] Adjusts cursor brilliance.
[7 ECHOES] Adjusts the echo brilliance.
[8 TRAILS] Adjusts echo trail brilliance.
[9 HL] Adjusts heading line brilliance.
Page 2
[2 RANGE RINGS] Adjusts range ring brilliance.
[3 BEARING CURSOR] Adjusts bearing cursor brilliance.
[4 EBL] Adjusts EBL line brilliance.
[5 VRM] Adjusts VRM line brilliance.
[6 PI LINES] Adjusts PI line brilliance.
[7 TT SYMBOLS] Adjusts target trail symbol brilliance.
[8 AIS SYMBOLS] Adjusts AIS symbol brilliance.
[9 L/L GRID] Adjusts latitude/longitude grid brilliance.
[0 MARKS] Adjusts marks brilliance (all marks).
3. Spin the scrollwheel, or press the appropriate menu number to change or adjust
the settings. Left-click, or press the ENTER MARK key to confirm the setting.
4. Close the menu.

1-79
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.44.1 How to change color schemes (palettes)

This radar provides six sets of color and brilliance schemes to match any ambient
lighting condition and can be assigned to a [BRILL] box preset.

1. Place the cursor on the [PLT] indication, inside the brilliance settings box at the
bottom-left of the screen.
The indication appears highlighted with a light-blue colored box.
Right-click to show the [BRILL1] box menu.
2. Select [3 PALETTE].
3. Select the appropriate palette, then press the ENTER MARK key. The default set-
tings for each palette are shown in the table on the following page.
TEXT
PALETTE BRILL PANEL OTHERS BCKGRND/CIRCLE
COLOR
DAY-GRY 100 15 15 WHITE GRAY/BLACK
DAY-BLU 100 15 15 WHITE BLUE/DARK BLUE
DAY-GRN 100 15 15 GREEN GRAY/BLACK
DUSK-GRY 40 7 12 WHITE DARK GRAY/DARK
BLUE
DUSK-BLU 40 7 12 WHITE DARK BLUE/BLUE
DUSK-GRN 40 7 12 GREEN DARK GRAY/BLACK
NIGHT-GRY 4 3 12 ORANGE DARK GRAY/BLACK
NIGHT-BLU 4 3 12 WHITE DARK BLUE/BLUE
4. Close the menu.

How to assign/change the brilliance presets

1. Place the cursor on the [PLT] indication, inside the brilliance settings box at the
bottom-left of the screen.
The selected item appears highlighted with a light-blue colored box.
Right-click to show the [BRILL1] box menu.

PLT1 Place cursor here, then

100 left-click to change
brilliance preset,
right-click to open the
[BRILL] menu.
2. Press the left button to cycle through the presets. There are four available:
[PLT1], [PLT2], [PLT3] and [PLT4].
3. To change the palette for a preset, place the cursor on the "PLT" indication, then
right-click. The [BRILL] menu appears.
4. Follow steps 2 to 4 in the procedure above.
5. Repeat the process to change color scheme palettes for other presets.

1-80
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.44.2 How to change the echo color

1. Place the cursor on the [PLT] indication, inside the brilliance settings box at the
bottom-left of the screen.
The selected item appears highlighted with a light-blue colored box.
Right-click to show the [BRILL1] box menu.
2. Select [2 ECHO COLOR].
3. Select the appropriate color, then press the ENTER MARK key.
The available options are listed in the table below.
Color Description/remarks
YEL Yellow echo (default setting)
GRN Green echo
WHT White echo
AMB* Amber echo
M-GRN* Red echo, gradually changes to green color as the echo weakens.
M-CYA* Red echo, gradually changes to cyan color as the echo weakens.
*: Available for B-type radars only.

1.45 How to Display and Set Up Navigational Data

Wind, depth, ocean current, water temperature, date and time and waypoint data can
be displayed on this radar, however appropriate sensors are required.

1.45.1 How to set up the navigational data

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX].
3. Select [4 NAV DATA SETTINGS].
4. Referring to the table below, select the appropriate menu item, then press the EN-
TER MARK key.
Menu item Available settings
Page 1
[2 DEPTH] [OFF], [ON]; [m], [ft]
[3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE] [10], [20], [50], [100], [200], [500] (m)
[4 DEPTH MARK] [000] to [500] (m)
[5 CURRENT] [OFF], [ON]
[6 WIND] [OFF], [ON]; [kn], [m/s]
[7 WIND REFERENCE] [APPARENT], [NORTH], [THEORETICAL]
Page 2
[2 TEMPERATURE] [OFF], [ON]; [°C], [°F]
[3 WPT DATA] [OFF], [REL], [TRUE]
5. Referring to the available options listed in the table above, select the appropriate
setting, then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

1-81
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.45.2 How to display navigational data

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX].
3. Select [DISPLAY NAV DATA].
4. Select [ON] to display navigational data, [OFF] to hide navigational data, then
press the ENTER MARK key.
5. Close the menu.

1.46 How to Use the Information Box

The information box shows target data, navigational data and zoomed areas of the ra-
dar display. To set up the information box, do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX].
3. Select and set the appropriate menu item, referring to the table below.
4. Close the menu.
Menu item Settings Description
[2 OWN SHIP INFO] See section 1.11, Set up various own ship information,
section 1.12 and such as sensors used for position fix,
section 1.13 for date and time format/offsets, heading
details. and speed sensors used.
[3 DISPLAY NAV DATA] • OFF • Disable navigational data display.
• ON • Enable navigational data display.
[4 NAV DATA SETTINGS] See section 1.45 Set up the format in which various
for details. navigational data is displayed in the
[INFORMATION BOX].
[5 ZOOM] • OFF • Disable zoom magnification.
• 2TIMES • Set zoom magnification at 2u.
• 3TIMES • Set zoom magnification at 3u.
[6 ZOOM DISPLAY] • STAB GND • Ground stabilized zoom (Geo-
graphically fixed).
• STAB HDG • Heading stabilized zoom (Relative).
• STAB NORTH • North stabilized zoom (True).
• TT TRACK • Tracked targets are zoomed.
[7 TARGET DATA] • 1BOX See the figure on the following page.
• 2BOX
• 3BOX
• LARGE

1-82
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Zoom and Zoom and Zoom and Zoom and

navigational data
navigational data navigational data navigational data
are displayed here,
are displayed here. are displayed here. but can be hidden are displayed here.
by TT/AIS data.

Zoom and Zoom and

Zoom and navigational data navigational data Only TT/AIS Data
navigational data are displayed here, are displayed here, is displayed in
are displayed here. but can be hidden but can be hidden the large box.
by TT/AIS data. by TT/AIS data. Up to three AIS
targets or up six
TT targets.
For MU-270W
configurations,
up to two TT
Zoom can be Zoom can be Zoom can be targets can be
displayed here, but displayed here, but displayed here, but shown.
can be hidden by can be hidden by can be hidden by
TT/AIS data. TT/AIS data. TT/AIS data.

1BOX 2BOX 3BOX LARGE

• TT/AIS data displayed in • When using the 2BOX or • Each box may display up
the information box is 3BOX setting and the two TT targets or one AIS
shown in order of bottom half of the target. (For MU-270W
acquisition in the bottom information box is full, the configurations, up to 3three
half of the box. upper half is overlayed with TT targets can be shown)
the newly aquired TT/AIS
• When the target data is no target data.
longer displayed (TT is
cancelled, etc.) in the upper
box, the previous display is
restored.

1-83
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.47 Interswitch
The interswitch of this radar uses an Ethernet to transfer video and control signals. A
digital signal transfers the video and control signals. You can connect up to four an-
tennas and four display units. Set radar display and antenna groups from the [ANTEN-
NA SELECT] display.
When you switch to a different antenna, the heading skew and timing adjustment (set
at installation) for that antenna are automatically applied.
The [ANTENNA] box at the upper left position shows current antenna selection.

Antenna box
ANTx: “x” indicates antenna
selected.
(M) or (S): indicates antenna is
(M)aster or (S)lave.
X-Band or S-Band: indicates
antenna bandwidth.

1.47.1 How to display antenna information

To display antenna information place the cursor on the [ANTENNA] box, then right-
click. The [SELECT ANTENNA] menu appears.

SELECT ANTENNA Using the information displayed in this example the antenna system configuration would
1 BACK look something like this.
ANT 1 : X-BAND
25UP Main Top ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 ANT4
ANT 2 : S-BAND
30UP Main 2nd ← Antenna Unit
ANT 3 : X-BAND
12 Fore
ANT 4 : X-BAND
12 Aft
OWN RADAR NO.1
2 DISP1 ANT1 DISP1 DISP2 DISP3 DISP4 ← Processor Unit
MASTER
DISP2 ANT2
MASTER
DISP3 ANT3 HUB-3000
MASTER
DISP4 ANT4
MASTER The following information is displayed in the [SELECT ANTENNA] menu:
9 SAVE INTER-SWITCH • Radar band, output power and antenna position of each antenna
NO / YES currently powered. (If an antenna is not powered, its data area is blank.)
• Own ship radar number (radar in use).
0 CLEAR INTER-SWITCH
• Current antenna and display combinations.
NO / YES

Note: For configurations with processors assigned as DISP5/DISP6/DISP7/DISP8 at

installation, the processor unit automatically connects to the system as [SLAVE] when
first turned on. You can change this setting after the first connection. See
section 1.47.2.

1-84
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.47.2 How to preset antenna and display combinations

You can preset the antenna and display combinations for each antenna and display
in the radar system. As an example, the procedure below shows how to select the no.
1 antenna unit for the no. 2 display unit.

1. Place the cursor on the [ANTENNA] box, then right-click to show the [SELECT
ANTENNA] menu.
2. Select the display unit for which to select an antenna (at the next step). For the
purpose of this example, select [DISP2] to select the no. 2 display unit.
The indication for the antenna is highlighted.
3. Spin the scrollwheel to toggle between [MASTER] and [SLAVE]. The MASTER
system passes on settings such as [CPA], [TCPA] and alarm settings to SLAVE
radars connected to the same network.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other display and antenna combinations.
5. Select [SAVE INTER-SWITCH], then select [YES] to save your selections.
6. Close the menu.

Antenna selection considerations

• An antenna unit cannot be controlled from multiple display units. Select one Master
display unit for one antenna unit. If two antenna units are set as masters, the display
last-set as master becomes the master and all other displays are automatically
changed to slave.
• An antenna unit without a Master display cannot be selected on the sub display
units. If there is no antenna unit set as master, the lowest number display is auto-
matically set as master.
• If the Alert "EXT RADAR ERROR" appears, do one of the following, as applicable:
- If only your antenna is not displayed on the [ANT SELECT] display, the LAN line
in the Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, use the standalone mode.
- If the antenna that was in use does not appear on the [ANT SELECT] display, the
LAN line in other Processor Unit may be faulty. In this case, see the preceding page
for how to select a different antenna unit
• When the Network fails, the Interswitch does not work, but standalone operation is
possible.
• Radar functions are controlled independently, dependently or commonly depending
on selection as [MASTER] or [SLAVE] (see the table on the following page).

Compatibility of display and operation

When connecting with FAR-2xx7 series radar
When switching the antenna from FAR-2xx8 to FAR-2xx7, the image for FAR-2xx7 is
displayed on the screen and each function is operative. However, when switching the
antenna from FAR-2xx7 to FAR-2xx8, the following functions are not operative.

• Automatic Clutter Elimination (ACE) function.

• Selection of the transmit frequency by the [TX CH] button for solid state radar.
• Target Analyzer function.
• Hatching.
• Berthing STC.

1-85
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Radar Functions Control Master Display Option Slave Display Option

AIS function Independent Desired value can be set Desired value can be set
Brilliance
Echo trails
EBL
Lat/long data
Presentation mode
Speed data
Target alarm
TT, AIS on/off
TT, AIS track interval
Vector mode
Vector time
VRM
Wiper
Zoom
TT COLLISION
alarm
Range Independent Desired value can be set Desired value can be set
(Sampling at Master) (Echo Sampling at Master
Range)
A/C SEA Desired value can be set
A/C RAIN
Automatic Clutter
Elimination (ACE)
Gain
IR* Dependent Desired value can be set Cannot control
Echo stretch Control
Echo averaging
Picture setting
(Customize echo)
STBY/TX
Tuning
Reference Point Independent Desired value can be set Desired value can be set
TT LOST warning Common Item Commonly Controlled Item Commonly Controlled
TT alerts ACK Control
TT acquire
TT/AIS AZ
*: When the connected radar antenna is a FAR-3000 magnetron-type, and the radar
is assigned as “Slave”, the desired value can be set for these functions. For FAR-3000
SSD-types, these function cannot be controlled.

1.47.3 How to clear the interswitch

You can clear the interswitch settings by following the procedure below.

1. Place the cursor on the [ANTENNA] box, then right-click to show the [SELECT
ANTENNA] menu.
2. Select [0 CLEAR INTER-SWITCH].
3. Select [YES] to clear the interswitch settings. The antenna settings are restored
to default.

1-86
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.48 Performance Monitor

The performance monitor, installed in the antenna unit, produces a visual indication
on the radar display screen when the radar transmitter power and radar receiver sen-
sitivity are within the prescribed limits.

1.48.1 How to activate/deactivate the performance monitor

1. Set the radar to TX (transmit) mode.
2. Open the menu.
3. Select [1 ECHO].
4. Select [5 PERFORMANCE MONITOR].
5. Select the appropriate setting, then press the ENTER MARK key.
• [OFF]: Deactivate the performance monitor.
Note: You can also deactivate the performance monitor by adjusting the range
manually.
• [ON]: Activate the performance monitor and show the graph.
• [GRAPH ONLY]: Show the performance monitor graph, however the perfor-
mance monitor is not activated.
6. Close the menu.
When the performance monitor is active, the indication "PM" appears in yellow char-
acters at the top of the display.

Note: If the blind sector and the direction of the PM antenna overlap one another, turn
off the blind sector in order to display echoes correctly.
The radar is automatically set as follows when the performance monitor is activated.

Adjustable
Setting at PM
Setting while PM Setting at PM deactivation
activation
is active
[GAIN] 70 *1 Yes *3 Setting before PM activation.
[SEA] 0 No Setting before PM activation.
[SEA AUTO] MAN No Setting before PM activation.
[RAIN] 0 No Setting before PM activation.
[RAIN AUTO] MAN No Setting before PM activation.
[TUNE] AUTO No Setting before PM activation.
(Shown for magnetron
radars only)
[TX CH] CH1 No Setting before PM activation.
(Shown instead of [TUNE]
for solid-state radars only)
[ACE] OFF No Setting before PM activation.
[ES] OFF No Setting before PM activation.
[EAV] OFF No Setting before PM activation.
[IR] 2 No Setting before PM activation.
[NOISE REJECT] OFF No Setting before PM activation.
[VIDEO CONTRAST] 4-B No Setting before PM activation.
[PULSE] LONG No Setting before PM activation.
Table continued on following page

1-87
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Adjustable
Setting at PM
Setting while PM Setting at PM deactivation
activation
is active
Table continued from previous page
[2ND ECHO REJ] ON Yes Setting at PM deactivation.
[LOW LEVEL ECHO] Previous setting kept, No Setting before PM activation.
fixed.
[WIPER] OFF No Setting before PM activation.
[CUSTOMIZED ECHO] Previous setting kept, No Return to active display.
fixed.
[PRESENTATION No change. *2 Yes Setting at PM deactivation.
MODE]
[RANGE] 24 NM, 24 SM, 48 kyd Yes *4 Setting at PM deactivation.
(A/B-types only)
[OFF CENTER] OFF Yes Setting at PM deactivation.
ANT REVOLUTION 24 rpm No Setting before PM activation.

*1: Gain is automatically set according to [PM GAIN ADJ], if it was adjusted at installation.
*2: [NORTH UP RM] is selected when the [PRESENTATION MODE] is set to [NORTH UP TM].
*3: The setting is not memorized.
*4: The performance monitor is deactivated if the range is changed manually.

1.48.2 How to check the radar’s performance

The range scale is automatically set to 24 NM. The radar screen will show arcs. If the
radar transmitter and receiver are in good working conditions in as much as the origi-
nal state when the monitor was turned on, the innermost arcs should appear between
8.0 NM to 19.8 NM. The performance monitor can observe a total of 10 dB loss in
transmitter and receiver.

How to set the number of arcs

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [1 ECHO].
3. Select [6 PM ARC].
4. Select [2], [3], [5] or [6] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
5. Close the menu.
The figure belows shows an example where [PM ARC] is set to [5].

Display Radar State Display Radar State

Transmitter: normal Transmitter and receiver:
Receiver: normal No arc indicates 10 dB loss.
Contact your dealer for advice.
8.0 NM to 8.0 NM to (For magnetron radars, have
19.8 NM 19.8 NM a technician check the
magnetron.

Note 1: The lengths of the arcs can vary according to installation environment. Judge
the strength of the echo that appears within 60° from the arc location to confirm if the
radar is working properly or not.
Note 2: The location of the arcs changes according to the [PM ARC] setting.
Turn the performance monitor off when finished.

1-88
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.49 How to Change the Reference Position

The reference position for measurements (range, bearing, etc.) and markers (heading
line, stern mark, etc.) can be the radar antenna position ([ANT]) or the consistent com-
mon reference point ([CCRP]).

The reference position is a location on own ship to which all horizontal measurements,
for example range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, closest point of approach
(CPA) or time to closest point of approach (TCPA), are normally referenced.
[CCRP] for this series of radars is fixed at the conning position and [ANT] is fixed at
the radar antenna position.

To change the reference position, use the trackball to place the cursor over the "REF
POINT" indication at the top of the screen, then left-click to select [ANT] or [CCRP] as
required. You can also change the reference by spinning the scrollwheel when the cur-
sor is placed over the indication.

The position of the own ship marker changes according to reference position as
shown below. If the CCRP is positioned outside of the effective display area, the bear-
ing scale is indicated with the appropriate reduced detail.

X
Radar antenna Conning position is at
position is at center of display
center of display

ANT position CCRP position

Range and bearing are measured and graphics are drawn according to reference po-
sition as in the table below.

Reference point
Category Item
ANT CCRP
Range and bearing EBL Range and bearing Range and bearing
measurements VRM measured from an- measured from
Cursor tenna position. CCRP.
PI line
Range ring
Drop mark
Graphics Heading line Drawn from anten- Drawn from CCRP.
Stern mark na position.
Beam line
Own ship vector
Own ship track
Bearing cursor Drawn with antenna Drawn with CCRP
position at center. at center.
Course, speed Calculated with an- Calculated with
tenna position at CCRP at center.
center.
Table continued on following page

1-89
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Reference point
Category Item
ANT CCRP
Table continued from previous page
CPA, TCPA Calculated with an- Calculated with
tenna position at CCRP at center.
center.
BCR, BCT Calculated from bow position.
Own ship data Heading Data is taken from respective sensors, re-
Speed gardless of reference point selected.
Course over ground
Speed over ground
Own L/L Location of the CCRP.
Note: When the antenna is located some distance from the CCRP, the CCRP can be
outside the bearing cursor in true-motion or off-center. Also, when the CCRP is set as
a reference point, some parts of the bearing cursor are not displayed.

1.50 Anchor Watch

The anchor watch feature alerts you when your ship has traveled a distance greater
than a threshold value, when it should be at rest. When the anchor watch is active, an
orange dashed circle marks the anchor watch range.

If your ship drifts more than the anchor watch setting, the alert "ANCHOR WATCH"
appears in the [ALERT] box. The alert is escalated from warning level to alarm level if
the alert is not acknowledged within one minute. Also, if your vessel returns to within
the tolerable radius, the alert status is automatically changed to rectified.

Own ship location when

Anchor watch
anchor watch is set
alarm setting

Own ship moves

Alarm is
outside watch zone
triggered

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [4 ALERTS].
3. Select [4 ANCHOR WATCH].
4. Select [ON] to enable [ANCHOR WATCH], then press the ENTER MARK key.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to set the distance for the alert. Press the ENTER MARK key
to apply the setting.
6. Close the menu.

1-90
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.51 How to Interpret the Alert Box

When an alert condition is found, the applicable alert message appears in the [ALERT]
box. A buzzer sounds for alarm and warning alerts. The [ALERT] box is composed of
three lines of text information, and several icons, as shown below.

Alert number Alert list/log button

194 Buzzer silence icon

Alert icon NO VIDEO
SIGNAL A W C “Active alert” icons
Alert name/description
Silence the buzzer with the ALARM ACK key or select the [ALERT] box then left-click.
The buzzer and the flashing stop but the alert indication remains on the display until
the reason for the alert is removed.

1.51.1 Alert descriptions

Alerts which can appear on this radar are listed in the table. The level of priority, from
highest to lowest, is ALARM o WARNING o CAUTION. For detailed information re-
garding specific alerts and alert codes, including possible remedies, see "ALERT
CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS" on page AP-10.

Note: All active-unacknowledged warnings, except ANCHOR WATCH, are repeated

as warnings after 60 seconds (manufacturer’s fixed time period). The ANCHOR
WATCH alert is escalated from warning level to alarm level if it is not acknowledged
within 60 seconds.

1.51.2 Alert list

The alert list displays the names of violated alerts, including the time and date violated.
Up to 100 alerts are stored in the internal memory. Unacknowledged alarms are dis-
played first in the list (in red text), in the order in which they appear in the [ALERT] box.
Unacknowledged warnings are displayed in the list (in yellow-orange text), in the order
in which they appear in the [ALERT] box.

Cautions are displayed in the list (in yellow text), in the order in which they appear in
the [ALERT] box.

To display the alarm list, place the cursor on the alert list/log button in the [ALERT] box
then left-click.

1-91
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

Displayed page/Pages available

ALERT LIST (1/2) - When selected at page 1,
1 BACK(L=TOP) closes the list.
2 194 23:15 - When selected at page 2 or
MTR-DRV 03/FEB later, goes back to the
COM ERROR previous page.
RADAR1
- Long-press the left button
3 52601 20:25
Alert code and to go to page 1.
NO GYRO 01/FEB
alert message
SIGNAL RADAR1 Radar which output this alert
4 52001 12:18
RPU:FAN2 Date and time of alert
Alert icon 01/FEB
SPD ERROR RADAR1

- Select to refresh the list.

- Long-press the left button
to remove acknowledged 9 REFRESH DATA(L=CLR) - Select to go to the next page
and rectified alerts from 0 NEXT(L=LAST) - Long-press the left button to
the list. go to the last page.

An unacknowledged alert can be acknowledged from the list by selecting it, then left-
clicking. To erase the data for the number selected, left-click again. To erase all alert
indications, select [9 REFRESH DATA], then press and hold the left button.

To change pages, select [0 NEXT].

1-92
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.51.3 Alert icons and their meanings

Icon Status Visual indication Audible alert

Active - unacknowledged alarm Red, flashing 3 short, audible

alerts repeated
every 7 seconds.

Active - silenced alarm Red, flashing Silent

Active - acknowledged alarm Red Silent

Active - responsibility Red Silent

transferred alarm

Rectified - unacknowledged Red Silent

alarm

Active - unacknowledged Yellow-orange, flashing 2 short, audible

warning alerts repeated
every 60 seconds.
Active - silenced warning Yellow-orange, flashing Silent

Active - acknowledged warning Yellow-orange Silent

Active - responsibility Yellow-orange Silent

transferred warning

Rectified - unacknowledged Yellow-orange Silent

warning

Caution Yellow Silent

1-93
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.52 Icing Prevention

You can rotate the antenna (24 rpm) without transmission to keep the antenna from
freezing.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS].
3. Select [5 OPERATION].
4. Select [7 ICING PREVENTION].
5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate. If you select [ON], the message "Rotate An-
tenna to Prevent Icing." appears at the bottom of the screen.
6. Click [Start Antenna Rotation] to rotate the antenna without transmission. The
message changes to read "Antenna Rotating,No TX.".

Rotate Antenna to Prevent Icing. Antenna Rotating,No TX.

Start Antenna Rotation Stop Antenna Rotation

When the antenna stops When the antenna rotates

To stop the antenna rotation, left-click [Stop Antenna Rotation].

With this feature active and the antenna stopped, pushing the STBY TX key on the
Control Unit or click the [STBY TX] button on the Status bar rotates the antenna and
transmits pulses. Operating one of the above-mentioned controls again stops trans-
mission but the antenna rotates.

1-94
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.53 How to Select a Display Mode (B-type Only)

B-type radars of this series have three echo display modes available:

• [CIRCLE] mode: The echoes are displayed inside a circle on the screen. This is the
default (IMO compliant) mode.
• [WIDE] mode: The echoes are displayed in a square area, but are not displayed in
the data display area.
• [ALL] mode: The echoes are displayed across the entire screen.
Follow the procedure below to change display modes.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO]. The [ECHO] menu appears.
3. Select [8 ECHO AREA].
4. Select the appropriate setting, then press the ENTER MARK key.

CIRCLE WIDE ALL

5. Close the menu.

1-95
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.54 How to Manage SD-Card Data

The following data can be stored on a SD-Card: marks, lines, user set-
tings, installation settings, own track, target track (for A/B-types only),
alert history and some logs (for example, the alert log).

Note: The menu operations outlined in this section are only available when a SD-Card
is inserted. When there is no SD-Card inserted, the [FILES] menu is not selectable.

1.54.1 How to format the SD card

You do not normally need to format a SD card. If the card becomes unreadable, format
the card with a formatting program that is compatible with the specifications of the
card.

1.54.2 Cautionary notes on handling SD cards

• Handle the cards carefully. Improper use can damage the card and destroy its con-
tents.
• Make sure the card slot cover is closed, unless removing/inserting a card.
• Remove or insert a card using only your fingers. Do not use metal instruments (such
as tweezers) to remove the card.
• Do not remove the card when data is loading from, or saving to, the card.

1.54.3 Compatible SD cards

The table below lists the micro SD cards that have been verified as compatible for use
with this equipment.
Note 1: The cards were verified using basic functions. All functions were not verified.
FURUNO does not guarantee card operations.
Note 2: SD cards other than those listed below have not been verified.
Maker SD card type Capacity
Panasonic RP-SDUC16GJK 16GB
RP-SDUC32GJK 32GB
RP-SDWA16GJK 16GB
RP-SDWA-32GJK 32GB
SanDisk SDSDB-016G-J35U 16GB
SDSDC-032G-J35U 32GB
SDSDXPA-016G-JU3 16GB
SDSDXPA-032G-JU3 32GB
SDSDXVE-032GB-JNJIP 32GB
Toshiba SDAR40N16G 16GB
SDAR40N32G 32GB
SD-L016G4 16GB
SD-L032G4 32GB
SDXU-B016G 16GB
SDXU-B032G 32GB

1-96
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.54.4 How to insert SD cards

The SD card slot is located on the front face of the processor unit, between the LAN1
port and the DVI-I port.

SD- card slot (covered)

Note: Do not use any instruments to insert the card.

1. Remove the rubber cover on the SD card slot.
2. To insert a card, gently push the card into the slot, making sure that the card con-
nectors are facing downwards.
3. Close the rubber cover.

1.54.5 How to remove SD cards

There are two methods to remove the SD card; with the power on, or with the power
off.

How to remove SD cards with the power on

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears.
3. Select [5 REMOVE EXT MEDIA], then select
[YES].
You can now remove the SD card safely.
4. Remove the rubber cover on the SD card slot.
5. Gently push the SD cards to release the card from
the card slot.
6. Remove the SD card. Do not use any instruments to remove the card.
7. Close the menu.

How to remove SD cards with the power off

1. Make sure the power to the Processor Unit is turned off.
2. Remove the rubber cover on the SD card slot.
3. Gently push the SD cards to release the card from the card slot.
4. Remove the SD card. Do not use any instruments to remove the card.

1-97
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.54.6 How to save data

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears.
3. Select [2 SAVE DATA].
4. Select the data to save, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
The software keyboard appears.
5. Using the software keyboard, name the file, then
select [END] to start saving data. The file name
can be up to 12 characters in length.
The indication "WR CARD DATA" appears during
the save process and the menu closes automati-
cally.
6. When the process is complete, the indication "COMPLETED" appears on the
screen.

1.54.7 How to read (load) data

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears.
3. Select [3 LOAD DATA].
4. Select the data to load, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
The indication "RD CARD DATA" appears during
the read process and the menu closes automati-
cally.
5. When the process is complete, the indication
"COMPLETED" appears on the screen.

1.54.8 How to delete data

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [6 FILES]. The [FILES] menu appears.
3. Select [4 DELETE DATA].
4. Select the data to delete, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
The indication "DELETE CARD DATA" appears
during the delete process.
5. Close the menu.

1-98
 1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

1.55 How to Take a Screenshot

The system has an in-built screenshot feature. To use the feature, a SD Card must be
inserted in the Processor Unit. If there is no card inserted, the screenshot button on
the screen is not active.

Screenshot
button

To take a screenshot of the currently displayed screen, click the screenshot but-
ton.
Note: The screenshot function can also be assigned to a function key. For how to set
up the function keys, see section 1.9

1.56 How to Use the Watch Alert

The watch alert provides a visual alert at regular intervals to remind you to monitor the
radar picture for safety or other purposes. When the watch alert is enabled, the
WATCH box appears at the top of the screen.

Watch box

To enable or disable the watch alert, follow the procedure below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [4 ALERTS]. The [ALERTS] menu appears.
3. Select [2 WATCH ALERT].
4. Select the [OFF] to disable the alert, or select the required interval at which the
alert is released.
The available intervals are: [6min], [10min], [12min], [15min] and [20min].
5. Close the menu.
6. Left-click the watch box to start the watch timer. You can also reset the countdown
by left-clicking the watch box at any time.

1-99
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-100
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.1 General

2.1.1 Minimum range

The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of 1.5
or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate from the
point representing the antenna position.

It is mainly dependent on the pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing such
as main bang reduction and digital quantization. It is a good practice to use a shorter
range scale as far as it gives favorable definition or clarity of picture.

The IMO Resolution MSC.192(79) requires the minimum range to be less than 40 m,
respectively. This series of radars satisfy this requirement.

2.1.2 Maximum range

The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably depending on
several factors such as the height of the antenna above the waterline, the height of the
target above the sea, the size, shape and material of the target, and the atmospheric
conditions.

Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar hori-
zon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by about 6%
because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. The Rmax is given in the follow-
ing equation.

D: Radar horizon

h2
Optical horizon
h1 Globe

D = 2.2 x ( h1 + h2)
where D: radar horizon (nautical miles)
h1: antenna height (m)
h2: target height (m)

For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the
height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;

Rmax = 2.2 x ( 9 + 16) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm

It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs
the radar signal).

2-1
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.1.3 X-band and S-band

In fair weather, the equation on the previous page does not give a significant differ-
ence between X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy precipitation condition, an S-
band radar would have better detection than an X-band radar.

2.1.4 Radar resolution

There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing resolution
and range resolution.

• Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display as separate pips the echoes
received from two targets that are at the same range and close together. It is pro-
portional to the antenna length and reciprocally proportional to the wavelength. The
length of the antenna radiator should be selected for a bearing resolution better than
2.5° (IMO Resolution). This condition is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1.2 m
(4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-band radar requires a radiator of about 12 feet
(3.6 m) or longer.

Targets
Separate target echoes

Horizontal beam width

Targets

Horizontal beam width

Ovelapped target echoes

• Range resolution is the ability to display as separate pips the echoes received from
two targets that are on the same bearing and close to each other. This is determined
by pulselength only. Practically, a 0.08 microsecond pulse offers the discrimination
better than 40 m as do so with all FURUNO radars.
Test targets for determining the range and bearing resolution are radar reflectors
having an echoing area of 10 m2.

Separate target echoes

Transmission Targets
pulse

Ovelapping
Transmission Targets
pulse

Ovelapped target echoes

2-2
 2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.1.5 Bearing accuracy

One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of a tar-
get can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically depends on
the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually taken relative to
the ship’s heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading line at installation is an
important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To minimize error when measuring the
bearing of a target, put the target echo at the extreme position on the screen by se-
lecting a suitable range.

2.1.6 Range measurement

Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the radar.
Generally, there are two means of measuring range: the fixed range rings and the vari-
able range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on the screen with a prede-
termined interval and provide a rough estimate of the range to a target. The variable
range marker’s diameter is increased or decreased so that the marker touches the in-
ner edge of the target, allowing the operator to obtain more accurate range measure-
ments.

2.2 False Echoes

Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target
or disappear even if there are targets. They are, however, recognized if you under-
stand the reason why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.

Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large
ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be observed on the
display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of the target as shown
below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often removed by decreasing
the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C SEA control.

True
echo

Target
Your ship
Multiple
echo

2-3
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side of the
beam, called “sidelobes”. If a target exists where it can be detected by the side lobes
as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be represented on both sides of the true
echo at the same range. Side lobes show usually only on short ranges and from strong
targets. They can be reduced through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjust-
ment of the A/C SEA control.

Mainlobe (beam)

True target

Sidelobe Sidelobe

Antenna False echoes by sidelobes

Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may be represented at two positions on the
screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other is a
false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close to your
ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large metal bridge, for
example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the screen.

Target ship
Route for direct reflection

Your ship

True
echo
Bridge

Route for
indirect reflection False
echo
Mirror image
of target ship

2-4
 2. RADAR OBSERVATION

Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar beam. If
the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a non-detecting sec-
tor may be produced. Within this sector targets can not be detected.

Wharf and its echo

Radar position Radar position
Wharf and its echo

Shadow sector
occurs because Shadow sector occurs
wharf is hidden because obstruction
behind ship. (like mast) is in path
of radar beam.

Large ship Size of blind sector depends

on size of obstruction and range.

2.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)

2.3.1 SART description

A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) can be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm)
radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to
transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency
band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 Ps) through the band before be-
ginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 Ps) through the band back to the starting frequen-
cy. This process is repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in
each sweep, the SART frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be
within the pass band of the radar receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency
match during each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a response on the radar dis-
play, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.

When the radar to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display my show also
the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses,
which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nautical miles, will be interspersed with the orig-
inal line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.

Screen A: When SART is distant Screen B: When SART is close

Lines of 12 dots are displayed in
concentric arcs.
Echo from SART Radar antenna
beamwidth
Echo from
24 NM 1.5 NM SART

Position of
SART

Your ship
position Your ship
position Position of
SART mark
SART
length

2-5
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.3.2 How to show SART marks on the radar display

This radar is equipped with a feature that optimally sets up the radar for SART detec-
tion. This feature automatically detunes the radar receiver out of its best tuning condi-
tion. This erases or weakens all normal radar echoes, but the SART marks are not
erased because the SART response signal scans over all frequencies in the 9 GHz
band. When the radar approaches the SART in operation, the SART marks will en-
large to large arcs, blurring a large part of the screen.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [1 ECHO], then press the ENTER MARK key.
3. Select [7 SART], then press the ENTER MARK key.
4. Select [ON] to show SART marks on the radar display, then press the ENTER
MARK key. Select [OFF] to hide SART marks.
When the SART function is active, the settings listed in the table on the following
page are automatically made to radar functions:
Setting Changed to
Range 12 NM
Pulselength Long
Echo Stretch Off
Noise Rejector Off
Echo Averaging Off
Interference Rejector Off
Performance Monitor Off
A/C RAIN Off
5. Close the menu.
The indication "SART" appears at the top of the screen, in yellow text, when this fea-
ture is active. Be sure to turn this feature off when SART detection is no longer your
objective.

2.3.3 General remarks on receiving SARTs

SART range errors
When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the SART
is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is displayed
can be as much as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART. When the range
closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first of these will be no
more than 150 meters beyond the true position.

Radar bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with the
range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz are used
with long pulses on long range scales and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with short
pulses on short ranges.

A radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so it is
preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of the SART.

2-6
 2. RADAR OBSERVATION

Radar sidelobes
As the SART is approached, sidelobes from the radar antenna can show the SART
responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed by the use
of the anti-clutter sea control although it can be operationally useful to observe the
side lobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and also they will con-
firm that the SART is near to own ship.

Note: SART information excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 OPERATION OF MARINE
RADAR FOR SART DETECTION.

2.4 RACON
A RACON is a radar beacon that emits radar receivable signals in the radar frequency
spectrum (X- or S-band). There are several signal formats; in general, the RACON sig-
nal appears on the radar screen as a rectangular echo originating at a point just be-
yond the position of the radar beacon. It has a Morse coded pattern. Note that the
position on the radar display is not accurate.

RACON signal
RACON station

Your ship position

Echoes on the radar screen Echo description

2.5 Radar Target Enhancer (RTE)

An RTE is a radar transponder mounted on navigation buoys and masts of small crafts
to significantly improve their detection by radar. Unlike a SART or RACON, which are
passive, the RTE receives a radar signal, amplifies it and re-transmits it, with the in-
tention of making the target's signal look larger on a radar display. The RTE is avail-
able in X-band and S-band types.

2-7
2. RADAR OBSERVATION

2.6 Solid state radar

In Solid State radars, long-range and short-range pictures are mixed before they are
displayed on the screen. Due to this mixing process, echoes may be displayed differ-
ently when compared with magnetron radars.

: Short-range
: Long-range

Approx. 0.5 NM to 2 NM
(depending on the pulse length)

Range and signal intensity

At long-range, even though the Solid State radar has lower transmission power than
magnetron radars, the signal intensity is equivalent.

At short-range on the other hand, due to the lower transmission power the signal in-
tensity of closer targets (including sea clutter and rain clutter) is reduced.

For this reason, when a long-range target enters short-range the signal intensity ap-
pears weaker.

False echoes fore and aft of the target

At long-range, echoes with a strong reflection may appear with a false echo to their
fore and aft. When the target changes direction, the reflection may weaken, causing
the false echoes to disappear. You can also reduce the false echoes in these cases
by reducing the gain.

False echoes Echo

2-8
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.1 Precautions when Using Target Tracking

WARNING
WARNIN CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied The plotting accuracy and response of
upon for the safety of vessel and crew. this TT meets IMO standards. Tracking
The navigator has the responsibility to accuracy is affected by the following:
check all aids available to confirm Tracking accuracy is affected by course
position. Electronic aids are not a change. One to two minutes is required to
substitute for basic navigational restore vectors to full accuracy after an
principles and common sense. abrupt course change. (The actual amount
depends on gyrocompass specifications.)
This TT automatically tracks automatically or
The amount of tracking delay is inversely
manually acquired radar targets and
proportional to the relative speed of the
calculates their courses and speeds,
target. Delay is on the order of 15 - 30
indicating them by vectors. Since the data
seconds for high relative speed; 30 - 60
generated by the auto plotter are based on
seconds for low relative speed.
what radar targets are selected, the radar
must always be optimally tuned for use with The target tracking and pertinent vector
the auto plotter, to ensure required targets calculation accuracy is influenced by the
will not be lost or unwanted targets such as following:
sea returns and noise will not be acquired - Echo intensity
and tracked. - The range measurement accuracy;
characterized by both random and biased
A target does not always mean a land-mass, measurement errors.
reef, ships or other surface vessels but can - The angular measurement accuracy;
imply returns from sea surface and clutter. characterized by beam shape, target glint
As the level of clutter changes with and bias errors.
environment, the operator should properly - Radar transmission pulsewidth
adjust the [A/C SEA], [A/C RAIN] and [GAIN] - Gyrocompass heading error
controls to be sure target echoes are not - Speed log error
eliminated from the radar screen. - Curent and wind (set & drift)
- Course change (own ship and target)

The data generated by TT, AIS and

video plotter are intended for
reference only.
Refer to official nautical charts for detailed and
up-to-date information.

3-1
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.2 TT Controls
The control unit has three keys that are used in the target tracking mode. The keys are
indicated in the figure below.

BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN

OFF ON OFF ON

1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE

4 5 6
F1 F2 OFF CU/TM INDEX MENU ACQ
CENTER RESET LINE

F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 TARGET
CANCEL ENTER
ACK TX TRAILS BRILL MARK
- CANCEL

TT/AIS keys

• ACQ: Acquires the selected echo as a target.

• TARGET DATA: Shows the selected target’s data in the information box.
• TARGET CANCEL: Deactivates tracking for the cursor-selected target.
These functions, along with other TT functions, can also be accessed from the [CUR-
SOR] menu (See section 1.7).

3.3 TT Box Overview

1 2

OFF 5

No. Indication name Description/remarks

1 TT acquisition mode Shows current TT mode (AUTO, AUTO/MAN, MAN).
2 Vector time Adjusts the vector time for the selected target.
3 Vector reference True, Relative referencing for this target’s vector.
4 Past position time Sets the interval for the target’s trail.
5 Lost TGT Alert Displays/hides the alert when a target is lost.

3-2
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.4 How to Select the TT mode

This radar can automatically acquire and track a maximum of 100 targets.

The number of automatically and manually acquired targets is determined by the set-
ting for [TT SELECT] in the [TT] menu.

A target just acquired automatically is marked with a dashed circle and a vector ap-
pears within one minute to indicate the target's motion trend. Within three minutes, the
initial tracking stage is finished and the target becomes ready for stable tracking. At
this time, the dashed circle changes to a solid circle.

3.4.1 How to enable auto acquisition

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [6 TT].
4. Select [2 TT SELECT], then select the acquisition
condition.

Menu setting Acquisition condition

[MANUAL 100] 100 targets manually,
Not available for auto
acquisition

[MANUAL 75 • AUTO 25] 25 targets automatically,

75 targets manually

[MANUAL 50 • AUTO 50] 50 targets automatically,

50 targets manually

[MANUAL 25 • AUTO 75] 75 targets automatically,

25 targets manually

[AUTO 100] 100 targets automatically,

Not available for manual
acquisition [5 TARGET NAME FUNCTION]
and
[6 TARGET NAME PRESETS]
are shown for B-types only.
5. Close the menu.
Note 1: When connecting with the FAR-15xx series radar, the maximum number of ac-
quired targets ([NUMBER OF TT]) should be set to 100 in the [RADAR INSTALLA-
TION] menu. Only a qualified technician can set the [RADAR INSTALLATION] menu.
Contact your dealer.
Note 2: The TT indication in the TT/AIS setting box shows [AUTO], [MAN/AUTO] or
[MAN] depending on the acquisition condition selected.
Note 3: When the menu-set number of automatically acquired targets have been ac-
quired, the Alert "TT TARGET FULL(AUTO)" appears in the [Alert] box.

3-3
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.5 How to Acquire and Track Targets

Place the cursor on the TT acquisition mode indicator, then press the left button. The
indication changes, depending on the TT mode selected (See section 3.4.1). The ta-
ble below shows the indication changes based on mode selection.

TT mode selected Indication change

[MANUAL 100] "TT OFF" o "TT MAN" o "TT OFF"...
[MANUAL 75 • AUTO 25] "TT OFF" o "TT MAN/AUTO" o "TT OFF"...
[MANUAL 50 • AUTO 50] "TT OFF" o "TT MAN/AUTO" o "TT OFF"...
[MANUAL 25 • AUTO 75] "TT OFF" o "TT MAN/AUTO" o "TT OFF"...
[AUTO 100] "TT OFF" o "TT AUTO" o "TT OFF"...

3.5.1 How to manually acquire a target

Acquire a target from the Control Unit (RCU-014)
Use the trackball to place the cursor on the target you want to acquire, then press the
ACQ key.

Acquire a target by the trackball module

1. When the target to acquire and the AIS symbol overlap one another, right-click the
operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU] then select [TT TARGET
DATA/ACQ] to acquire the target.
2. Place the cursor on the target to acquire then left-click.
The plotting symbol is drawn by a dashed circle during the initial acquisition stage. A
vector appears approximately one minute after acquisition. The vector indicates the
motion trend of the target. If the target is consistently detected for three minutes, the
plotting symbol changes to a solid circle. If acquisition fails, the target symbol blinks.

Vector

At acquisition Within 1 min. after acquisition Stable tracking

Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target should be within 24 NM (or 32 NM, de-
pending on initial setting) from own ship and not obscured by sea or rain clutter.
Note 2: You are alerted when the capacity of manual acquisition is 95% and 100%.
These alerts are "TT TARGET95%(MAN)" and "TT TARGET FULL(MAN)". If the capac-
ity is 100% you cannot acquire more targets. Cancel tracking of non-threatening targets
if you wish to acquire additional targets manually.
Note 3: When a target being tracked nears another target being tracked, the targets
may be "swapped". When two targets acquired either automatically or manually come
close to each other, one of the two may become a lost target. If this occurs, manual re-
acquisition of the lost target may be necessary after the two have separated.
Note 4: You can reuse a target number. This is useful when you acquire the “wrong”
target. Drag and drop the symbol onto the correct target.

3.5.2 How to automatically acquire targets

Targets are automatically acquired when the TT mode is set to other than [MANUAL
100] and a target enters the acquisition zone (see section 3.16). The maximum track-
ing distance (24 NM or 32 NM) is set at installation.

3-4
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.6 How to Enter Own Ship Speed

The TT requires own ship's speed and heading data. The speed can be STW, SOG
or echo-referenced speed (based on 3 max. stationary objects). Manual input is also
possible. For automatic or manual input, see section 1.12. For echo-referenced speed
input follow the procedure below.

3.6.1 Echo-referenced speed input

The use of echo-referenced speed is recommended when:

• The speed log is not operating properly or not connected to the radar.
• The vessel has no device (doppler sonar, speed log, etc.) that can measure ship's
bow-stern, port-starboard movement.
If you select echo-referenced speed, the TT calculates own ship's speed relative to a
fixed reference target. The number of targets may be R1, R2 or R3. When a plural of
objects are selected, the mean value is used, for stabilization and speed.

1. Right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU].

2. Select [REF MARK]. The cursor is highlighted to indicate that the reference mark
function is active.
3. Place the cursor on a fixed echo (such as an island, etc.) at a range of 0.1 to 24
NM from own ship, to be used as a reference, then left-click. The cursor changes
from the highlighted cross to a circle with dashed lines, indicating that the refer-
ence location is now set. See section 3.9 for more information on TT symbols and
their attributes.

At acquisition Stable tracking

The dashed lines of the reference point change to a solid line over time, as shown
in the figure above.
4. Repeat step 3 until to place up to three reference points.
5. Right-click to deactivate the reference mark func-
tion.
6. Right-click the [SPD] indication at the top-right of
the screen to show the [SPEED] menu.
7. Select [2 SHIP SPEED].
8. Select [REF].
9. Close the menu.
It takes approximately one minute for the speed
to appear in the own ship information box. When
the speed appears, the indication "REF BT" also
appears to the right of the speed value.

3-5
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Notes on speed input by reference target

• Reference targets are only used for the calculation of true speed.
• Do not use reference target generated true speed to calculate relative speed.
Relative speed data is not accurate because response to speed change is slow,
hampering the TT's ability to accurately judge the possibility of collision.
• Select a stationary target as a reference target to calculate own ship speed as
ground tracking speed. Do not choose a moving target as a reference target. A mov-
ing target produces error in the vector for TT and AIS, which results in wrong colli-
sion avoidance information. Further, an unstable stationary target produces
inaccurate speed data and the target itself may become lost.
• On IMO-type radars with AIS in use, echo-referenced speed is shown in gray to in-
dicate they are not available for selection.
• When a reference target is lost or goes out of the acquisition range, that reference
target mark blinks and the indication "REF TARGET LOST" appears in the alert box.
If all reference targets are lost, the speed indication reads "*.*" Select a different ref-
erence target if currently selected one is lost.
• When all targets are deleted, the reference target mark is also deleted and the tar-
get-based speed becomes invalid. The speed is indicated as "BTREF" where BT
means Bottom Track (speed over ground).
• Reference targets can be marked with a vector.
This can be done with [REF TARGET VECTOR] on the [TT TARGET] menu.
• Loss of reference target will affect the calculation of true speed and true course of
targets. Further, own ship speed will be inaccurate.

How to cancel echo-referenced speed input

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [7 INFORMATION BOX].
3. Select [2 OWN SHIP INFO].
4. Select [3 SPEED]. The [SPEED] menu appears.
5. Select any option, other than [REF], then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

3-6
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.7 How to Cancel Target Tracking

When the number of tracked targets reaches maximum capacity, the alert box shows
[TT TARGET FULL (MAN)] or [TT TARGET FULL (AUTO)], based on the selected TT
mode. No new targets can be acquired until a tracked target is lost or tracking is can-
celed. When this occurs, cancel tracking for non-dangerous targets as required.

3.7.1 How to cancel tracking for individual TT targets

Using the control unit (RCU-014)
1. Place the cursor on the tracked target, or tracked target’s data, to cancel.
2. Press the TARGET CANCEL key.

Using the CURSOR menu

Note: This methods requires [TGT CANCEL SETTING] in the second page of the
[CURSOR MENU] to be set as [ANY] or [TT ONLY].
1. Right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU].
2. Select [TARGET CANCEL], then left-click.
3. Select the tracked target to cancel, then left-click.
4. Right-click to complete the procedure.

3.7.2 How to cancel tracking for all TT targets

Using the control unit (RCU-014)
Press and hold the TARGET CANCEL key.

Using the menu

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [6 TT].
4. Select [3 ALL CANCEL].
5. Select [YES] to cancel tracking for all TT targets.
6. Close the menu.

3-7
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.8 Lost Target

Targets not detected in nine consecutive scans become “lost targets”. A lost target is
shown in the display with a flashing red "u". Flashing stops after lost target alert is ac-
knowledged. Further, the alert box shows the indication "TT TARGET LOST" in or-
ange characters and the audible alert sounds. The symbol disappears when the alert
is acknowledged.

If you are in an area where tracked targets are lost frequently, you may want to disable
the lost target alert against tracked targets by maximum range.

3.8.1 How to set the lost target filter

You can set the lost target alert to sound against lost targets that are within a specific
range. To set the criteria, use the procedure below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [6 TT].
4. Select [7 TT LOST TGT FILTER].
5. Select [MAX RANGE].
6. Select [ON]. The settings can now be adjusted.
7. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the setting as required,
then left-click to apply the setting.
8. Close the menu.
Note: Reference targets are not affected by this filter.

3.8.2 How to enable/disable the lost target alert

The [LOST TARGET] box, located at the bottom-right corner of the screen, enables
and disables the lost target alert.

Select the box with the cursor, then left-click to cycle through the settings in the follow-
ing order: [OFF] o [FILT] o [ALL] o [OFF]...

OFF Lost target

filter setting

• [OFF]: Disable the alert.

• [FILT]: Enable the alert for all lost targets, excluding filtered targets.
• [ALL]: Enable the alert for all lost targets, including filtered targets.

3-8
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.9 TT Symbols and Attributes

3.9.1 TT symbols

Item Symbol Status Remarks

Automatically Initial stage Broken circle around an echo to indicate
acquired target that the target is under acquisition and initial
symbols shown. stage of tracking, before steady-state
tracking.
For manually
acquired Within one minute after acquisition (vector
targets, the still inreliable).
width of the line Steady tracking Solid circle with vector indicating steady
for “steady state tracking (within three minutes after
tracking” TT is acquisition.)
thicker than that
of the CPA alarm Plotting symbol (red) flashes to indicate the
automatically target is predicted to come into CPA or
(flashing) TCPA.
acquired
targets. CPA alarm Shown in red, and flashing stops after
acknowledge CPA/TCPA alarm is acknowledged.
Lost target A red “X” is crossed through the TT symbol
to indicate that it is a lost target. Flashing
stops after lost target is acknowledged.
(flashing)

Acquisition On target passing Symbol is red and flashing.

zone through operator-set
acquisition zone
(flashing)
Target selected On selected target Target data (range, bearing, course, speed,
for data readout CPA, TCPA, BCR, BCT, etc.) displayed in
information box.
Reference On reference target Used to calculate own ship’s
target R over-the-ground speed (echo-referenced
After three speed) for ground stabilization.
minutes,
changes to
R

3.9.2 How to select a TT symbol (B-type only)

In addition to the "standard" circle TT symbol, you may select from the symbols shown
below, using the full keyboard. This cannot be done with trackball-type control unit
(RCU-015, RCU-016). However, you can program a function key to do so: assign the
function key the [TARGET DATA] function from the [STD KEY] category. For function
key setup, see section 1.9.

To change the TT symbol, place the cursor on the TT symbol you want to change, then
press the [TARGET DATA] function key to cycle through the symbols.

3-9
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.9.3 How to adjust symbol brilliance

1. Place the cursor on the [PLTx] (“x” indicates the current color palette in use) indi-
cation inside the [BRILL] box, then right-click. The [BRILL] menu appears.
2. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next
menu page.
3. Select [7 TT SYMBOLS]. The settings
are highlighted and can now be ad-
justed.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select the de-
Spin the
sired brilliance, then left-click to apply scrollwheel
the setting. to adjust the
brilliance.
5. Close the menu.

3.9.4 How to set the symbol color

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [4 TT•AIS SYMBOL].
4. Select [2 TT•AIS SYMBOL COLOR]. The settings
can now be adjusted.
5. Select the appropriate color, then left-click.
6. Close the menu.

3.10 How to Display/Remove Target Data

The TT mode provides the full functionality of TT as required by the IMO Resolution
A.823(19) and IEC 62288, including display of range, bearing, course, speed, CPA
and TCPA of all tracked targets.

The target bearing is shown in relative bearing in the HEAD UP mode and true bearing
in the COURSE UP, NORTH UP and True Motion modes, with the suffix "R" (Relative)
or "T" (True).

The target speed and course are shown as speed over the ground or speed through
the water depending on speed source.

3.10.1 TT pop up information

The TT pop-up shows abbreviated TT data (target no., COG, SOG, CPA and TCPA)
for the selected TT. Simply put the cursor on the TT symbol to show the pop-up. The
popup can be enabled or disabled with [7 TT POP-UP INFO] in the [TT•AIS SYMBOL]
menu.

3-10
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.10.2 How to display target data

Place the cursor on a desired tracked target and press the ACQ key. The target’s
shape changes to a square and the selected TT target’s data is shown in the data dis-
play area.

Indication Description
BRG Bearing from own ship to target in relative (R) or
True (T) reference.
RNG Range from own ship to target. Target Target
T COG Relative (R) or True (T) Course Over Ground of number name*
target.
001 TEST1 002
Displayed as "T CTW" where speed input is set to
[LOG(WT)].
Displayed as "R CRS" where speed data is not
available.
T SOG Relative (R) or True (T) Speed Over Ground of
target.
Displayed as T STW where speed input is set to
[LOG(WT)].
Displayed as R SPD where speed data is not
available. *: Target name is shown for
B-types only and requires the
CPA Closest Point of Approach of target to own ship. [TARGET NAME FUNCTION] in
TCPA Time to CPA of target to own ship. the [TT] menu to be set to [ON].
BCR Bow crossing range of target.
BCT Bow crossing time of target.
You can display the target data for up to six targets in 2 columns with 3 sets of target
data per row.
If your display unit is a MU-270W, you can show up to 9 targets’ data in 3 columns with
3 sets of target data per row.

3.10.3 How to remove target data

Place the cursor on a desired tracked target and press the TARGET CANCEL key.
The select target’s data is removed from the data display area.

3-11
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.10.4 How to display, hide and sort the target list

The target list provides a comprehensive data display of all TT (and AIS) targets being
tracked.

How to display/hide the target list

Select the [TGT LIST] menu item at the bottom-right of the screen, then left-click. The
target list appears inside the information box.

How to sort the target list

1. With the target list displayed, place the cursor on the sorting method indication to
the right of [SORT] ("CPA" in the example below). The indication is highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the sort method, referring to the table below, then
left-click.
Sort
Description
method
[CPA] Targets are sorted in order from
TARGET LIST (1/1) closest to farthest CPA.
Sorting method SORT CPA [TCPA] Targets are sorted in order from
Filter method FILTER TT ONLY shortest to longest TCPA.
1 BACK(L=TOP)
[BCR] Targets are sorted in order from
2 TT NO.23
closest to farthest BCR.
BRG 085.1°R RNG 2.377NM
CPA 2.355NM TCPA 00:05 [BCT] Targets are sorted in order from
Target details
3 TT NO.38 shortest to longest BCT.
BRG 095.1°R RNG 3.377NM [RANGE] Targets are sorted in order from
CPA 3.355NM TCPA 00:10 closest to farthest range.
[SPEED] Targets are sorted in order from
fastest to slowest.
[NAME] Targets are sorted in Alphabet-
ical order. Unknown names are
displayed last.
Filter Description
method
[TT Show only TT targets.
ONLY]
[AIS Show only AIS targets.
ONLY]
[DISP Show only filtered targets.
FILTER]
9 REFRESH DATA [ALL Show all targets (ignore filter
0 NEXT TGT] settings).

3. Set the filter method in the same manner.

4. Close the menu.
Note: Targets with no data are sorted to the back of the list, regardless of filter setting.

3-12
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.11 How to Assign a Preset Name to TT Targets (B-

type only)
You can assign a preset name to TT targets, which is displayed alongside the TT num-
ber in the target list.

3.11.1 How to activate the preset name function

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [6 TT].
4. Select [5 TARGET NAME FUNCTION].
5. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key.

3.11.2 How to setup preset names

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [6 TT].
4. Select [6 TARGET NAME
PRESETS].
5. Select the appropriate
preset.
The software keyboard
appears.
Select [0 NEXT] to
6. Referring to section 1.5.2, show page 2.
set the preset name. A
maximum of six characters may be used for the preset name.
7. Close the menu.

3-13
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.11.3 How to assign a name to a TT

1. Referring to section 3.11.1, activate the preset name function.
2. Referring to section 3.10.2, show the target’s data in the data display area.
3. Place the cursor on the target data, then press the left button.
The [TARGET NAME] menu appears.

TARGET NAME
1 BACK
2 TARGET NAME

3 PRESET LIST
TEST1

Preset names are listed below [3 PRESET LIST]. In the above example, the name
"TEST1" is set as a preset name.
4. Select a name from [3 PRESET LIST], or select [2 TARGET NAME] to assign a
different name to the target.
If you select [2 TARGET NAME], the software keyboard appears. Enter a name
for the target, then select [END].
The selected name (preset or manual input) appears at [2 TARGET NAME] and
is also applied to the on-screen target.
5. Close the menu.
Note 1: When a name is assigned to a target, the numerical on-screen indication is
replaced with the assigned name, as shown in the example figure below.

TEST1

To view the named target’s TT number, show the target data in the data display area.
Note 2: The same name can be assigned to multiple targets.

3-14
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.12 Vector Modes

Target vectors can be displayed relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or North
(True).

Note: IMO recommends the use of true vector mode in sea stabilization or relative
vector mode for collision avoidance.
To change the vector mode, do the following:
Place the cursor on the vector reference indication in the [Vector] box, then left-click
to cycle through the following settings.
[REL] o [TRUE-G/TRUE-S] o [REL]...

3.12.1 Description of vectors

Stabilization modes
It is important to select the optimum stabilization mode for the radar display. To assess
risk of collision the relative motion of a target gives the clearest indication of CPA and
may be monitored by observing either the direction of the target's relative trail, or the
CPA predicted by the relative vector. By default, relative motion displays relative target
trails and true motion displays true target trails. Where true target trails is selected, a
sea stabilized display will indicate all targets' motion through the water. A ground sta-
bilized display will indicate all targets' motion over the ground.

In coastal, estuarine and river waters where a significant set and drift may be experi-
enced, a sea stabilized display will produce significant target trails from all fixed (sta-
tionary) objects possibly producing an unacceptably high level of clutter and masking.
In such circumstances a ground stabilized display may reduce its effect and enable
the observer to detect clearly the trails of moving targets, thus enhancing the observ-
er's situational awareness.

However, the display should be considered only as an approximation of the course

and speed made good over the ground. Among other factors, the accuracy of the
ground-stabilization is affected by inaccuracies in speed and heading inputs as well
as radar measurement imprecision and will require the display to be readjusted peri-
odically. The information displayed should be interpreted with due regard to these fac-
tors.
Note: It should be noted that in determining a target's aspect by radar; the calculation
of its true track is dependent on the choice and accuracy of the own ship's course and
speed input. A ground-stabilized target plot may accurately calculate the ground track
of the target, but the target's heading may be significantly different from its track when
experiencing set, drift or leeway. Similarly, a sea stabilized target plot may be inaccu-
rate when own ship and the target, are experiencing different rates of set, drift or lee-
way.

3-15
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Ground stabilization and sea stabilization

Target vectors can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized in the True Motion mode. To
select speed over the ground or speed through the water data, open the page from the
menu. Select for ground stabilization or for sea stabilization. The vector mode indica-
tion shows the stabilization mode in the true motion as [TRUE-G] or [TRUE-S].

Sea stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced to the sea
using a compass heading and single-axis log water speed inputs in the true motion
mode. Ground stabilization is a mode where own ship and all targets are referenced
to the ground using the ground track or set and drift inputs. If the accuracy seems un-
satisfactory, enter set and drift corrections. Note that set and drift should not be used
when the radar is displaying AIS targets.

True vector
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets such as land, navigational marks and ships
at anchor remain stationary on the radar screen with vector length zero. But in the
presence of wind and/or current, the vectors appear on fixed targets representing the
reciprocal of set and drift affecting own ship unless set and drift values are properly
entered.

In the true vector mode, there are two types of stabilization: ground stabilization
(TRUE-G) and sea stabilization (TRUE-S). The stabilization mode is automatically se-
lected according to speed selection, as shown in the table below. Manual selection is
available from the [SPD] menu at the top-right of the screen.

Speed selection True vector mode

LOG(WT) TRUE-S
LOG(WTC) TRUE-G
LOG(BT) TRUE-G
EPFS(BT) TRUE-G
REF(BT) TRUE-G
MAN(WT) TRUE-S
MAN(WTC) TRUE-G
Relative vector
Relative vectors on targets that are not moving over the ground such as land, naviga-
tional marks and ships at anchor will represent the reciprocal of own ship's ground
track. A target whose vector passes through own ship is on a collision course. (Dotted
lines in the figure are for explanation only.)

Current
TT TT (Set and drift) TT
Buoy Buoy Buoy

Own Ship Own Ship Own Ship

AIS AIS AIS

True vectors in ground True vectors in sea Relative vectors

stabilization stabilization

3-16
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.12.2 How to change the vector length (time)

The vector time provides an estimation of the target’s vector and can be adjusted as
follows:

Place the cursor on the vector time indication in the [Vector] box, then left-click to cycle
through the following settings.

[6min] o [10min] o [20min] o [30min] o [45min] o [60min] o [30sec] o [1min] o

[3min] o [5min] o [6min]...

The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected vector time
elapses. It can be valuable to extend the vector length to evaluate the risk of collision
with any target.

3.13 Past Position Display

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking the past positions
of any targets being tracked.

A new dot is added every minute (or at other preset time intervals) until the preset
number is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it
changes the course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.
Past position orientation, true or relative, is controlled with [TRAIL MODE] in the
[TRAIL] context menu. To adjust the trail orientation, see section 1.37.1.

3.13.1 How to display past position points and select the plotting in-
terval
Select the [PAST POSN] setting, then left-click to cycle through the following settings.

[OFF] o [30sec] o [1min] o [2min] o [3min] o [6min] o [OFF]...

OFF
PAST POSN
setting
The past positions are displayed in accordance with the selected setting.

3.13.2 How to select the number of past position points to be dis-

played
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [4 TT•AIS SYMBOL].
4. Select [5 TT•AIS PAST POSN POINTS].
5. Select [5] or [10] as appropriate, then press the ADJUST knob.
6. Close the menu.

3-17
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.14 Set and Drift

Set, the direction in which a water current flows, can be manually entered in 0.1-de-
gree steps. Drift, also known as “Rate”, or the speed of the current, can also be en-
tered manually in 0.1-knot steps.

When course through water and speed through water are available, activate set and
drift to get course over ground and speed over ground.

Set and drift corrections are beneficial for increasing the accuracy of vectors and tar-
get data. Refer to the tide table on board the ship for setting information. These values
are applied to all targets. If stationary targets have vectors, set and drift values should
be adjusted until they lose vectors.

To enter set and drift do the following:

1. Select the [SPD] menu box, then right-click. The [SPEED] menu appears.
2. Select [SET DRIFT].
3. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key. The setting can now be adjusted
and [SET] is selected.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate setting (Setting range: 000.0° to
359.9°), then left-click. The [DRIFT] setting is now selected.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate setting (Setting range: 00.0kn to
19.9kn), then left-click.
6. Close the menu.
Note 1: Set and drift are available when using manually input speed, speed through
the water. The speed source is shown as "WTC" (Water Tracking Count).
Note 2: Set and drift should be checked periodically for correctness.
Note 3: When speed data input from the position sensor is valid, set and drift are not
adjustable.

3-18
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.15 Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA)

This radar calculates CPA and TCPA by using own ship and relative target positions.

The TT continuously monitors the pre-

dicted range at the Closest Point of Ap-
proach (CPA) and predicted time to
CAUTION
CPA (TCPA) of each TT. When the pre- CPA/TCPA Alarm
dicted CPA of any TT becomes smaller
The CPA and TCPA alarm feature should
than a preset CPA range and its predict- never be relied upon as the sole means for
ed TCPA less than a preset TCPA limit, detecting the risk of collision.The navigator
the audio alarm sounds and "TT DAN- is not relieved of the responsibility to keep
GER OF COLLISION" appears (in red, visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
flashing) in the Alert Box. In addition, the whether or not the radar or other plotting
aid is in use.
symbol of the offending TT is red and
flashes together with its vector.

This feature, when used correctly, helps prevent the risk of collision by alerting you to
threatening targets. It is important that GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar con-
trols are properly adjusted.

CPA and TCPA ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size, ton-
nage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.

The reference point for CPA and TCPA calculation can be selected from antenna po-
sition or conning position. For further details, see section 1.49.

3.15.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA ranges

CPA and TCPA ranges can be adjusted from the ap- CPA setting
propriate indication in the [TT] box.

1. Left-click the [CPA/TCPA] indication to activate TCPA setting

the feature. Left-click here to activate
CPA/TCPA settings.
2. Place the cursor on the indication you wish to
adjust.
3. Left-click, or spin the scrollwheel, to adjust the settings as required. The settings
options are outlined in the table below.
Indication Method Settings options
CPA Left-click 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (NM)
Scrollwheel 0.1 to 20; 0 to 10 in 0.1 NM increments, 1 NM increments thereafter
TCPA Left-click 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 15 (minutes)
Scrollwheel 1 to 60 minutes in 1-minute increments

3.15.2 How to acknowledge the TT collision alarm

Press the ALARM ACK key on the control unit, or select the [ALERT] box with the
trackball then left-click to acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer. The alert "TT
DANGER OF COLLISION" remains in the Alert Box until the dangerous situation is
gone or you intentionally terminate target tracking. The symbol and vector stop flash-
ing and are displayed in a solid red color.

Note that when the "TT DANGER OF COLLISION" alarm is generated the AIS display
is automatically turned on.

3-19
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.16 Acquisition Zone

The acquisition zone functions both to alert you targets in a specific area and acts as
an automatic acquisition area when automatic target acquisition is active. Any targets
entering the zone will be automatically acquired.

When a target enters an acquisition zone, the buzzer sounds and the indication "TT
NEW TARGET" (or "AIS NEW TARGET") appears (in yellow-orange) in the Alert Box.
The symbol of the offending target is red and flashing. Further, the AIS display is au-
tomatically turned on if it is off.

There are two types of acquisition zones available, arc and polygon, however, AZ1
can only be set as an arc.

Note: The acquisition zones are disabled when the setting for [2 AZ/ALR SELECT] in
the [ACQUISITION ZONE] menu is set to [TARGET ALARM ZONE].

3.16.1 How to enable the acquisition zones

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [2 ACQUISITION ZONE].
4. Select [2 AZ/ALR SELECT].
5. Select [ACQUISITION ZONE].
6. Close the menu.

3.16.2 How to activate the first acquisition zone (AZ1)

The No. 1 acquisition zone is available between 3 NM and 6 NM The TT/AIS acquisi-
tion zone’s lines are white and dashed so as to distinguish them from the radar target
alarm.

The procedure below shows how to set AZ1, using the example at the bottom of the
page.

1. Place the cursor on the [1:] indication

at the bottom-right of the screen, then
left-click. The cursor moves inside the A 0.5 to 1 NM
operational display area. B
2. Place the cursor on the acquisition
zone starting point (“A” in the figure to Target in acquisition
the right), then left-click. zone is red and flashing
3. Place the cursor on the acquisition
zone end point (“B” in the figure to the
right), then left-click.

3-20
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.16.3 How to set a polygon acquisition zone (AZ2)

The No. 2 acquisition zone can be set anywhere when the No. 1 zone is already in use.

Polygon zones must have at least three points.

To set a polygon shaped acquisition zone:

1. Place the cursor on the [2:] acquisition zone indication at the bottom-right of the
screen, then left-click. The cursor moves inside the operational display area.
2. Place the cursor on the acquisition zone starting point, then left-click.
3. Place the cursor on the second point, then left-click.
4. Repeat step 3 as required to set the remaining points of the polygon zone.
5. Right-click to complete the acquisition zone set up.

Notes on acquisition zones

• If you wish to create an acquisition zone having a 360-degree coverage around own
ship, set point B in almost the same direction (approx. ±3°) as point A.
• The default acquisition zone is fan shaped. It can also be a polygon having 3-10
points.
• If both acquisition zones are displayed, a maximum of four polygon points are
shown.
• TT and AIS are automatically set to TT=AUTO and AIS=DISP, respectively, when
an AZ is activated in the following conditions:
TT : TT=OFF or TT=MANUAL 100
AIS : AIS FUNC=OFF or AIS DISP=OFF

3.16.4 How to sleep/deactivate an acquisition zone

1. Select the appropriate [AZ] box.
2. Sleep, or deactivate, the acquisition zone, as explained below:

Sleeping the acquisition zone

Left-click the box several times until the indication shows "SLEEP".

Deactivating the acquisition zone

Left-click the box until the AZ box becomes blank.
Note: When both zones ([1:] and [2:]) are active, [2:] must be deactivated before
[1:] can be deactivated.
If [1:] and [2:] are active when you try to deactivate [2:], the system releases an
audible alert and shows the message "DELETE AZ2 FIRST".

3.16.5 How to acknowledge the acquisition zone alert

Press the ALARM ACK key on the control unit, or select the [ALERT] box with the
trackball then left-click to acknowledge the alarm and silence the buzzer.

3-21
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.16.6 How to select the target type to acquire

You can set the radar to acquire on TT targets, or both

AIS and TT targets. To select the target type to acquire,
do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [2 ACQUISITION ZONE].
4. Select [3 TARGET TYPE TO ACQUIRE].
5. Select [TT AND AIS] or [TT ONLY] as appropriate.
6. Close the menu.

3.16.7 How to change the acquisition zone reference

The acquisition zone can be referenced to heading or North using the following pro-
cedure:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [2 ACQUISITION ZONE].
4. Select [4 AZ STABILIZATION].
5. Select [STAB HDG] to reference heading, or [STAB NORTH] to reference North,
then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

3.16.8 How to set acquisition zone shape and stabilization

The shape of the No. 2 acquisition zone can be a sector or a polygon having up to 10
points. (The shape of the No.1 acquisition zone is always a sector.)

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [2 ACQUISITION ZONE].
4. Select [5 AZ POLYGON].
5. Select the appropriate setting, then push the ADJUST knob.
Setting Description
[OFF] Acquisition zone is a sector; number of points is limited to four.
Stabilized against land.
[STAB GND] Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against ground.
[STAB HDG] Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against heading.
[STAB NORTH] Polygon having 3-10 points. Stabilized against North.
[AROUND Sets a check area around own ship. See the topic on the follow-
CHECK AREA]* ing page for details and settings.
*: Shown only for B-type.
6. Close the menu.

3-22
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

How to set the check area around own ship (B-type only)
When [5 AZ POLYGON] is set to [AROUND CHECK AREA], the area details must be
set. To setup the check area, do the following procedure. This procedure is abbrevi-
ated, and takes into consideration that [AROUND CHECK AREA] is selected.

1. Select [6 CHECK AREA SETTING].

2. Referring to the figure below, use the number keys to enter a distance for [PORT],
[STBD], [BOW] and [STERN]. You can also spin the scrollwheel, then left-click to
enter these values.

[BOW]
setting

[PORT] Own [STBD]

setting setting
ship

[STERN]
setting

The area shown in gray is the “check area”.

The available setting range for all four values is [0.0NM] to [16.0NM]. The default
setting for all four values is [1.0NM].

3-23
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.17 Trial Maneuvers

The trial maneuver feature simulates the effect of own ship's movement against all
tracked targets, without interrupting the updating of target information. It is available
for use with the TT and AIS functions. For more accurate results, use sea stabilization
(water tracking).

3.17.1 Types of trial maneuvers

There are two types of trial maneuvers: dynamic and static.

Dynamic trial maneuver

A dynamic trial maneuver displays predicted
positions of the tracked targets and own ship.
You enter own ship's intended speed and
course with a certain "delay time." Assuming
that all tracked targets maintain their present
speeds and courses, the targets' and own
Delay time = 2 m 30 s.
ship's future movements are simulated in 0.5-
second increments indicating their predicted
positions in 30-second intervals as illustrated Current position

in the right figure.

The delay time represents the time lag from

the present time to the time when own ship will
actually start to change her speed and/or
course. You should therefore take into consid-
eration own ship's maneuvering characteris-
tics such as rudder delay, turning delay and acceleration delay. This is particularly
important on large vessels. How much the delay is set the situation starts immediately
and ends in a minute.

In the example shown below, own ship will advance straight ahead (even after a ma-
neuver) for a delay time of 2:30 and alters speed and course until operator-specified
intended speed and course are achieved (position OS7 in this example).

3-24
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Static trial maneuver

The static trial maneuver shows the relationship between your ship and tracked tar-
gets at the completion of the trial maneuver. The expected position of TTs at the end
of the trial maneuver are shown on the display.

By shortening and extending the trial time you can find the safe time to make a ma-
neuver. Thus, the static trial maneuver will be convenient when you wish to know the
maneuver result immediately.

Position of target B at end of trial maneuver

Course and speed changes
completed; position where
course and speed are changed

Position of target A at end B

of trial maneuver
Delay time

Current
position

A
T

3.17.2 How to perform a trial maneuver

The settings for the trial maneuver are done from the [TRIAL MANEUVER] menu and
the [TRIAL] box, at the bottom-right of the screen.

[TRIAL] status

[TRIAL MANEUVER] menu [TRIAL] box

The [TRIAL] box is not shown if the trial maneuver function is set to [OFF]. See the
following procedure to turn the function on or off.

The indication also changes, depending on the setting for [2 TRIAL MANEUVER].

For [DYNAMIC], the indication shows "D-TRIAL", for [STATIC], the indication shows
"S-TRIAL".

3-25
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

To set up and perform a trial maneuver, do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [3 TRIAL MANEUVER].
4. Select [2 TRIAL MANEUVER].
5. Select [OFF], [STATIC] or [DYNAMIC] as appropriate, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
6. Select [3 SPEED RATE].
7. Set the speed rate as required.
8. Select [4 TRIAL TURN RATE].
9. Set the turn rate for the trial as required.
Note: Two sets of trial speed and trial turn rate combinations are provided. This
is done to provide accurate trial maneuver results for various ship's speeds and
turn rates.

Setting example for [3 TRIAL SPEED RATE]

5 kn, 0.15 kn/s

10 kn, 0.45 kn/s

0.45 kn/s
Trial speed rate

(Second setting)

0.15 kn/s
(First setting)

5 kn 10 kn
(First setting) (Second setting)

Trial maneuver speed

Setting example for [4 TRIAL TURN RATE]

5 kn, 1.5 °/s

10 kn, 4.5 °/s

4.5 °/s
Trial turn rate

(Second setting)

1.5 °/s
(First setting)

5 kn 10 kn
(First setting) (Second setting)

Trial maneuver speed

10. For B-type radars, select [5 TRIAL TARGET DATA].
Note: The [5 TRIAL TARGET DATA] menu items is not shown for IMO/A/R-types.

3-26
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

11. Select the target data to use for the trial. The available options are: [ACTUAL] and
[TRIAL].
12. Highlight the [TRIAL] status indication in the [TRIAL] box, then left-click. The indi-
cation changes from "OFF" to "SET" and the trial maneuver settings appear.

Trial maneuver course

and reference
Trial
maneuver
speed
Delay time

Note: The initial indications for course and speed are derived from own ship’s cur-
rent course and speed at the time when the trial maneuver set up starts.
13. Select the trial maneuver course and reference indication, then left-click.
14. Spin the scrollwheel to set the course, then left-click.
The reference is not changeable here.
15. Set the speed in the same manner as the course.
16. Select the delay time indication, then left-click.
17. Spin the scrollwheel to set the amount of delay. This is the time after which own
ship takes a new situation, not the time the simulation begins. Change the delay
time according to own ship loading condition, etc.
The time indication depends on trial type:
[DYNAMIC]: The position of your ship and TTs is displayed every 30 seconds and
updating occurs every 0.5 seconds.
[STATIC]: The position of your ship and TTs when set course and speed are
reached are displayed. Put the cursor in the Trial time indication and roll the scroll-
wheel. Increase or decrease the time to get a safe maneuver. If a maneuver is un-
safe, change speed, course and delay until it is safe.
18. Highlight the [TRIAL] status indication, then left-click. The indication changes from
"SET" to show a timer for the trial maneuver and the maneuver begins.
The trial maneuver takes place with the letter "T" displayed at the bottom of the screen.
The time appears at the top-right position on the display. If any TT is predicted to be
on a collision course with own ship (that is, the target ship comes within preset CPA/
TCPA limits), the target plotting symbol flashes. If this happens, change own ship's tri-
al speed, course or delay time to obtain a safe maneuver.

3.17.3 How to stop the trial maneuver

You can stop the maneuver at any time by placing the cursor on the [TRIAL] status
indication, then press and hold the left mouse button until "OFF" is shown.
When [DYNAMIC] is selected as the maneuver type, the maneuver automatically
stops when the trial timer reaches 60 minutes.

3-27
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.18 TT System Messages

There are four main reasons the TT may trigger the audio and visual alerts:

• Collision alarm
• Acquisition zone alert
• Lost target alert
• Target capacity
To acknowledge the alert, press the ALARM ACK key on the control unit, or select the
[ALERT] box with the trackball then press the left button to acknowledge the alert and
silence the buzzer.

Alert message Priority Meaning Action required

TT DANGER OF Alarm A tracked target is on collision Take evasive action or termi-
COLLISION course with your vessel. nate tracking of TT.
TT NEW TAR- Warning Tracked target has entered an ac- Confirm the tracked target, then
GET quisition zone. The tracked tar- press the ALARM ACK key.
get's symbol is red and flashing.
TT TARGET Warning When the system detects a loss of Confirm the lost target, reac-
LOST a tracked target, the lost tracked quire if necessary.
target symbol appears in red and
flashes. At the same time, an au-
dio alert is produced for one sec-
ond. The lost target mark
disappears from the screen after
the lost target alert is acknowl-
edged.
REF TARGET Warning When the system detects a loss of To continue using a referenced
LOST a reference target, the target sym- target for speed input, select an-
bol turns red and flashes. At the other tracked target.
same time, an audio alert is pro-
duced for one second. The refer-
ence target mark disappears from
the screen after the reference tar-
get alarm is acknowledged.
TT TARGET Warning Appears when capacity for auto- To continue acquiring targets,
FULL (AUTO) or matically (manually) acquired tar- cancel tracking for unnecessary
(MAN) gets is full. targets.
TT TARGET 95% Caution Appears when capacity for auto-
(AUTO) or (MAN) matically (manually) tracked tar-
gets is 95% full.

3-28
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.19 TT Simulation Mode

You can simulate the risk of a collision by using the TT simulation mode. This function
can be used for familiarization training for your crew. The simulation can be terminated
at any time by pressing the STBY TX key.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS].
3. Select [7 TESTS].
4. Select [4 TT SIMULATION MODE].
The normal operation is suspended then three simulated targets appear on the dis-
play.

The indication "S" appears at the bottom of the effective display area during the sim-
ulation mode. The simulation may be terminated any time by going to the STBY mode.

Three simulated targets move as the following table. The simulated target is automat-
ically generated with the relative movement in the following table based on own ship's
movement at the start of simulation mode.

Note: If own ship moves after the start of simulation mode, the movement of the sim-
ulated target is not matched with the values in the following table.
Range (R) Bearing (R) Speed (R) Course (R) CPA TCPA
Target 01 9.5 NM 270.0° 20.0 kn 90.0° 0.0 NM 28.5 min
Target 02 1.1 NM 333.0° 10.2 kn 90.2° 1.0 NM 2.9 min
Target 03 9.3 NM 45.0° 19.9 kn 225.1° 0.0 NM 28.0 min

03

02
01

Place the cursor on a target, then press the ACQ key to display the target data.

Acquire the simulated targets after the TT simulation mode is performed. The tracking
state changes from unstable to stable and the vector appears. You can simulate the
movement of each function with changing true/relative vector, stabilization through the
water/over the ground, range or length of vector.

Repeat the check for all targets.

3-29
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

3.20 Criteria for Tracking Target Selection

The FURUNO TT video processor detects targets in midst of noise and discriminates
radar echoes on the basis of their size. Target whose echo measurements are greater
than those of the largest ship in range or tangential extent are usually land and are
displayed only as normal radar video. All smaller ship-sized echoes that are less than
this dimension, are further analyzed and regarded as ships and displayed as small cir-
cles superimposed over the video echo.

When a target is first displayed, it is shown as having zero true speed but develops a
course vector as more information is collected. In accordance with the International
Marine Organization Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (IMO TT) requirements, an indica-
tion of the motion trend should be available within 20 scans of antenna and full vector
accuracy within 60 scans. The FURUNO TTs comply with these requirements.

Acquisition and tracking criteria

A target which is hit by five consecutive radar pulses, is detected as a radar echo.
Manual acquisition is done by designating a detected echo with the trackball.Automat-
ic acquisition is done in the acquisition areas when a target is detected 5-7 times con-
tinuously depending upon the congestion. Tracking is achieved the target is clearly
distinguishable on the display for 5 out of 10 consecutive scans, whether acquired au-
tomatically or manually. Required tracking facilities are available within 0.1-32 nm on
range scales including 3, 6, 12 nm, full plotting information is available within one scan
when the range scale has been changed.

Targets not detected in five consecutive scans become “lost targets”.

Quantization
The entire picture is converted to a digital from called “Quantized Video”. A sweep
range is divided into small segments and each range element is”1” if there is radar
echo return above a threshold level, or “0” if there is no return.

The digital radar signal is then analyzed by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As the an-
tenna scans, if there are five consecutive radar pulses with 1’s indicating an echo
presence at the exact same range, a target “start” is initiated. Since receiver noise is
random, it is not three-bang correlated, and it is filtered out and not classified as an
echo.

The same is true of radar interference. Electronic circuits track both the closet and
most distant edges of the echo. At the end of the scanning of the echo, the discrimi-
nator indicates the measured maximum range extent and total angular extent sub-
tended by the echo. If the echo is larger than a ship-sized echo in range extent and/or
angular width, adjusted as a function of range, it is declared to be a coastline and the
closet edge is put into memory as a map of the area.

This land outline is used to inhibit further acquisition and tracking of ship-sized echoes
beyond the closest coast outline. Five consecutive scans of coastal outline are re-
tained in memory to allow for signal variation. All smaller echoes are declared to be
ship sized and the middle of the leading edge is used to provide precise range and
bearing co-ordinates of each echo on every scan. This range/bearing data is matched
to previous data and analyzed from scan-to-scan for consistency. When it is deter-
mined to be as consistent as a real target, automatic acquisition occurs and tracking
is initiated. Continued tracking and subsequent calculation develop the relative course
and speed of the target.

3-30
 3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

The true course and speed of own ship are computed from own ship's gyro and speed
inputs, and the resulting course and speed of each tracked target is easily computed
by vector summing of the relative motion with own ship’s course and speed. The re-
sulting true or relative vector is displayed for each of the tracked targets. This process
is updated continually for each target on every scan of the radar.

Qualitative description of tracking error

The FURUNO TT's accuracy complies with or exceed IMO standards.

Own ship maneuvers

For slow turns there is no effect. For very high turning rates (greater than 150°/minute,
depending on gyro), there is some influence on all tracked targets that lasts for a min-
ute or two then all tracked targets revert to full accuracy.

Other ship maneuvers

Target ship courses, lag 15 to 30 seconds at high relative speed, or 3 to 6 seconds at
low (near 0) relative speed. It is less accurate during a turn due to lag, but accuracy
recovers quickly.

3.21 Factors Affecting Target Tracking

Sea returns
If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted properly, there is no serious effect because
distant wave clutter, not eliminated by this control, is filtered out by more than one
bang correlation and scan-to-scan matching of data.

Rain and snow

Rain clutter can be acquired and tracked as targets. Adjust the rain clutter control to
suppress the clutter. If it is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided, or switch on the
interference rejector on the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch to manual acqui-
sition. Accuracy can be affected.

Low clouds
Usually no affect. If necessary, adjust the rain clutter control.

Non-synchronous emissions
No effect.

Low gain
Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will result in some targets not being acquired at
long distance. The TT display will be missing on one or more targets that could only
be visible if the radar sensitivity control (GAIN control) were increased.

The setting of the correct radar receiver gain is not critical but the target should be on
the radar PPI and be clearly visible and well defined.

Manual acquisition is done if a target is positively displayed more than once. Automat-
ic acquisition is done when the target is detected 5-7 times continuously.

3-31
3. TARGET TRACKING (TT)

Tracking continues if a return echo is received at least once in nine antenna rotations.
However, the fewer the return echoes the lower the accuracy. If no return echo is re-
ceived within nine antenna rotations the target is declared a lost target.

Second trace echoes

When the radar beam is super refracted, strong echoes may be received at such long
ranges that they appear on a different timebase sweep than the transmitted pulse.
This gives an incorrect range indication. Second- and third-trace echoes can be
tracked if they are consistent enough to meet acquisition and tracking criteria but tar-
get course and speed data will be in error.

Blind and shadow sectors

Radar shadow or blind areas caused by obstructions aboard the ship, for example,
funnels and masts, in the path of the radar beam can result in reduction of radar beam
intensity in that particular direction. This may eliminate the detection of some targets.
The TT system will lose track of targets shortly after they are lost on the radar picture
and if they remain in a blind zone. These targets will however be acquired and tracked
when they pass out of the blind zone and again present normal radar echo. The an-
gular width and bearing of any shadow sector should be determined for their influence
on the radar. In certain cases false echoes in the shadow sector cause the TT system
to acquire, track, and vector them. Shadow sectors should be avoided.

Indirect echoes
A target at close range is usually picked up directly, but it can also be received as re-
flection from a large, flat surface. This will result in the radar presenting two or more
echoes on the display, each at a different range. The TT system can acquire and track
a false echo if it is detected in five consecutive scans. Reduction in radar gain can
eliminate the multiple echoing but care should be taken as range detection also will be
reduced.

Radar interference
If interference is extreme due to another radar operating at close range, spiral "dotting"
and/or false targets may appear momentarily. The interference rejector can clear the
display.

Delay of sensor input

If the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal is too slow, error in target bearing occurs
when own ship turns. To prevent this error, the refresh rate of the gyrocompass signal
must be as indicated in the System Configuration drawings.

3-32
4. AIS OPERATION
An AIS transponder can be connected to this radar to overlay AIS targets on the radar
display. The radar can store up to 1,200 AIS targets in its storage buffer. When this
buffer becomes full of AIS targets, the Alert "AIS CAPACITY FULL" is generated to
alert you to full storage buffer. The storage buffer contains automatic dead reckoning
for all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed Over the Ground (SOG), Course
Over the Ground (COG), Rate Of Turn (ROT) and heading. The storage buffer also
contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA, etc. The CPA and TCPA limits set
for dangerous targets are common for TT and AIS targets.

This radar can activate 50 AIS targets. The Alert "ACTIVE AIS FULL" is generated
when 50 AIS targets are activated.

This radar can display a maximum of 350 AIS targets. The Alert "AIS DISPLAY FULL"
is generated when 350 AIS targets, which includes both activated and sleeping tar-
gets, are displayed.
The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course
of tracked AIS target. The table below shows the IMO standardized reporting rates for
the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the radar defines which AIS targets
are in tracking or lost. When you acknowledge a lost target alert, the corresponding
AIS symbol will be removed from the display.

IMO Lost target

nominal indication
Type of Ship
reporting (reporting
interval interval >)
Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under 3 min 10 min
command” or “moored” or “aground”, and SOG d 3kn
Class A: Navigation status is “anchor” or “not under 10 s 50 s
command” or “moored” or “aground”, and SOG > 3kn
Class A: 0kn d SOG < 14kn 10 s 50 s
Class A: 14kn d SOG d 23kn 6s 30 s
Class A: SOG > 23kn 2s 10 s
Class B: “CS” SOG < 2kn 3 min 10 min
Class B: “CS” SOG t 2kn 30 s 150 s
Class B: “SO” 0 kn d SOG < 2kn 3 min 10 min
Class B: “SO” 2 kn d SOG < 14kn 30 s 150 s
Class B: “SO” 14 kn d SOG d 23kn 15 s 75 s
Class B: “SO” SOG > 23kn 5s 25 s
Class A and Class B: no SOG available N/A 10 min
AIS SAR aircraft 10 s 50 s
AIS aid to navigation 3 min 10 min
AIS base station 10 s 50 s
AIS search and rescue transponder N/A 10 min
An AIS transponder "sees" all ships fitted with an AIS transponder belonging to either
a Class A or Class B AIS. Additionally, the AIS transponder receives messages from
ships and non-ships (AIS SAR aircraft, AIS aid to navigation, AIS base station, and
AIS search and rescue transmitter).

4-1
4. AIS OPERATION

There can be several hundreds or several thousands of AIS targets, and of those only
a few will be significant for your ship. To remove unnecessary AIS targets from the radar
display, the feature "active and sleeping AIS targets" is available. Initially any new AIS
target received by an AIS transponder is not active (="sleeping"). Such sleeping targets
are shown with a small triangle. The operator can pick any AIS target and change it from
sleeping to active. Active AIS targets are shown with a large triangle with speed vector,
headline, ROT indicator, etc. Further, the operator can pick active AIS targets and
change their status to sleeping.

An indication of AIS target activated capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
When 95% of 50 targets are activated, the Alert "ACTIVE AIS 95%" appears. When 50
targets are activated, the Alert "ACTIVE AIS FULL" appears. Sleep any unnecessary
AIS targets to allow acquisition of new targets.
An indication of AIS target display capacity limit is given well before it is reached. When
95% of 350 targets are displayed, the Alert "AIS DISPLAY 95%" appears. When 350
targets are displayed, the Alert "AIS DISPLAY FULL" appears.
An indication of AIS target processing capacity limit is given well before it is reached.
The Alert "AIS CAPACITY FULL" appears when 1,200 targets are in the storage buffer.
When capacity-related AIS alerts occur, you can reduce the number of AIS targets to
display from [AIS DISP FILTER] in the [AIS] menu. See section 4.5.

This radar generates AIS-related alerts. These are Alert "AIS DANGER OF COLLI-
SION" and Alert "AIS TARGET LOST". Only active AIS targets generate alerts. The op-
erator can activate or sleep AIS target alerts as desired. The feature "active and
sleeping AIS targets" is very effective for focusing on only those AIS targets that need
supervision. This radar further eases the task of the operator by automatically changing
non-active targets to active targets, if their CPA and TCPA are within a preset limit.

4.1 Controls for AIS

The control unit has three keys that are used in the AIS mode. The keys are indicated
in the figure below.

BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN

OFF ON OFF ON

1 2 3
EBL HL EBL VRM
OFF OFFSET MODE

4 5 6
F1 F2 OFF CU/TM INDEX MENU ACQ
CENTER RESET LINE

F3 F4
7
VECTOR
8
VECTOR
9
TARGET
+ TARGET
DATA
TIME MODE LIST
RANGE
ALARM STBY 0 TARGET
CANCEL ENTER
ACK TX TRAILS BRILL MARK
- CANCEL

TT/AIS keys

• ACQ: No function of AIS. Acquires selected target as a TT target.

• TARGET DATA: Shows the selected target’s data in the information box. If the tar-
get is sleeping, activates the target.
• TARGET CANCEL: Sleeps the cursor-selected target.
These functions, along with other AIS functions, can also be accessed from the [CUR-
SOR] menu (See section 1.7).

4-2
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.2 AIS Box Overview

1 2

3
4
5
6 OFF
7 8

No. Indication name Description/remarks

1 Association indication Shows the association setting. See section 4.15 for
details.
2 AIS mode setting Shows the current filter setting for AIS target display.
• [FUNC OFF]: AIS display is disabled.
• [DISP OFF]: AIS symbols are hidden.
• [DISP FILT]: Only filtered AIS targets are displayed.
• [DISP ALL]: All AIS symbols are displayed.
3 [VECTOR] • Adjusts the vector time for the selected target.
• True, Relative referencing for this target’s vector.
See section 3.12 for details.
4 [CPA/TCPA] Adjusts the CPA/TCPA settings.
5 [AIS CPA] Adjusts the AIS auto activate settings.
6 [LOST TGT] Adjusts the settings for lost targets and related alerts.
7 [PAST POSN] Adjusts the setting for past position tracks. See
section 3.13 fro details.
8 Trail mode Changes the trail mode in use. See section 1.37 for
details.
9 Trail stabilization Shows the stabilization reference for trails. See
section 1.37.7 for details.

4.3 How to Show/Hide the AIS Display

Targets that are being tracked by an AIS transponder can also be displayed on the
display. Click the AIS mode indication to select [DISP OFF], [DISP FILT] or [DISP
ALL].

[DISP OFF]: Turn off the AIS display. (Tracking continues internally.)
[DISP FILT]: Filter AIS targets according to the settings of the AIS target filter. The fil-
ter is not set by default. To set the filter, see section 4.5.

[DISP ALL]: Display all AIS targets.

4-3
4. AIS OPERATION

4.4 AIS Symbols and Their Meanings

When the AIS is active, AIS targets are marked with the appropriate AIS symbol, as
shown in the table below.

SYMBOL STATUS REMARKS

Activated All AIS symbols shown with thick line.
target Color is selectable from menu.

ROT higher Displayed for turning ship.

than preset
ROT

Dangerous Displayed when CPA/TCPA is within CPA/TCPA limit.

target Red in color. Flashing until acknowledged.

Lost target “X” overlaid on a lost target.

Red in color. Erased after acknowledged.

Sleeping target Indicates the presence of a target equipped with AIS.

Color is selectable from menu.

Target with A target with neither a reported heading nor COG is oriented
neither a toward the top of the operational display area. The symbol is
reported shown with a solid line.
heading nor a
COG

Target selected Broken square is overlaid on target selected to display its data.
for data display A, B or C shown to indicate data box location at right side of the
screen.
A

Scaled symbol Symbol shape is based on antenna location, ship length and ship
width. Size changes depending on range from own ship.

Note 1: The equipment continues to process AIS targets when the AIS feature is de-
activated. When the AIS is activated again, symbols are immediately displayed.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased and the screen is redrawn after the
heading is changed in the HEAD UP mode.
Note 3: When no AIS data is received, the message "AIS COM ERROR" appears in
the Alert Box. Check the AIS transponder.
Note 4: Physical and virtual AIS AtoN symbols that may appear are listed on the fol-
lowing page.

4-4
 4. AIS OPERATION

AIS Physical AIS Virtual

AtoN Symbol AtoN Symbol Meaning

Basic shape

RACON

Emergency wreck mark

North cardinal mark

East cardinal mark

South cardinal mark

West cardinal mark

Port hand mark

Starboard hand mark

Isolated danger

Safe water

Special mark

Off position (Displayed with yellow

line and yellow text)

Light fail or at reduced range

(Displayed with yellow text)

RACON error
(Displayed with yellow text)

Missing
(Displayed with yellow dashed
line and yellow text)

Note 5: Other AIS symbols that may appear are shown in the table below.
Symbol Meaning
Other AIS symbols (from left, AIS SART (ACTIVE), AIS
SART (TEST), AIS Base station, AIS search and rescue
(SAR) Aircraft, AIS Search and Rescue (SAR) Vessel.)
shown in red when active

Note 6: The CPA and TCPA of SAR aircraft data are not available and are shown as
***.

4-5
4. AIS OPERATION

4.5 How to Use the AIS Display Filter

If there are too many AIS targets on the screen you may wish to remove unnecessary
ones. You can remove sleeping targets class A/B by distance from own ship, speed
and class. For example, you might want to remove slow moving targets, as they nor-
mally do not require close monitoring.
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
5. Select [2 AIS DISP FILTER].
6. Referring to the table below, select the appropriate filter, then press the ENTER
MARK key.
Filter type Definition
[MAX RANGE] Any sleeping AIS targets class A/B beyond the range
set here will not be shown.
[MIN SHIP SPEED] Any sleeping AIS targets class A/B slower than this set-
ting will not be shown.
[EXCEPT CLASS B]* Select [ON] to remove sleeping AIS targets class B.
[EXCEPT BASE STATION] Select [ON] to remove the BASE STATION symbol.
[EXCEPT PHYSICAL ATON] Select [ON] to remove the AIS PHYSICAL ATON sym-
bol.
[EXCEPT VIRTUAL ATON] Select [ON] to remove the AIS VIRTUAL ATON symbol.
*: This menu item appears only on B-type radars.
7. Selected filter’s options, then press the ENTER MARK key.
8. Close the menu.
9. Select the [AIS] box, then left-click to display "DISP FILT" in the [AIS] box.
Note: This function is not available for an activated target.

4-6
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.6 How to Activate AIS Targets

When you convert a sleeping target to an activated target, that target’s course and
speed are shown with a vector. You can easily judge target movement by monitoring
the vector.

Sleeping targets within an acquisition zone are automatically changed to activated tar-
gets and are colored red. See section 3.16 for how to use acquisition zones.

4.6.1 How to activate specific targets manually

Place the cursor on the target you wish to activate for AIS tracking, then press the left
button.

SOG (Speed Over Ground) and COG

(Course Over Ground) vector *1
Turning direction (ROT)

*1
Vector shows STW (Speed Thru Heading line *2
Water) and CTW (Course Thru
*2
Water) when water tracking mode is If there is no heading data available,
selected at the radar. the heading line is not displayed.

4.6.2 How to enable/disable the AIS auto activate function

Use the [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] box at the bottom right corner to enable or disable
the AIS auto activate function.

CPA auto-activate
OFF setting

1. Place the cursor on the [CPA AUTO ACTIVATE] box, then left-click display to cy-
cle through the auto activate settings.
Filter type Definition
[OFF] Disable the AIS auto activate function.
[AUTO ACT FILT] Activation against AIS targets which meet the following criteria:
• AIS target that meets the criteria set with [CPA AUTO ACTI-
VATE] on the [TT•AIS] menu.
• CPA or TCPA of an AIS target is smaller than that set in section
section 3.15.
[AUTO ACT ALL] Activation against AIS targets whose CPA or TCPA is less than
set in section 3.15

4-7
4. AIS OPERATION

4.6.3 How to limit the functions of the AIS auto activate function
You can limit the function of the AIS auto activate function by distance from own ship,
ship's speed, ship class, and ship's length.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [9 CPA AUTO
ACTIVATE].
The [CPA AUTO AC-
TIVATE] menu ap-
pears.

5. Referring to the table below, select the appropriate filter, then left-click.
Filter type Definition
[MAX RANGE] Any AIS targets beyond the range set here will not be automat-
ically activated.
[MIN SHIP SPEED] Any AIS targets slower than this setting will not be automatical-
ly activated.
[EXCEPT CLASS B] Select [ON] to prevent activation of AIS targets class B.
6. Spin the scrollwheel to set the selected filter’s options, then left-click.
7. Close the menu.

4.7 How to Sleep AIS Targets

4.7.1 How to sleep individual AIS targets

You can “sleep” an AIS target as below when the screen becomes filled with targets,
which might prevent important radar and AIS displays from being identified.

Note: Targets that have been activated automatically and dangerous targets cannot
be “slept”.
1. Place the cursor on the target to be slept, then press the TARGET CANCEL key.
The symbol for the slept target changes as indicated in the table in section 4.4.

4.7.2 How to sleep all AIS targets

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [2 SLEEP ALL TGTS].
5. Select [YES] or [NO] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

4-8
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.8 How to Set Up For a Voyage

At the start of a voyage, following five items must be input from the [VOYAGE DATA]
menu: navigational status, ETA, destination, draught and crew.

4.8.1 How to access the [VOYAGE DATA] menu

There are two methods by which you can access the [VOYAGE DATA] menu: from
the InstantAccess bar™, or from the menu. The following procedure shows the menu
method. If you click the [OWN AIS] button on the lower half of the InstantAccess bar™,
skip to step 5 in the below procedure.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [6 VOYAGE DATA].
5. Select [2 NAV STATUS], then push the ADJUST
knob.

6. Spin the scrollwheel to select the navigation status number, then left-click.
Nav Status
Meaning
No.
00 UNDERWAY USING ENGINE
01 AT ANCHOR
02 NOT UNDER COMMAND
03 RESTRICTED MANEUVERABILITY
04 CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT
05 MOORED (DEFAULT)
06 AGROUND
07 ENGAGED IN FISHING
08 UNDER WAY SAILING
09 RESERVED FOR HIGH SPEED CRAFT (HSC)
10 RESERVED FOR WING IN GROUND
(WIG, FOR EXAMPLE, HYDROFOIL)
11 POWER-DRIVEN VESSEL (AHEAD/ASTERN)
12 POWER-DRIVEN VESSEL (AHEAD/ALONGSIDE)
13 RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE
14 SART ACTIVE
15 UNDEFINED
7. Select [3 ETA].
8. Spin the scrollwheel to set the estimated day of the month to arrive, then left-click.
Currently selected digit is highlighted by the cursor.
Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the day.
Left-click to move to the next digit.

4-9
4. AIS OPERATION

9. Select [4 DESTINATION], then left-click. The software keyboard appears.

10. Use the trackball to highlight a letter or digit on the software keyboard, then left-
click. Repeat until the destination name is entered. (Max. 20 characters)
11. Use the trackball to highlight [END] on the software keyboard, then left-click.
12. Select [5 DRAUGHT].
13. Spin the scrollwheel to set the ship’s draught, then left-click.
14. Select [6 PERSONS].
15. Spin the scrollwheel to set the number of crew on-board, then left-click.
16. Close the menu.

4.9 How to Display AIS Target Data

You can display an AIS target’s data by selecting it on the display, when the AIS func-
tion is set for [AIS DISP FILT].

4.9.1 AIS pop-up information

The AIS pop-up shows abbreviated AIS data (COG, SOG, CPA, TCPA and destina-
tion) for the selected AIS target. Simply put the cursor on the AIS target to show the
pop-up. The pop-up can be enabled or disabled with the following procedure.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [4 TT•AIS SYMBOL].
4. Select [8 AIS POP UP INFO].
5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate.
6. Close the menu.

4-10
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.9.2 How to display basic AIS target data

Place the cursor on a desired AIS target and press the TGT ACQ key. The target is
highlighted with a square box and the selected AIS target’s data is shown in AIS target
data box in the information, on the right side of the screen.

AIS target data box

Location of target data box

Target’s MMSI ID
Name of target ship
Bearing to target Position quality*
Range to target Target’s co-ordinates
Target’s course
Target’s speed Target’s heading

Target’s CPA Target’s rate of turn

Target’s TCPA
Target’s bow cross range
Target’s nav status
Target’s bow cross time

*: Position quality indicates overall accuracy, and is calculated and displayed as

shown below.

POSN QLTY
Position accuracy
value
1 Position > 10 m
2 Position with RAIM > 10 m
3 Position d 10 m
4 Position with RAIM d 10 m

4-11
4. AIS OPERATION

4.9.3 How to display expanded AIS target data

The expanded AIS data display provides additional information about an AIS target,
including call sign, IMO No., etc. To display expanded AIS data, show the basic data
for a target, then left-click the target data display. The expanded data appears.

Vessel name

Call sign

Position

Type of position sensor

Position accuracy

Navigation status*

MMSI number

IMO number

Vessel dimensions

Destination

ETA at destination

AIS transponder version

Association (ON or OFF)

Ship and cargo type

Repeat indicator

*: Where the selected AIS target is an aircraft, the

STATUS box shows the aircraft’s altitude.

If data for an item is unknown, "missing" appears.

4.9.4 How to remove target data from the display area

Place the cursor on a desired tracked target and press the TARGET CANCEL key.
The select target’s data is no longer displayed in the data display area.

4-12
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.10 How to Change AIS Symbol Attributes

The AIS symbol’s brilliance, size and color can be changed.

4.10.1 How to adjust the AIS symbol brilliance

1. Place the cursor on the [PLTx] (“x” in-

dicates the current color palette in
use) indication inside the [BRILL] box,
then right-click. The [BRILL] menu ap-
pears.
2. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next
menu page. Spin the
scrollwheel
3. Select [8 AIS SYMBOLS]. The set- to adjust the
tings are highlighted and can now be brilliance.
adjusted.
4. Spin the scrollwheel to select the desired brilliance, then left-click to apply the set-
ting.
5. Close the menu.

4.10.2 How to change the AIS symbol color and size

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [4 TT•AIS SYMBOL].
4. Select [2 TT•AIS SYMBOL COLOR]. The settings
can now be adjusted.
5. Select the appropriate color, then left-click.
6. Select [6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL].
7. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate, then left-click.
[OFF]: All AIS symbols are displayed in the same
size.
[ON]: AIS symbols are displayed in scale, according
to the ship length.

Standard Scaled
symbol symbol
The figure above shows examples of standard and scaled symbols.
8. Close the menu.

4-13
4. AIS OPERATION

4.10.3 How to change the ATON symbol color

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [4 TT•AIS SYMBOL].
4. Select [3 ATON SYMBOL COLOR]. The settings can now be adjusted.
5. Select the appropriate color, then left-click.
6. Close the menu.

4.11 Past Position Display

The past position display shows equally time-spaced dots marking past positions of
activated AIS targets. A new dot is added at preset time intervals until the preset num-
ber is reached. If a target changes its speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it changes
course, its plotted course will not be a straight line.

Below are examples of past position displays.

(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running straight (c) Ship reduced speed (d) Ship increased speed

4.11.1 How to display past position points and select the plotting in-
terval
Select the [PAST POSN] setting, then left-click to cycle through the following settings.

[OFF] o [30sec] o [1min] o [2min] o [3min] o [6min] o [OFF]...

OFF
PAST POSN
setting
The past positions are displayed in accordance with the selected setting.

4-14
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.11.2 How to select the number of past position points to be dis-

played
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [4 TT•AIS SYMBOL].
4. Select [5 TT•AIS PAST POSN POINTS].
5. Select [5] or [10] as appropriate, then press the ADJUST knob.
6. Close the menu.

4.11.3 Past position display orientation

Past position orientation, true or relative, is controlled with [TRAIL MODE] in the
[TRAIL] context menu. To adjust the trail orientation, see section 1.37.1.

4.11.4 Stabilization in true motion

True motion past position display can be ground stabilized or sea stabilized. The
[TRAIL] box shows current stabilization as "TRUE-G" or "TRUE-S". To change stabi-
lization mode, open the [SHIP SPEED MENU] menu and set [SHIP SPEED] to
[LOG(BT)] (ground stabilization) or [LOG(WT)] (sea stabilization).

4.12 Lost Target

A target is declared a lost target when it fails to produce data for six minutes or five
reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter. When this occurs, the target is marked
with the (flashing) lost target symbol and the message "AIS TARGET LOST" appears
in the Alert Box. To acknowledge a lost target, press the ALARM ACK key, or use the
trackball to select the [ALERT] box then press the left button.

4.12.1 How to set the lost target filter

If there are a lot of AIS targets in your area, the lost target alert can sound frequently.
In this case you may wish to have the alert ignore lost targets whose range, speed,
class or length are below the threshold value you specify.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [0 NEXT].
5. Select [3 AIS LOST TGT FILTER].
6. Select [MAX RANGE].
7. Referring to the following table, select the appropriate
filter, then press the ENTER MARK key.
Filter type Definition
[MAX RANGE] Any AIS targets beyond the range set here will not trigger the
lost target alert.

4-15
4. AIS OPERATION

Filter type Definition

[MIN SHIP SPEED] Any AIS targets slower than this setting will not trigger the lost
target alert.
[EXCEPT CLASS B] Select ON to prevent AIS targets class B triggering the lost tar-
get alert.
8. Select [ON], then press the ENTER MARK key. The settings can now be adjust-
ed.
9. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the setting as required, then left-click to apply the
setting.
10. Close the menu.

4.12.2 How to enable/disable the lost target alert

The [LOST TARGET] box, located at the bottom-right corner of the screen, enables
and disables the lost target alert.

Select the box with the cursor, then left-click to cycle through the settings in the follow-
ing order: [OFF] o [FILT] o [ALL] o [OFF]...

OFF Lost target

filter setting

• [OFF]: Disable the alert.

• [FILT]: Enable the alert for all lost targets, excluding filtered targets.
• [ALL]: Enable the alert for all lost targets, including filtered targets.

4.13 ROT Setting

You can set the lower limit of the ROT (Rate Of Turn) at which the heading line on
target symbols will point in direction which the vessel is turning.

Ship turning
to starboard

ROT display
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [4 TT•AIS SYMBOL].
4. Select [4 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT], then left-click. The settings can now be adjusted.
5. Spin the scrollwheel to adjust the ROT as appropriate, then left-click. The setting
range is 000.0°/min to 720.0°/min.
6. Close the menu.

4-16
 4. AIS OPERATION

4.14 AIS Collision Alarm (CPA, TCPA)

This radar calculates CPA and TCPA by using own ship and relative target positions.
An AIS dangerous target is one whose CPA and TCPA are within the range of the CPA
and TCPA limits set in the TT/AIS box. The AIS symbol of an AIS dangerous target is
red and flashing, and is announced with the Alert "AIS DANGER OF COLLISION". Af-
ter the alert is acknowledged the target symbol is displayed in red color.

Dangerous target
When a sleeping or an activated target violates the CPA/TCPA
alarm setting its symbol changes to the dangerous target
symbol (red and flashing) and the message “AIS DANGER OF
COLLISON” appears. Press the ALARM ACK key (or click the
[ALERT] box with the left button) to acknowledge the
CPA/TCPA alarm. The audible alarm is silenced and the Thicker than
symbol stops flashing. activated target
Take appropriate action to avoid collision.

4.14.1 How to set the CPA and TCPA ranges

CPA and TCPA ranges can be adjusted from the ap- CPA setting
propriate indication in the [TT] box.
1. Left-click the [CPA/TCPA] indication to activate TCPA setting
the feature. Left-click here to activate
CPA/TCPA settings.
2. Place the cursor on the indication you wish to
adjust.
3. Left-click, or spin the scrollwheel, to adjust the settings as required. The settings
options are outlined in the table below.
Indication Method Settings options
CPA Left-click 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 (NM)
Scrollwheel 0.1 to 20; 0 to 10 in 0.1 NM increments, 1 NM increments thereafter
TCPA Left-click 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 15 (minutes)
Scrollwheel 1 to 60 minutes in 1-minute increments

4-17
4. AIS OPERATION

4.15 How to Associate TT and AIS Targets

An AIS-equipped ship is usually displayed by two symbols on the radar display. This
is because the AIS ship position is measured by a GPS navigator (L/L) whereas the
radar detects the same ship by PPI principle (range and bearing relative to own ship
radar antenna).
To avoid the presentation of two target symbols for the same physical target, use the
“association” function. If target data from both AIS and TT are available and if the as-
sociation criteria are fulfilled, either the AIS or TT symbol is presented according to the
association method selected.

Association will not happen between AIS and TT if the AIS target is sleeping or the AIS
target is lost.

1. Confirm that the [TT ACQ MODE] in-

dication shows "AUTO", "AUTO TT ACQ MODE
indication
MAN" or "MAN".
2. Open the menu.
3. Select [5 TT•AIS].
4. Select [7 TARGET ASSOCIATION].
5. Select [2 ASSOCIATION TGT TYPE].
6. Select [OFF], [AIS] or [TT], as appropriate, to select
which symbols and data to display when the associa-
tion criteria are met.
[OFF] : Disable association.
[AIS] : Use AIS symbols and AIS data.
[TT] : Use TT symbols and TT data.
Note: Association can also be switched on and off
from the screen by left-clicking the Association Usage
icon, shown below.
Left-click the association icon to change the association setting.
>: Use TT Symbols and data.
<: Use AIS symbols and data.
No indication: Association is disabled.

7. Referring to the table below, set the association criteria. Spin the scrollwheel to
adjust the value, then left-click to confirm the setting.
[GAP] : Range in bearing direction between AIS target and tracked target.
(setting range: 0.000-0.050 (nm))
[RANGE] : Range direction difference from own ship to AIS target and tracked
target. (setting range: 0.000-0.100 (nm))
[BEARING] : Bearing difference from own ship to AIS target and tracked target.
(setting range: 0.0-9.9 (°))
[SPEED] : Speed difference between AIS target and tracked target.
(setting range: 0.0-6.0 (kn))
[COURSE] : Course difference between AIS target and tracked target.
(setting range: 0.0-25.0 (°))
8. Close the menu.

4-18
 4. AIS OPERATION

When the association criteria (gap, range, bearing, speed, and course) is met, and the
ASSOCIATION TARGET setting is [AIS], the TT symbol is erased and only the AIS
symbol is displayed.

All default association settings are restored whenever the power is turned on.

To show the association information, place the cursor on the target data box at the
right side of the screen, then press the ACQ key. The selected target’s AIS and TT
data are displayed together as shown in the examples below.

Combined TT/AIS data Combined TT/AIS data

for a CLASS A vessel for a CLASS B vessel

4.16 How to View Own Ship Data

Own ship’s static data (type of ship, call sign, etc.) can be viewed as follows:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [7 OWN SHIP DATA]. The [OWN SHIP DATA] menu appears.
The data display shows the following information.
Ship name Ship call-sign
Ship coordinates COG
SOG Heading
ROT Positioning sensor and sensor quality
MMSI IMO Number
Ship’s dimensions Ship’s draught
Location of external EPFS antenna AIS software version
Ship and cargo type Own ship type and cargo type on-board
5. Close the menu.

4-19
4. AIS OPERATION

4.17 How to Use AIS Messages

You can transmit and receive messages via the AIS, to a specified destination (MMSI)
or all ships in the area. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for ex-
ample, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages are also permitted.

Short safety related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety infor-
mation. They do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS.

4.17.1 How to create and save messages

Up to ten messages can be saved at any time. To create and save a message, do the
following:

Note: The MMSI of the receiving ship can be automatically set by selecting [TRANS-
MIT MESSAGE] from the pop up menu. To show the pop up menu, select the receiv-
ing ship’s data in the AIS data display area, then press the right button.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE].
5. Select [2 ADDRESS TYPE].
6. Select [ADDRESSED] (message for a specific MMSI.
Automatically selected if the MMSI is automatically
using the data display.) or [BROADCAST] (message
to all AIS-equipped vessels within the area), then press the ENTER MARK key.
7. Select [3 MESSAGE TYPE].
8. Select [SAFETY] (for safety messages) or [BINARY] (for routine messages), then
press the ENTER MARK key.
9. For [ADDRESSED] message, do this step. For [BROADCAST] message, or if
[TRANSMIT MESSAGE] was selected from the AIS data display pop up menu, go
to step 8.
1) Select [4 MMSI No.].
2) Use the number keys to set the receiving ship’s MMSI.
10. Select [5 CHANNEL].
11. Select the AIS channel to transmit your message over: [A], [B], [A or B], or [A and
B], the press the ENTER MARK key.
12. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
13. Select [4 EDIT]. A software keyboard appears at the
bottom of the menu.

14. Select the character desired, then left-click.

The maximum of 80 characters can be entered for the message.
15. Select [END] to complete message input, then left-click.

4-20
 4. AIS OPERATION

16. Select [3 SAVE FILE].

17. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate number, then left-click.
18. Close the menu.

4.17.2 How to transmit messages

1. Do one of the following:
a) Create a message, as described in paragraph 4.17.1.
b) Use a file saved in the memory by selecting [5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] fol-
lowed by [2 OPEN FILE] from the second page of the [TRANSMIT MESSAGE]
menu.
2. Select [5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE] from the second page of the [TRANSMIT MES-
SAGE] menu to transmit the message.
During transmission, the message "AIS TRANSMITTING" appears in the guid-
ance box. The message disappears when the message is sent successfully.
"TRANSMIT ERROR" appears in the alert box if an error occurred while transmit-
ting the message.
3. Close the menu.

4.17.3 How to view messages

When an AIS message is received, the system automatically stores the message in
the message list. If [AUTO DISP MESSAGE] in the [AIS TARGET MENU] is set to
[ON], the envelope icon on the [AIS message] button, on lower half of the InstantAc-
cess bar™, changes to a blue color to indicate a new, unread message is stored.

The system stores up to 20 AIS messages. When the storage capacity is reached the
oldest AIS message is automatically erased to make room for the latest. Note that only
received messages are backed up when the power is turned off. AIS alert messages
are not backed up.

You can access the received messages from the InstantAccess bar™, or from the
menu. The following procedure shows the menu method. If you click the [AIS mes-
sage] button on the lower half of the InstantAccess bar™, skip to step 5.

1. Open the menu. Currently displayed page no.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS]. Close message list.

3. Select [5 AIS]. When displayed as
“BACK”, goes back
4. Select [4 SHOW RECEIVED one page in the list.
MSGS].
5. Select the message to be dis- Message list
played, then left-click.
6. The message details are displayed
below the message list.
Display next page.
7. Close the menu. Name and Call Sign of
selected message’s
sender.
Message details

4-21
4. AIS OPERATION

4.17.4 How to set up the AIS message notification

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE].
5. Select [ON] to show the received message indication (blue envelope icon) when
a new message is received, [OFF] to disable the notification.

No unread messages, [3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE] is

or [3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE] set to [ON] and at least one
is set to [OFF]. unread message is stored.
6. Close the menu.

4.17.5 How to display AIS alert messages

The AIS transponder outputs various alert messages. To view the alert list:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [5 TT•AIS].
3. Select [5 AIS].
4. Select [8 AIS ALERT MESSAGES].
5. Select the message to display, then left-click.
6. Close the menu.

4.18 AIS System Messages

AIS system messages are displayed at the bottom right corner of the screen. The table
below shows the AIS system messages, their alert priority and their meanings.

Message Priority Meaning

"AIS DANGER OF Alarm CPA and TCPA of an activated AIS target are be-
COLLISION" low value set on the menu.
"AIS NEW TARGET" Warning AIS target has entered an acquisition zone.
"AIS TARGET LOST" Warning Lost target. An activated target is declared a lost
target when it fails to produce data for six minutes
or five reporting intervals, whichever is the shorter.
"AIS DISPLAY FULL" Warning The radar only displays the closest 350 AIS targets
from own ship.
"ACTIVE AIS FULL" Warning Number of active AIS targets has reached 50.
"AIS COM ERROR" Warning Not receiving AIS data from own AIS (VDO mes-
sage).
"AIS CAPACITY FULL" Caution Number of AIS targets has reached 1200.
"AIS DISPLAY 95"% Caution Number of displayed AIS targets has reached 333.
"ACTIVE AIS 95%" Caution Number of active AIS targets has reached 48.
"TRANSMIT ERROR" Caution Could not send AIS message.

4-22
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION
The video plotter has the following functions:

• Enter waypoints (up to 198) and marks.

• Creates and displays radar maps.
• Own ship track plotting
• Able to save marks and tracks on removable SD-card.

5.1 Orientation Modes

Six orientation modes are available: [HEAD UP RM], [STAB HEAD UP RM],[STERN
UP RM], [COURSE UP RM], [NORTH UP RM], [NORTH UP TM] (True Motion).

Note 1: The [STERN UP RM] orientation mode is only available it has been set to [ON]
in [STERN UP RM] in the [INITIAL SETTING] o [OPERATION] menu.
Note 2: The screen may flash when the heading is changed more than one degree in
the [HEAD UP RM] or [STAB HEAD UP RM] mode.

Automatic resetting of own ship mark in true motion mode

In the true motion mode, the own ship mark is automatically returned stern-ward 75%
from the screen center when it reaches a location 50% of the display radius.
To select an orientation mode, see section 1.30.

5.2 Radar Map

A radar map is a combination of map lines and symbols whereby the user can define
and input the navigation data, route planning and monitoring data. The radar map can
contain 20,000 points of data. Inscribed marks are retained when the power is turned
off.

The radar map is referenced to the WGS-84 datum and appears only when there is
valid position data input. The radar map does not affect any radar functions.

Note: The location and orientation of mark symbols and mark lines can change, de-
pending on the display presentation mode, as shown in the table below.
Presentation mode Mark symbol Mark line
HEAD UP RM/STERN UP Location is changed ac- Location and orientation
RM/STAB HEAD UP RM cording to heading and own are changed according to
ship position. heading and own ship posi-
Orientation is unchanged. tion.
COURSE UP RM/NORTH Location is changed ac- Location and orientation
UP RM/NORTH UP TM cording to own ship posi- are changed according to
tion. own ship position.
Orientation is unchanged.

5-1
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.2.1 How to show/hide the radar map

You can show or hide the radar map from the InstantAccess bar™. Click the [Radar
Map] button to toggle between show and hide.

Click to toggle
MAP MAP
OFF ON
Hide the Show the
radar map radar map

You can also show or hide the radar map from the menu. Open the [MAIN MENU] then
select [2 MARKS] o [0 NEXT] o [2 RADAR MAP]. Select [OFF] or [ON] appropriate.

5.2.2 How to select a mark type

1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
RADAR MAP (1/2)
1 BACK
2 ORIGIN MARK STAB
GND / SEA
3 MARK TYPE
ORIGIN MARK(No.) /
ORIGIN MARK(SYM) /
OWN MAP MARK /
AIS
MARK WP 1~50 /
WP 51~100 /
AIS 1 WP 101~150 /
WP 151~198 /
OWN SHIP SHAPE
Right-click 4 MARK POSITION
CURSOR / OS / L/L
00º00.000’N
000º00.000’E
RADAR-MAP 0 / 20000
OWN TRACK 0 / 20000
TGT TRACK 0 / 15000
0 NEXT
2. Select [3 MARK TYPE].
3. Select the appropriate type of marker, referring to the table below, then press the
ENTER MARK key.
Mark kind Description
[ORIGIN MARK(No.)] Inscribes the origin mark symbol, with mark number.
[ORIGIN MARK(SYM)] Inscribes the origin mark symbol, with no mark number.
[MAP MARK] Inscribes the selected map mark.
[WP1-50] Inscribes waypoint marker 1 through 50.
[WP51-100] Inscribes waypoint marker 51 through 100.
[WP101-150] Inscribes waypoint marker 101 through 150.
[WP151-198] Inscribes waypoint marker 151 through 198.
[OWN SHIP SHAPE] Inscribes a mark with the same shape as own ship.
4. Close the menu.

5-2
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.2.3 How to select the mark inscription position

You can select the location at which the marker is inscribed from the following:

Location Description
[CURSOR] You can select the location using the Control Unit.
[OWN SHIP] Marker is placed at own ship position.
[L/L] Marker is placed at the co-ordinates selected.
1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
2. Select [4 MARK POSITION].
3. Referring to the table above, select the appropriate location, then press the EN-
TER MARK key.

How to set the co-ordinates

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [L/L], the co-ordinates settings are dis-
played. Co-ordinates can be set one digit at a time, as shown in the figure below.
Currently selected digit is highlighted by the cursor.
Left-click to move to the next digit.
Roll the scrollwheel to change the value.
N - North (Latitude)
028º 00.200 S S - South (Latitude)

153º 43.100 E W - West (Longitude)

E - East (Longitude)
1) Spin the scrollwheel to change the value, then left-click to move to the next
digit.
2) Repeat step 1 to adjust the Latitude and Longitude as appropriate.
4. Close the menu.

5.2.4 How to select the mark color (B-type only)

B-type radars of this series allow the change of mark colors. For all other types, the
color is fixed and cannot be changed.

1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
2. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
3. Select [3 MARK COLOR].
4. Select the appropriate color, then press the ENTER
MARK key. Available options are shown in the table
below.

Menu Menu Menu

Color Color Color
indication indication indication
RED Red CYA Cyan BLU Blue
GRN Green MAG Magenta YEL Yellow
WHT White
5. Close the menu.

5-3
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.2.5 How to inscribe marks

You can inscribe marks anywhere inside the operational display area, however, marks
cannot be inscribed in the same location as a menu box.

Depending on the setting for [4 MARK POSITION] the method to inscribe a mark is
slightly different.

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [CURSOR]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. The cursor
moves inside the operational display area.
3. Place the cursor on the location (inside the operational display area) you wish to
inscribe the mark, then left-click to anchor the mark.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for multiple mark inscription, or right-click to complete the pro-
cedure.

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [OWN SHIP]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. The selected
mark is inscribed at the OS position.
3. Repeat steps 1 to 2 for multiple mark inscription, or right-click to complete the pro-
cedure.

Where [4 MARK POSITION] is set to [L/L]

1. Place the cursor inside the [MARK] box. The [MARK] box is now highlighted.
2. Spin the scrollwheel to select the appropriate mark, then left-click. RADAR MAP
menu appears and the first digit of the latitude is selected.
3. Referring to section 5.2.4, set the latitude and longitude.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for multiple mark inscription, or right-click to complete the pro-
cedure.

5.2.6 How to set origin mark stabilization

Origin marks can be geographically fixed (ground stabilized) or moving (sea stabi-
lized).

1. Select the [MARK] box at the bottom-left of the screen then right-click to open the
[RADAR MAP] context menu.
2. Select [2 ORIGIN MARK STAB].
3. Select [GND] or [SEA] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key.
4. Close the menu.

5-4
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.2.7 How to delete marks

Marks can be deleted one at a time, or all at once.

How to delete marks individually

1. Select the operational display area, then right-click to show the [CURSOR] con-
text menu.
2. Select [MARK DELETE]. The cursor changes to a highlighted cursor.
3. Place the highlighted cursor on the mark to be deleted, then left-click.
4. Repeat step 3 to delete another mark, or press the right button to return the cur-
sor to normal function.

How to delete all marks

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [8 DELETE
DATA].
4. Select [2 ALL
MARKS].
5. Select [YES], then
press the ENTER
MARK key.
6. Close the menu.

5-5
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.2.8 How to use ECDIS chart marks

Note: This function is only available if [ECDIS] is set to [SERIAL] or [LAN] at installa-
tion. Consult your dealer for details.
You can display marks received from an ECDIS on the radar screen. If the received
mark also contains predicted position data, the predicted position is also displayed on-
screen.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [6 ECDIS MARKS DISPLAY].
4. Select the appropriate item.
• [2 USER CHART]: Shows/hides received user
charts.
• [3 CURVED EBL]: Shows/hides the received
Curved EBL.
• [4 CHART SYMBOL]: Shows/hides the re-
ceived chart symbols.
• [5 NOTE BOOK]: Shows/hides the received
notes. [ON] shows notes only when they are re-
ceived. [DISPLAY] shows notes continuously.
The notes are shown in the information box at
the right-side of the screen.
• [6 ROUTE]: Shows/hides the received route. [CENT] shows only the route line;
[ALL] shows both the route line and the route width.
• [7 PREDICTOR]: Shows/hides the received predicted position with a symbol
(dotted line) of the same size as the own ship.
5. Select [ON] or [OFF] as appropriate, then press the ENTER MARK key. [ON]
shows the selected item’s ECDIS mark when received, [OFF] hides the ECDIS
mark.
6. Close the menu.

5-6
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.2.9 Radar map marks

To inscribe/remove marks or change mark colors on the radar map, see section 1.42.
The following mark icons are available.

Item on Item on
B-type*1 IMO/A-type*2
MARK menu MARK menu
Mark Red Buoy
Danger Highlight Green Buoy
Buoy Red Buoy

Buoy Green Buoy

Buoy Red Buoy

Buoy Green Buoy

Mark Red Buoy

Danger Highlight Green Buoy

Mark Magenta Danger Highlight

Mark Magenta Danger Highlight

Mark Orange Mark

Mark Orange Mark
Mark Orange Mark
Mark Magenta Navline (map)
Mark White Coastline
Nav Line (map) Gray Contour Line
Coastline Magenta Danger Highlight
Contour Magenta (cable) Danger Highlight
Prohibited Area Orange Mark
(cable) Danger Highlight Orange Mark
(w/line) Buoy *1: Colors for B-type marks may be
(w/line) Mark set by the user.
(w/line) Mark *2: Colors for IMO/A-type marks are
(w/line) Mark fixed as indicated.

You can check how many marks are in

use at any time from the [RADAR Marks Total
MAP] menu. The total number of in use available
marks
marks in use and total number of
marks available is shown at the bot-
tom of the [RADAR MAP] menu’s first
page.

5-7
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.3 How to Align the Radar Map

When there is positional error between the radar screen and radar map marks and
lines, do the following to correct it.

1. Right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU].

2. Select [MAP ALIGN]. The cursor is now highlighted and the [MAP ALIGN] function
is active.
3. Left-click the map at the location you want to move. The map is now “anchored”
to the cursor.
4. Move the cursor to align the radar map with the radar screen, then left-click. The
indication "MAP ALIGN" appears on the right side of the operational display area.
5. Right-click to deactivate the [MAP ALIGN] function.

Display indications affected by map alignment

The following items are also re-aligned when the [MAP ALIGN] function is activated.

• Map marks • MOB marks

• Drop marks • Own ship tracks
• Anchor watch settings • Latitude/Longitude Grid
• Target tracks • AIS symbol vector display
• AIS symbols • Zoom window display (STAB GND mode
• EBL offsets (STAB GND mode only) only)
• Origin marks • Cursor position coordinates (when CUR-
• NAV lines and waypoints SOR L/L ALIGN is set to [ON] only)
Display indications unaffected by map alignment
The following items are not re-aligned when the [MAP ALIGN] function is activated.

• Radar echoes • TT symbols

• TT symbol vector display • EBL/VRM reference point
• PI lines • OS coordinates ([POSN]) display
• Own ship mark • Barge mark

5.3.1 How to disable the map alignment

1. Right-click the operational display area to show the [CURSOR MENU].
2. Select [MAP ALIGN], then left-click. The cursor is now highlighted and the [MAP
ALIGN] function is active.
3. Press and hold the left button. The "MAP ALIGN" indication is cleared and the
map alignment is cleared.
4. Right-click to deactivate the [MAP ALIGN] function.

5-8
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.4 Own Ship and Other Ship’s Track

A total of 20,000 points are allotted for storage of own ship’s track, marks and lines.

For target tracks, the total number of points is15,000.

When this memory becomes full, the oldest track is deleted to make room for the lat-
est. For that reason you may want to adjust the recording interval to conserve the
memory.

You can check how many tracks are in use at any time from the [RADAR MAP] menu.
The total number in use and total number available is shown at the bottom of the [RA-
DAR MAP] menu’s first page as [OWN TRACK] and [TGT TRACK]. See section 5.2.9.

5.4.1 How to show/hide tracks

You can show or hide tracks for own ship or for targets (A/B-types only).

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [7 TRACKS].
4. Select [2 OWN TRACK] or [3 TARGET TRACK] as appropriate.

Shown only for

A/B-types

Note: [3 TARGET TRACK] is available only for A/B-type radars.

5. Select [2 DISPLAY OWN TRACK] or [3 DISPLAY TARGET TRACK], as appropri-
ate.
6. Select [ON] to show tracks, or [OFF] to hide tracks.

5-9
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.4.2 How to set the plotting interval

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [7 TRACKS].
4. Select [2 OWN TRACK] or [3 TARGET TRACK] as appropriate.
Note: For IMO-types, [3 TARGET TRACK] is not shown.
5. Select [3 SAVE INTERVAL].
6. Select the appropriate setting, then left-click.
The following tables show the relation between plotting interval settings and max-
imum track recording time. Note that the maximum recording time is different for
own tracks and target tracks.
Own track recording times
Interval Max. Recording Time Interval Max. Recording Time
10 s 56 hours 3 min 1000 hours
30 s 167 hours 6 min 2000 hours
1 min 333 hours 15 min 5000 hours
2 min 667 hours DRAW ONLY No track data recorded.

Target track recording times

Max. Recording Time Max. Recording Time
Interval
(One target only) (15 targets)
10 s 42 hours 3 hours
30 s 125 hours 8.5 hours
1 min 250 hours 16.5 hours
2 min 500 hours 33.5 hours
3 min 750 hours 50 hours
6 min 1500 hours 100 hours
15 min 3750 hours 250 hours
DRAW ONLY No track data recorded. No track data recorded.
7. Close the menu.

5.4.3 How to set the track color (A/B-types only)

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [7 TRACKS].
4. Select [2 OWN TRACK] or [3 TARGET TRACK] as appropriate.
5. Select [4 OWN TRACK COLOR]. The following colors are available.
• [RED] (Red) • [CYA] (Cyan)
• [GRN] (Green) • [MAG] (Magenta)
• [BLU] (Blue) • [WHT] (White)
• [YEL] (Yellow)
6. Select the appropriate setting, then left-click.
7. Close the menu.

5-10
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.4.4 How to automatically plot target tracks (A/B-types only)

To automatically plot target tracks, do the following:

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [7 TRACKS].
4. Select [3 TARGET TRACK].
5. Select [5 AUTO TARGET TRACK].
6. Select [OFF] or [ON] as appropriate.
Note: When [5 AUTO TARGET TRACK] is set to [ON], [CURSOR MENU] items
[TARGET TRACK ON] and [TARGET TRACK OFF] are disabled not displayed.
7. Close the menu.

5.4.5 How to delete tracks

There are three methods to delete tracks: by percentage of track, by track color or by
cursor selection.

How to erase tracks by percentage

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [8 DELETE DATA].

Color selection available

only for A/B-types.

Not shown for

IMO-types.
Area selection available
only for B-types.

4. Select [5 OS TRACK-COLOR/TIME] or [6 TGT TRACK-COLOR/TIME].

Note: [6 TGT TRACK-COLOR/TIME] is only shown for A/B-type radars.
5. Select the percentage of the track you wish to delete, then left-click. The available
options are: [30%], [50%], [80%] or [ALL].
6. Close the menu.

5-11
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

How to erase tracks by color (For A/B-types only)

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [8 DELETE DATA].
4. Select [5 OS TRACK-COLOR/TIME] or [6 TGT TRACK-COLOR/TIME].
Note: [6 TGT TRACK-COLOR/TIME] is only shown for A/B-type radars.
5. Select the color of the track you wish to delete, then left-click. The available op-
tions are: [RED], [GRN], [BLU], [YEL], [CYA], [MAG] or [WHT].
6. Close the menu.

How to erase tracks with the cursor (For B-types only)

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [8 DELETE DATA].
4. Select [7 OS TRACK-AREA] or [8 TGT TRACK-AREA].
5. Select [2POINTS] or [AREA] as appropriate, then left-click. The cursor jumps into
the operational display area.
[2POINTS]: Delete track between two points. All points between start point to end
point change from circle-shaped to square-shaped icons.
[AREA]: Delete all track within an area. Points within the selected area change
from circle-shaped to square-shaped icons.
A

A B
B
[2POINTS] method [AREA] method
6. Place the cursor on the first point (A), then left-click.
7. Place the cursor on the second point (B), then left-click. If [AREA] was selected at
step 5, the two points form a square.
8. Close the menu.

5-12
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.5 How to Use Waypoints

A particular location is known as a “waypoint”, whether it be a starting point, a desti-
nation point or an intermediate point on a voyage. This radar system can store 200
waypoints. Waypoints 1 to 198 are user set waypoints, waypoint 199 is reserved for
external input, waypoint 200 is reserved for MOB (Man Over Board). Waypoints can
be entered with the cursor, or from the menu (manual input of latitude and longitude).
Waypoints 1 to 198 can be edited from the menu.

5.5.1 How to set the data source for waypoints

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [2 NAV LINE DATA
SOURCE]. [WPT MARK] is
4. Select the appropriate data shown for A/B-types
only.
source, referring to the list be-
low.
• [OFF]: Waypoints and nav
lines (such as tracks) are
not shown.
• [EXT DATA]: Use naviga-
tional data from an external
EPFS device for waypoints
and nav lines.
• [INTERNAL DATA]: Use waypoints and nav lines saved internally.
• [WPT MARK] (shown only for A/B-type radars): Shows the waypoint marks,
however received routes are not shown.
5. Close the menu.

5.5.2 How to enter waypoints

How to enter waypoints with the cursor
1. Select the [MARK] box, then right-click. The [RADAR MAP] menu appears.
2. Select [3 MARK TYPE].
3. Select the appropriate waypoint number group for the new waypoint, then left-
click.
The available groups are: [WP1 to WP50], [WP51 to WP100], [WP101 to WP150]
or [WP151 to WP198].
4. Right-click several times to close the menu.
5. Place the cursor on the [MARK] box. The box is now highlighted.
6. Spin the scrollwheel to select the waypoint number for new waypoint, then left-
click. The cursor jumps inside the operational display area.
7. Place the cursor on the location to inscribe the waypoint, then left-click.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to inscribe other waypoints.
9. Right-click the operational display area to complete waypoint inscription.

5-13
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

How to enter/edit waypoints from the menu

Note: Waypoints which are part of a route that is currently in use cannot be edited.
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [2 WPT SET].
4. Select [2 WPT NO. SELECT].
5. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the control unit numbered
keys, to select a waypoint number, then left-click.
6. To edit or input a waypoint name, select [3 WPT
NAME], then left-click. The software keyboard ap-
pears. Referring to section 1.5.2, name the waypoint.
To skip naming the waypoint, go to step 7.
7. Select [4 WPT L/L]. The latitude and longitude set-
tings can now be adjusted.
8. Input the latitude and longitude with the number keys, or spin the scrollwheel to
select a digit, then left-click to move to the next digit.
9. Close the menu.

5.5.3 How to erase individual waypoints

There are two methods to erase individual waypoints: cursor selection or from the
menu.

How to erase a waypoint by cursor selection

1. Place the cursor inside the operational display area, then right-click.
2. Select [MARK DELETE]. The mark delete function is activated and the cursor is
highlighted when inside the operational display area.
3. Select the waypoint you wish to delete, then left-click.
4. Right-click inside the operational display area to deactivate the mark delete func-
tion.

How to erase a waypoint from the menu

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [6 WPT SET].
4. Select [2 WPT NO. SELECT]. Then select the waypoint to erase.
5. Select [5 CLEAR DATA].
6. Select [YES] or [NO] as appropriate, then left-click.
7. Close the menu.

5-14
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.5.4 How to erase all waypoints

You can erase all waypoints from the menu. If there is an active route, this procedure
cannot be completed.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [8 DELETE DATA].
4. Select [3 ALL WAYPOINTS].
5. Select [YES] to erase all waypoints. Select [NO] to cancel the procedure.
Note: All routes are also deleted with this procedure.
6. Close the menu.

5.5.5 How to display the waypoint list

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT]. WP1
3. Select [7 WPT LIST]. The waypoint list appears. 35°10.178´N
135°45.123´E
4. Close the menu.
WP2
35°28.036´N
135°57.293´E

5.5.6 How to use the waypoint arrival area function

The waypoint arrival area lets you know when you are within a preset distance form
the next waypoint. When the waypoint arrival area is set, the next waypoint is shown
surrounded by an dashed orange-colored line.

For B-type radars only, you can also set a waypoint arrival alert.

Note: To use this alert, set [2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE] in the [NAV LINE•WPT]
menu to [EXT DATA] or [INTERNAL DATA] before-hand. See section 5.5.1 for details.

Waypoint
arrival
distance
Own ship Waypoint

Alert area

To set and use the waypoint arrival area function, fol-

low the procedure below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [0 NEXT]. The second page of the
[NAVLINE•WPT] menu appears.
4. Select [2 WPT ARRIVAL DIST].

5-15
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5. For B-type radars only, select [ON] to enable the arrival alert, or [OFF] to disable
the arrival alert.
6. For all radar types, set the width (radius) of the arrival area.
7. Close the menu.

5.5.7 How to show/hide the waypoint name/number

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [0 NEXT] to show the next menu page.
4. Select [3 DISP WPT NO.] or [4 DISP WPT NAME] as appropriate.
5. Select [YES] to show the waypoint name/number, or [NO] to hide the waypoint
name/number, then left-click.
6. Close the menu.

5.6 Routes
You can display one route (NAV LINE), which is either received from a connected
EPFS device (GPS, etc), or stored internally.
Note: While a route is displayed, tracks and waypoints cannot be deleted and data
cannot be loaded from an SD card.

5.6.1 How to set/edit an internal route

You can store up to 30 routes, each with up to 20 waypoints, in the internal memory.

The procedure for new routes and route editing is the same. To edit a route, you can
skip setting other items and only edit the items you wish to change.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].

5-16
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

3. Select [8 NAV LINE SET]. The [NAV LINE SET] menu appears.
4. Select [2 SELECT NAV LINE].
5. Spin the scrollwheel, or input the number from the
keyboard, to assign a number to the route. The in-
put areas for [3 NAV LINE], [4 NAV LINE ENTRY]
and [5 CLEAR DATA] become active.
6. Select [3 NAV LINE NAME].
7. Referring to section 1.5.2, assign a name to the
route. You can use up to 15 characters in the
name.
8. Select [4 NAV LINE ENTRY].
9. Spin the scrollwheel to select a waypoint, then left-
click.
10. Repeat step 9 until all waypoints for the route are
entered.
When the last waypoint is entered, move the cur-
sor to the next blank input area, then left-click, or
assign the last waypoint as "000" using the numer-
ic keys. If 30 waypoints are entered, the setting process for waypoints is automat-
ically completed.
11. Close the menu.

5.6.2 How to display routes

To display internal routes or received routes, follow the procedure below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [8 NAV LINE•WPT]. The [8 NAV
LINE•WPT] menu appears.
3. Select [2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE].
4. Select the desired source, referring to the list be-
low.
• [OFF]: No routes are displayed.
• [EXT DATA]: Routes received from external
sources are displayed.
• [INTERNAL DATA]: Routes saved in the inter-
nal memory are displayed.
For [INTERNAL DATA], see step 5; for [EXT DA-
TA], see step 8.
5. Select [NAV LINE SELECT].
6. Spin the scrollwheel to select the desired route number, then left-click.
7. Select the direction you want to navigate the route in.
[FORWARD]: Navigate the route in the direction in which it was created.
[REVERSE]: Navigate the route in reverse of the direction in which it was created.
8. Close the menu.

5-17
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

How to skip a waypoint

On a voyage similar to the below example, you may want to skip a waypoint to save
time. You can skip the next waypoint on the current leg of your route by using the pro-
cedure below.

Destination WPT6
WPT5
port

WPT4
WPT3
New route leg

WPT2
Departure WPT1
port

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [8 NAV LINE•WPT]. The [8 NAV LINE•WPT] menu appears.
3. Select [4 SKIP NEXT WPT].
4. Close the menu.

How to set the route width

You can set a width for each route (NAV LINE). For example, if you Waypoint 2
set a 5 NM route width, the route width is 5 NM to port and star-
board, with the own ship as the center. The route width is displayed
as orange dotted lines to either side of the route line.
Route
On B-type radars, if your vessel deviates from the route and passes width
the route width, an alert is released and the message "XTD LIMIT
EXCEED" appears in the Alert box. To acknowledge this alert,
press the ALERT ACK key, or click the Alert box. Own
ship
To set a route width, do the following:
1. Open the menu.
2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [5 NAV LINE WIDTH]. Waypoint 1
4. Spin the scrollwheel, or use the numeric keys, to set a width for : Route line
the route. To disable the route width alert and hide the route : Width line
width lines, set the width to [0.00 NM].
Note: This width is applied to all routes.
5. Close the menu.

5-18
 5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

How to show/hide the turning line

You can show or hide the turning line, the point at which your vessel starts a turn in a
route.

1. Open the menu. Estimated course with Estimated course with

no offset calculation* offset calculation*
2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [0 NEXT].
4. Select [3 TURNING LINE].
5. Select the appropriate setting,
referring to the list below.
Own ship Own ship
• OFF: Turning line is hidden.
• ON: Turning line is displayed. [TURNING LINE] [TURNING LINE]
• REVISED: Turning line is dis- set to [ON] set to [REVISED]
played, but offset based on : Route *: Estimated course
the route and current own : Track is not displayed
on-screen.
ship position. : Turning line

6. Close the menu.

5.6.3 How to delete internal routes

You can delete a specified route, or all routes.

Note: Active routes and routes from external sources cannot be deleted.

How to delete individual internal routes

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [8 NAVLINE SET].
4. Select [2 SELECT NAV LINE].
5. Spin the scrollwheel, or input the number from the keyboard, to select the route
you want to delete.
6. Select [5 CLEAR DATA].
7. Select [YES] to delete the selected route.
8. Close the menu.

How to delete all internal routes

1. Open the menu.
2. Select [2 MARKS].
3. Select [8 DELETE DATA].
4. Select [4 ALL NAV LINES].
5. Select [YES] to delete all internal routes.
6. Close the menu.

5-19
5. VIDEO PLOTTER OPERATION

5.6.4 How to view the routes list

Routes saved to the internal memory can be view by following the procedure below.

1. Open the menu.

2. Select [8 NAVLINE•WPT].
3. Select [9 NAVLINE LIST]. The [NAVLINE LIST]
appears.
4. Close the menu.

5-20
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLE-
SHOOTING
Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic
system. This chapter contains maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to be fol-
lowed to obtain optimum performance and the longest possible life of the equipment.
Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the
safety information below.

WARNING
Do not open the equipment.

Hazardous voltage which can cause electrical shock exists inside the
equipment. Only qualified personnel should work inside the equipment.

Turn off the radar power switch before servicing the antenna unit.
Post a warning sign near the switch indicating it should not be
turned on while the antenna unit is being serviced.

Prevent the potential risk of being struck by the rotating antenna.

A transmitting radar antenna emits electromagnetic waves, which

can be harmful, particularly to the eyes.
Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a close distance
while the radar is in operation, or expose yourself to the transmitting
radar at a close distance.

Wear a safety belt and hard hat when working on the

antenna unit.

Serious injury or death can result if someone falls from the radar
antenna mast.

NOTICE
Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant or
contact spray to coating or plastic parts of
the equipment.

Those items contain organic solvents that can

damage coating and plastic parts, especially
plastic connectors.

6-1
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance pro-
gram should be established and should at least include the items in the table below.

Interval Check Point Checks and measures Remarks

As The LCD will in time Check that dust or dirt is not
required accumulate a layer of on the display. Wipe it care-
dust which tends to fully to prevent scratching.
dim the picture For difficult to remove dirt or
salt deposits, use a cloth
made wet with water and
neutral detergent (less than
1% detergent). Squeeze the
cloth dry then clean the dis-
play. When the display is
clean, gently wipe the dis-
play with a clean, soft, dry
cloth, to prevent scratching.
Processor unit cleanli- Dust and dirt may be re- Do not use chemical-based
ness moved with a soft cloth. cleaners to clean the processor
unit. They can remove paint and
markings.
3 to 6 Exposed nuts and Check for corroded or loos- Sealing compound can be used
months bolts on antenna unit ened nuts and bolts. If nec- instead of paint. Apply a small
essary, clean and repaint amount of grease between nuts
them thickly. and bolts for easy removal in fu-
Replace if heavily corroded. ture.
Antenna radiator Check for dirt and cracks on Do not use chemical-based
radiator surface. Thick dirt cleaners for cleaning. They can
should be wiped off with soft remove paint and markings. If
cloth dampened with fresh you need to remove ice from the
water. If a crack is found, antenna unit, use a wooden or
apply a slight amount of plastic head hammer. Cracks on
sealing compound or adhe- the unit may cause water in-
sive as a temporary remedy, gress, causing serious damages
then call for repair. to internal circuits.
Terminal strips and Open antenna cover to When closing antenna covers in
plugs in antenna unit check terminal strip and position, be careful not to catch
(TECHNICIANS only) plug connections inside. loose wires between covers and
Also check the rubber gas- unit.
ket of antenna covers for
deterioration.
6 Terminal strips, sock- Check for loose connec-
months ets, earth terminal on tions. Check contacts and
to one processor unit plugs for proper seating,
year (TECHNICIANS only) etc.
Every Antenna Unit Check the antenna unit for If corrosion or paint pealing is
year corrosion and paint pealing. found, paint the affected area.
Do not paint the antenna (see
below), only paint the scanner.

Do NOT
paint

6-2
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Interval Check Point Checks and measures Remarks

5 years Antenna Unit If the grease dries out, the Have a qualified technician apply
V-ring may break, allowing the grease oil to the antenna ro-
water to leak inside the an- tary.
tenna unit.

6.2 How to Replace the Fuse

A fuse is located on the front of the processor unit. The fuse protects the equipment
from reverse polarity of the ship’s mains and equipment fault. If a fuse blows, find the
cause before replacing it. Use the correct fuse. Using the wrong fuse will damage the
equipment and void the warranty.

WARNING
WARNIN
Use the proper fuse.
Use of the wrong fuse can cause fire or
electrical shock.

Radar Model(s) Type Code No.

FAR-2218/FAR-2318/FAR-2218-BB/FAR-2228/ FGBO 250V 7A PBF
FAR-2328/FAR-2228-BB/FAR-2328W/
FAR-2238S(-BB)/FAR-2338S/FAR-2338SW/
FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/FAR-2338S-NXT
FAR-2238S(-BB)/FAR-2338S/FAR-2338SW/ FGBO 250V 3A PBF
FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/FAR-2338S-NXT
(For configurations with the optional High Speed
Kit installed)
For monitor units MU-190/MU-231/MU-270W, see the monitor’s operator manual for
fuse details.

6.3 Life Expectancy of Major Parts

This radar has consumable parts, and the table that follows shows the estimated life
expectancy for the consumable parts. Life expectancy estimates are based on use un-
der normal conditions. Request a FURUNO agent or dealer to replace the consumable
parts, to get the best performance and longest possible life from the equipment.

Part Type Life expectancy Remarks

Antenna Unit
Motor BV2-K155 10,000 hours For S-Band radar
BV2-K156 10,000 hours For X-Band radar
Magnetron FNE1201 5,000 hours Check number of hours
MG5436 5,000 hours used at TX time.
MG5223F 7,000 hours
Monitor Unit
Bezel & LCD assembly Refer to the Operator’s Manual for the Monitor Unit.
Note: The magnetron is a consumable item. The effectiveness of your magnetron will
decrease over time, causing lower-than-normal signal strength and loss of echoes.
Magnetrons should be changed regularly. The table above shows the typical life-span
of a magnetron used under normal conditions.

6-3
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.4 Trackball Maintenance

If the cursor skips or moves abnormally, clean the trackball using the procedure below.

1. Turn the retaining ring counterclockwise 45° to

unlock it.
2. Remove the retaining ring and ball.
3. Clean the ball with a soft, lint-free cloth, then
Retaining ring
blow carefully into the ball-cage to dislodge
dust and lint.
4. Look for a build-up of dirt on the metal rollers.
If dirty, clean the rollers using a cotton swab
moistened lightly with isopropyl-rubbing alcohol.
5. Make sure that fluff from the swab is not left on the rollers.
6. Replace the ball and retaining ring. Be sure the retaining ring is not inserted re-
versely.

6.5 Easy Troubleshooting

This section provides troubleshooting procedures that the user can follow to restore
normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation, do not attempt to check in-
side any unit. Any repair work is best left to a qualified technician.

Problem Possible cause Remedy

Key beep inaudible. Key beep turned off. Adjust key beep level in the
[OPERATION] menu, referring
to section 1.10.
Picture not updated or picture Video freeze. Turn the power off and on again
freeze. 30 seconds after the pic- to restore normal operation.
ture freezes, the buzzer sounds,
the ALARM ACK key blinks and
alarm signal is output.
Power is ON but nothing appears Brilliance is too low. Adjust the brilliance, referring to
on monitor. section 1.3.
Marks, indications and noise ap- Tx high voltage protection Reset the power to restore nor-
pear but no echo. circuit has activated. mal operation.
Range changed but radar picture Defective range key or video Adjust the range with the con-
does not change. freeze up. trol unit, or the [RANGE] box
several times.
If that does not work try to turn
the power off and on again to
see if the problem might be vid-
eo freeze up. If unsuccessful,
replacement of keypad may be
required.
Only two PI lines when six lines Incorrect setting of PI line in- Adjust PI line interval, referring
are wanted terval to section 1.40.2. Also, the set-
ting for number of PI lines to
display may be inappropriate.
Check the menu setting for
number of PI lines, referring to
section 1.40.1.

6-4
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Possible cause Remedy

Range rings are not displayed Range rings are turned off Try turning on the range rings
with [RANGE RING] in the
[NAVTOOL] menu. If they do
not appear, their brilliance may
be too low. Adjust their bril-
liance in the [BRILL] menu.
Tracked target not tracked cor- Poor definition of targets in Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN
rectly sea clutter referring to section 1.20 and
section 1.21.
Tuning adjusted but poor sensi- Second trace echo rejector • Disable the second trace
tivity on or dirt on radiator face echo rejector, referring to
section 1.29.
• Clean the radiator face.

6.6 Advanced-level Troubleshooting

This section describes how to cure hardware and software troubles that should be car-
ried out by qualified service personnel.

Note 1: This radar equipment contains complex modules in which fault diagnosis and
repair down to component level are not practicable by users.
Note 2: When replacement of the MAIN board is necessary, the previous settings can
be transferred to new MAIN board as follows:
• Save your settings to a SD-card, referring to section section 1.54.
• After replacing the MAIN board, load the entire contents of the SD-card to the radar,
referring to section section 1.54 for the procedure.

Problem Possible cause Remedy

Cannot turn power on. 1) Blown fuse. 1) Replace blown fuse.
2) Mains voltage/polarity. 2) Correct wiring and input voltage.
3) Power supply board 3) Replace the faulty power supply
(PWR1 and/or PWR2) in- board.
side the Processor unit.
Brilliance adjusted but MAIN board - inside the Pro- Replace MAIN board.
no picture. cessor unit.
Antenna not rotating. 1) Antenna drive mecha- 1) Replace antenna drive mechanism.
nism
2) Defective antenna drive 2) Press relay reset button.
motor relay
Data and marks not MAIN board - inside the Pro- Replace MAIN board.
displayed in Transmit cessor unit.
status
Adjust GAIN with A/C 1) IF amplifier 1) Replace IF amplifier.
SEA set at minimum. 2) Signal cable between an- 2) Check continuity and isolation of coax-
Marks and indications tenna and processor unit ial cable.
appear but no noise or Note: Disconnect the plug and lugs at
echo. both ends of coaxial cable before
checking it by ohmmeter.

6-5
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Possible cause Remedy

Marks, indications and 1) TX high voltage protec- 1) Reset power to restore normal opera-
noise appear but no tion circuit has activated. tion.
echo (transmission 2) Magnetron 2) Check magnetron current.
leak representing own Replace magnetron.
ship position is absent) 3) MD board inside the an- 3) Replace MD board.
tenna.
4) SPU board inside the an- 4) Replace SPU board.
tenna.
Picture not updated or 1) Rotary Encoder inside 1) Check the connection of signal cables.
picture freeze-up the antenna unit. 2) Replace SPU board.
2) SPU board inside the an-
tenna.
3) Video freeze-up 3) Turn the radar off, then on.
Incorrect orientation of 1) Rotary Encoder inside If the message “NO HEADLINE SIGNAL”
picture the antenna unit appears in orange letters inside the alert
2) SPU board inside the an- box, the heading signal is lost or interrupt-
tenna unit. ed. Check the heading line signal cable
3) MTR-DRV board inside and board connections. If there is no prob-
the antenna unit. lem with cables or connections, replace
the faulty board.
Cannot operate radar MAIN board - inside the Pro- Replace MAIN board.
from on-screen boxes cessor unit.
Radar is properly tuned 1) Deteriorated magnetron 1) With the radar transmitting on 48 nm
but poor sensitivity range, check magnetron current. If
current is below normal, magnetron
may be defective. Replace it.
2) Detuned MIC 2) Check MIC detecting current. If it is be-
low normal value, MIC may have be-
come detuned. MIC must be tuned.
3) Dirt on radiator face 3) Clean the radiator surface.
4) Water ingress to the 4) Remove water from the feeder line.
waveguide or other feed-
er line
5) Second trace echo rejec- 5) Disable the second-trace echo rejector
tion is ON referring to section 1.29.
Range changed but ra- 1) Defective range key 1) Adjust the range with the control unit,
dar picture not chang- or the [RANGE] box several times. If
ing unsuccessful, replacement of keypad
may be required.
2) SPU board inside the an- 2) Replace SPU board.
tenna. 3) Turn off and on radar.
3) Video freeze up
Interference rejector is SPU board inside the anten- Replace SPU board.
inoperative (interfer- na.
ence rejection level not
displayed)
Echo stretch is ineffec- SPU board inside the anten- Replace SPU board.
tive (neither ES1, ES2 na.
nor ES3 is displayed)
Range rings are not 1) Adjust the brilliance of 1) Replace associated circuit board if un-
displayed range rings on the BRILL successful.
menu to see if intensity is
increased
2) MAIN board 2) Replace MAIN board.

6-6
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Possible cause Remedy

Poor discrimination in Sea clutter control not func- Improper setting of A/C SEA. If A/C SEA is
range tioning properly seen only at very close range, suspect in-
accurate frequency of reference oscillator.
True motion orientation 1) Incorrect menu setting 1) Referring to section 1.30, select TM
not working correctly orientation mode.
2) Speed entry incorrect 2) Enter correct own ship speed referring
to section 1.12.
3) TM display inaccurate 3) Make sure that speed and compass in-
puts are accurate.
Target not tracked cor- Poor definition of targets in Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN referring to
rectly sea clutter section 1.20 and section 1.21.
Buttons on trackball Trackball module Replace trackball module.
module operated but
no response
Picture is not updated 1) Slots in rotating disc in 1) Remove foreign material (carbon,
with each sweep. antenna unit grease, etc.) from slots.
2) Motor brushes 2) Replace motor brushes if they are
shorter than 6 - 7 mm.

6.7 Diagnostics
A diagnostic test program is provided to test major circuit boards in the control unit,
processor unit and card I/F unit. Note that the normal radar picture is lost during this
test.
Proceed as follows to execute the diagnostic test:

1. Open the [MAIN MENU].

2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS].
3. Select [7 TESTS].
4. Select [2 DIAGNOSTIC TEST]. The system begins a diagnostic test.
The Processor Unit is tested first and the test results appear after a few moments.

Processor Unit and

Control Unit
diagnostic test
results appear here.

You can save a screenshot to a SD Card if there is a SC Card inserted into the
Processor Unit. Press the F4 key three times to save a screenshot.

6-7
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

A keyboard test is available at the bottom of the test results, also. Press each key
on the control unit to highlight the corresponding area on-screen. Press the same
key again to remove the highlight.
5. Press the F1 key three times to show the results for antenna test.

Antenna diagnostic test

results appear here.

You can save a screenshot to a SD Card if there is a SD Card inserted into the
Processor Unit. Press the F4 key three times to save a screenshot.
6. Press the F1 key to close the test results and complete the test.

Diagnostic test results

The following table lists each test result along with the normal value range for each
item.

"OK" appears for normal operation. If "NG" (No Good) appears, corresponding com-
ponents may be defective.

Also, if a connected fan or PCB shows the check results as asterisks, it is an indication
that the fan or PCB has failed, or is disconnected.

If there are any component which are suspected to be defective, or any test does not
complete satisfactorily, consult your dealer for advice.

Normal value
Tested item
Magnetron Radar Solid State Radar
MAIN (Processor Unit) test
[PROGRAM No.] Shows the program version number.
[ROM] OK
[RAM] OK
[DIP SWITCH] Shows the DIP SWITCH settings.
[IP ADDRESS] Shows the IP address for the Processor Unit.
[SD CARD] OK
[SD CARD RP] (Not currently used)
[HSC] Shown only for systems with the optional High Speed Conversion kit.
[RMS] Shown only when Remote Maintenance Service is enabled.
[MAIN] [12V] 10.8 to 13.2 V
[5V] 4.7 to 5.3 V
[3.3V] 3.0 to 3.6 V

6-8
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Normal value
Tested item
Magnetron Radar Solid State Radar
[MAIN] [2.5V] 2.3 to 2.7 V
[1.8V] 1.6 to 2.0 V
[1.25V] 1.13 to 1.38 V
[1.2V] 1.0 to 1.3 V
[TEMP] -15 to +70°C
[FAN1] 3700 to 5700 rpm
[FAN2] 3700 to 5700 rpm
[FAN3] • X/S-Band radars with 24 rpm config: Not shown
• S-Band radars with 42 rpm (HSC) config: 3700 to 5700 rpm
[TB] [12V] 10.8 to 13.2 V
[3.3V] 3.0 to 3.6 V
[PWR] [P12V] 10.8 to 13.2 V
[P48V] 46 to 50 V
[P48 V CURRENT] 0 to 3 A
[MTR1] 45.1 to 51.3 V
[MTR2] • X/S-Band radars with 24 rpm config: Not shown
• S-Band radars with 42 rpm (HSC) config: 45.1 to 51.3 V
[TX HV] 500 to 570 V
RP 3.3V, TEMP, FAN (Not currently used)
SPU (Antenna)
[PROGRAM No.] Shows the program version number.
[ROM] OK
[RAM] OK
[DIP SWITCH] Shows the DIP SWITCH settings.
[BOARD REV] Shows the revision number for each PCB.
[IP ADDRESS] Shows the IP address for the Processor Unit.
[SPU] [TX TYPE] X-12kW/X-25kW/S-30kW S-Solid
[12V] 11.4 to 12.6 V
[5V] 4.75 to 5.25 V
[3.3V] 3.18 to 3.42 V
[2.5V] 2.4 to 2.6 V
[1.8V] 1.71 to 1.89 V
[1.25V] 1.19 to 1.31 V
[1.2V_1] 1.14 to 1.26 V
[1.2V_2] 1.14 to 1.26 V
[3.3V_A] 3.18 to 3.42 V
[-10V] -10.5 to -9.5 V "not connect"
[TX HV] 500 to 560 V "not connect"
[MAG HEATER • X-Band, 12 kW: "not connect"
VOL] 8.1 to 8.6 V or 6.8 to 7.3 V
• X-Band, 24 kW:
7.0 to 7.5 V or 5.7 to 6.2 V
• S-Band:
7.4 to 7.9 V or 6.3 to 6.8 V
[MAG HEATER • X-Band: 0.5 to 0.6 A "not connect"
CUR] • S-Band: 1.1 to 1.4 A
[IF 5V] 4.75 to 5.25 V "not connect"
[IF -10V] -10.5 to -9.5 V "not connect"
[MD 12V] 11.4 to 12.6 V "not connect"

6-9
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Normal value
Tested item
Magnetron Radar Solid State Radar
[SPU] [ANT SPEED] • 24 rpm antennas: 22 to 26 rpm
• 42 rpm antennas: 40 to 44 rpm
[MAG CURRENT] • X-Band: 5.0 to 12.0 "not connect"
• S-Band: 6.0 to 10.0
[TRIGGER FREQ] • STBY: 0 Hz
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[OFF], TT range*= 24NM:
S1: 2640 to 3360 Hz, S2: 2640 to 3360 Hz,
M1: 1320 to 1680 Hz, M2: 1060 to 1340 Hz,
M3: 880 to 1120 Hz, L: 530 to 670 Hz
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[OFF], TT range*= 32NM:
S1: 1940 to 2460 Hz, S2: 1940 to 2460 Hz,
M1: 1320 to 1680 Hz, M2: 1060 to 1340 Hz,
M3: 880 to 1120 Hz, L: 530-670
• [2ND ECHO REJ]=[ON]:
S1: 2640 to 3360 Hz, S2: 2640 to 3360 Hz,
M1: 440 to 560 Hz, M2: 440 to 560,
M3: 440 to 560 Hz, L: 440 to 560 Hz
[LNA MON] 0.5 to 1.5 V not connect
[TUNE IND] 2.0 to 3.0 V not connect
[INI TUNE IND] 2.0 to 3.0 V not connect
[IF FREQ] • Pulse length = [S1], [S2]: 0.0 MHz not connect
• Pulse length = other than the above
settings: 55.0 to 65.0 MHz
[FAN1 SPEED] 3000 to 4000 rpm not connect
[FAN2 SPEED] 3000 to 4000 rpm not connect
[TEMP] -40 to +70 °C
[V TRIG] 10.0 to 18.0 V not connect
[MTR] [TEMP] Ambient Temperature: less than +20 °C
[12V] 9 to 15 V
[MOTOR CUR- • X-Band, 24 rpm: 0.8 A • 24 rpm: 1.3 A
RENT] • X-Band, 42 rpm: 1.2 A • 42 rpm: 2 A
• S-Band, 24 rpm: 1.3 A
• S-Band, 42 rpm: 2 A
[MOTOR VOLT- 43 to 53 Volts (33 to 53 volts for antenna units installed on the fore-
AGE] mast.)
[MOTOR ROT 0 (STBY)/24/36/42
SPEED]
[ERROR STATUS] ffff
[PM] [12V] 9 to 15 Volts
[PLL STATUS] For X-Band (with board revision num- • PM activated: LOCK
ber 1 or earlier) and S-Band (with board • PM inactive: UN-
revision number 0): UNLOCK LOCK

For X-Band (with board revision num-

ber 2 or later) and S-Band (with board
revision number 1 or later):
• PM activated: LOCK
• PM inactive: UNLOCK

6-10
 6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.8 Sentence Monitor

You can check which sentences input to the radar.

1. Open the [MAIN MENU].

2. Select [9 INITIAL SETTINGS].
3. Select [7 TESTS].
4. Select [3 SENTENCE MONITOR].
5. Select the item you want to check.
All sentences input to the radar for the selected
item appear on the screen.
Press the F3 key to save the sentence informa-
tion to the SD Card.
Press the F4 key to save a screenshot to the SC
Card.
Note: If a SD Card is not connected to the Processor Unit, you cannot save sen-
tence information or screenshots.
6. Press the F1 key to close the sentence information.
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to view other sentence information as required.
8. Close the menu.

6-11
6. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

6.9 Fallback Arrangements

If the top priority sensor (for example EPFS1) cannot be used, this equipment auto-
matically uses the second priority sensor (for example, EPFS2) when multiple sensors
(EPFS1 and EPFS2 for example) are installed. When there is no fallback sensor avail-
able, each function is limited as follows:

Sensor Function limitations

Heading • The [HDG] indication reads "***.*°"
sensor • The orientation mode is automatically set to [HEAD-UP].
• TT, AIS, radar map and echo averaging are disabled.
Speed When [LOG(WT)] is selected:
sensor • The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order: EPFS(BT)
> LOG(BT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both EPFS(BT) and LOG(BT) cannot be
used.
When [LOG(BT)] is selected:
• The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order: EPFS(BT)
> LOG(WT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both EPFS(BT) and LOG(WT) cannot be
used.
When [EPFS(BT)] is selected:
• The sensor used is automatically switched in the following priority order: LOG(BT)
> LOG(WT).
• The SPD indication reads "***.* kn" when both LOG(BT) and LOG(WT) cannot be
used.
COG/SOG • When the EPFS sensor cannot be used, the values of COG and SOG are calculat-
sensor ed from HDG and LOG(BT).
• Additionally when the heading sensor cannot be used, the values of SOG is calcu-
lated from LOG(BT). The COG indication reads "***.*°".
Position • The POSN indication reads all asterisks.
sensor • AIS and radar map are disabled.

6-12
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

MENU key
(press)
or
MENU box
(click)
1 ECHO 2 CUSTOMIZED 2 INT REJECTOR (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
ECHO 3 ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
4 ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
5 TARGET ANALYZER (OFF, ON)*2
6 RAIN ECHO HATCHING (OFF, ON)*2
7 NOISE REJECTOR (OFF, ON)
8 VIDEO CONTRAST TYPE (1, 2, 3, 4, A, B, C)
9 PULSE LENGTH 2 0.5NM (S1, S2)
3 0.75NM (S1, S2, M1)
4 1.5NM (S1, S2, M1, M2)
5 3NM (S2, M1, M2, M3)
6 6NM (M1, M2, M3, L)
7 12NM (M1, M2, M3, L)
8 24NM (M2, M3, L)
Next page
2 CONDITION 2 STC CURVE (2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4.2)
3 STC RANGE (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10)
4 LOW LEVEL ECHO (0 to 8)
3 DEFAULT (NO, SAVE, USER, FACTORY)
4 ACE (OFF, ON)
3 2ND ECHO REJ (OFF, ON)
4 TUNING INTIALIZE (Requires antenna rotation)
5 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (OFF, ON, GRAPH ONLY)*1
6 PM ARC (2, 3, 5, 6)*1
7 SART (OFF, ON)
8 ECHO AREA (CIRCLE, WIDE, ALL)*2 *1: Options only available when
9 WIPER (OFF, 1, 2) PM function is installed.
*2: Shown for B-type only.
Next page
2 ACE 2 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT (1, 2, 3)
3 SUPPRESS SECTOR (START: 000° to 359°; ANGLE: 000° to 180°)
3 SELECT CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM1 (OFF, ON)
3 CUSTOM2 (OFF, ON)
4 CUSTOM3 (OFF, ON)
5 NEAR (OFF, ON)
6 FAR (OFF, ON)
7 NEAR BUOY (OFF, ON)
8 FAR BUOY (OFF, ON)
9 ROUGH SEA (OFF, ON)
Next page
2 SHIP (OFF, ON)
3 HARBOR (OFF, ON)
4 BIRD (OFF, ON)
5 COAST (OFF, ON)
1 2

AP-1
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1 2
4 TRAILS 2 TRAIL MODE (REL, TRUE)
3 TRAIL GRADATION (SINGLE, MULTI)
4 TRAIL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT, YEL)*1
5 TRAIL LEVEL (1, 2, 3, 4)
6 OS TRAIL (OFF, ON)
7 SUPPRESS AROUND OS (OFF, ON)
8 NARROW TRAIL (OFF, 1, 2)*1
9 HIDE LAND TRAILS (T) (OFF, 1, 2)*1
0 HIDE LAND TRAILS (R) (OFF, 1, 2)*1
5 BERTHING STC (OFF, ON)
6 EAV EMPH-FAST TGT (OFF, ON)
2 MARKS 2 OWN SHIP MARK (MINIMIZED, SCALED)
3 STERN MARK (OFF, ON)
4 DROP MARK (OFF, ON)
5 RADAR MAP 2 ORIGIN MARK STAB (GND, SEA)
3 MARK TYPE (ORIGIN MARK(No.), ORIGIN MARK(SYM),
MAP MARK, WP 1~50, WP 51~100,
WP 101~150, WP 151~198, OWN SHIP SHAPE)
4 MARK POSITION (CURSOR, OS, L/L)
Display only (used marks/max. marks) RADAR MAP, OWN TRACK,
TGT TRACK*4
Next page
2 MAP DISPLAY (OFF, ON)
3 MARK COLOR (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)*1
6 BARGE MARK*2 2 BARGE MARK DISPLAY (OFF, ON)
3 BARGE SIZE (LENGTH: 000ft to 999ft; WIDTH: 000ft to 999ft)
4 BARGE ARRANGEMENT
6 ECDIS MARKS 2 USER CHART (OFF, ON)
DISPLAY*3 3 CURVED EBL (OFF, ON)
4 CHART SYMBOL (OFF, ON)
5 NOTE BOOK (OFF, ON, DISPLAY)
6 ROUTE (OFF, CENT, ALL)
7 PREDICTOR (OFF, ON)
7 TRACKS 2 OWN TRACK 2 DISPLAY OWN TRACK (OFF, ON)
3 SAVE INTERVAL (OFF, DRAW ONLY, 10s, 30s,
1min, 2min, 3min, 6min, 15min)
4 OWN TRACK COLOR
(RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)*4
4
3 TARGET TRACK* 2 DISPLAY TARGET TRACK (OFF, ON)
*1: Shown for B-type only. 3 SAVE INTERVAL (OFF, DRAW ONLY, 10s,
*2: Shown when INS is set to 30s, 1min, 2min, 3min, 6min, 15min)
OFF only. 4 TARGET TRACK COLOR
*3: Shown when INS is set to (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA, MAG, WHT)
SERIAL or LAN only. 5 AUTO TARGET TRACK (OFF, ON)
*4: Shown for A-type/B-type only.
8 DELETE DATA 2 ALL MARKS (NO, YES)
3 ALL WAYPOINTS (NO, YES)
4 ALL NAVLINES (NO, YES)
5 OS TRACK-COLOR/TIME (RED*4, GRN*4, BLU*4, YEL*4,
CYA*4, MAG*4, WHT*4, 30%, 50%, 80%, ALL)
6 TGT TRACK-COLOR/TIME (RED, GRN, BLU, YEL, CYA,
MAG, WHT, 30%, 50%, 80%, ALL)*4
7 OS TRACK-AREA (2POINTS, AREA)*1
8 TGT TRACK-AREA (2POINTS, AREA)*1
1 2 (Continued on next page)

AP-2
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1 2
9 RADAR MAP DISPLAY 2 MARK (OFF, ON)
3 BUOY (OFF, ON)
4 DANGER (OFF, ON)
5 COAST LINE (OFF, ON)
6 CONTOUR LINE (OFF, ON)
7 NAV LINE (OFF, ON)
Next page 8 PROHIBITED AREA (OFF, ON)
2 GRID (OFF, ON)
3 NAV TOOLS 2 PI LINES 2 PI LINE BEARING (REL, TRUE)*1
3 SET MAXIMUM PI LINES (1, 2, 3, 6)
4 PI LINE MODE (PARALLEL, PERPENDIC)
5 RESET PI LINES
6 TRUNC RANGE1 (OFF, ON; 0.000NM to 24.000NM)
7 TRUNC RANGE2 (OFF, ON; 0.000NM to 24.000NM)
3 EBL • VRM • 2 EBL1 (REL, TRUE)
CURSOR SET*1 3 EBL2 (REL, TRUE)
4 VRM1 (NM, km, SM, kyd)
5 VRM2 (NM, km, SM, kyd)
6 EBL OFFSET BASE (STAB GND, STAB HDG,
STAB NORTH)
7 VRM TTG (OFF, 1, 2, 1and2)
*1: Shown for 8 VRM OFFSET (OFF, LINK EBL)
B-type only. 9 CURSOR 2 CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE)
*2: Shown for
3 CURSOR RANGE (NM, km, SM, kyd)
IMO/A/R
types only. 4 CURSOR SIZE (SMALL, LARGE)
*3: Shown for 5 CURSOR L/L ALIGN (OFF, ON)
A/B-types 3 EBL • VRM • 2 EBL OFFSET BASE (STAB GND, STAB HDG,
only. CURSOR SET*2 STAB NORTH)
3 VRM TTG (OFF, 1, 2, 1and2)
4 VRM OFFSET (OFF, LINK EBL)
5 EBL•CURSOR BEARING (REL, TRUE)
6 CURSOR L/L ALIGN (OFF, ON)
4 RANGE RINGS (OFF, ON)
4 ALERTS 2 WATCH ALERT (OFF, 6min, 10min, 12min, 15min, 20min)
3 ALERT VOLUME (OFF*3, LOW, MID, HIGH)
4 ANCHOR WATCH (OFF, ON; 0.00NM to 9.99NM)
5 TARGET ALARM 2 ALR1 MODE (IN, OUT)
3 ALR2 MODE (IN, OUT)
4 LEVEL (1, 2, 3, 4)
5 TT•AIS 2 ACQUISITION 2 AZ/ALR SELECT (ACQUISITION ZONE, TARGET ALARM ZONE)
ZONE 3 TGT TYPE TO ACQUIRE (TT AND AIS, TT ONLY)*1
4 AZ STABILIZATION (STAB HDG, STAB NORTH)
5 AZ POLYGON (OFF, STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB
NORTH, AROUND CHECK AREA*1)
6 CHECK AREA SETTING (PORT, STBD, BOW, STERN;
0.0NM to 16.0NM, 1.0NM)*1
3 TRIAL 2 TRIAL MANEUVER (OFF, STATIC, DYNAMIC)
MANEUVER 3 TRIAL SPEED RATE (0kn to 99kn, 0.00kn/s to 9.99kn/s)
4 TRIAL TURN RATE (0kn to 99kn, 0.00kn/s to 9.99kn/s)
5 TRIAL TARGET DATA (ACTUAL, TRIAL)*3

1 2
(Continued on next page)

AP-3
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

1 2
4 TT•AIS 2 TT•AIS SYMBOL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT)
SYMBOL 3 ATON SYMBOL COLOR (GRN, BLU, CYA, MAG, WHT)
4 AIS ROT TAG LIMIT (000.0°/min to 720.0°/min)
5 TT•AIS PAST POSN POINTS (5, 10)
6 AIS SCALED SYMBOL (OFF, ON)
7 TT POP UP INFO (OFF, ON)
8 AIS POP UP INFO (OFF, ON)
5 AIS 2 SLEEP ALL TARGETS (NO, YES)
3 AUTO DISP MESSAGE (OFF, ON)
4 SHOW RECEIVED MSGS
5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE 2 ADDRESS TYPE (ADDRESSED, BROADCAST)
3 MESSAGE TYPE (SAFETY, BINARY)
4 MMSI NO. (000000000 to 999999999)
5 CHANNEL (A, B, A or B, A and B)
Next page
2 OPEN FILE
3 SAVE FILE
4 EDIT
5 TRANSMIT MESSAGE
6 VOYAGE DATA (NAV STATUS, ETA, DESTINATION, DRAUGHT, PERSONS)
7 OWN SHIP DATA (NAME, CALLSIGN, POSTION, COG, SOG, HDG, ROT,
POSN SENSOR & QUALITY, MMSI No., IMO No., SHIP DIMENSIONS, EXTERNAL
EPFS ANTENNA LOCATION, AIS SOFTWARE VERSION, CARGO TYPE)
8 AIS ALERT MESSAGES
9 CPA AUTO ACTIVATE 2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON; 00NM to 99NM)
3 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON; 0.0kn to 9.9kn; 1.0kn)
Next page 4 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)*2
2 AIS DISP FILTER 2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON; 00NM to 99NM, 12NM)
3 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON; 0.0kn to 9.9kn, 1.0kn)
*1: Shown for 4 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)*1
B-type only.
*2: Not shown 5 EXCEPT BASE STATION (OFF, ON)
for R-type. 6 EXCEPT PHYSICAL ATON (OFF, ON)
7 EXCEPT VIRTUAL ATON (OFF, ON)
3 AIS LOST TGT FILTER 2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON; 00NM to 99NM,
12NM)
3 MIN SHIP SPEED (OFF, ON; 0.0kn to
9.9kn, 1.0kn)
4 EXCEPT CLASS B (OFF, ON)*2
6 TT 2 TT SELECT (MANUAL 100, MANUAL 75•AUTO 25, MANUAL
50•AUTO 50, MANUAL 25•AUTO 75, AUTO 100)
3 ALL CANCEL (NO, YES)
4 DISP REF TGT VECTOR (OFF, ON)
5 TARGET NAME FUNCTION (OFF, ON)*1
6 TARGET PRESETS (PRESET1 to PRESET10)*1
7 TT LOST TGT FILTER 2 MAX RANGE (OFF, ON; 00NM to 99NM, 12NM)
7 TARGET ASSOCIATION 2 ASSOCIATION TGT TYPE (OFF, AIS, TT)
3 GAP (0.000NM to 0.050NM)
4 RANGE (0.000NM to 0.100NM)
5 BEARING (0.0° to 9.9º)
6 SPEED (0.0kn to 6.0kn)
7 COURSE (00.0° to 25.0º)
1 (Continued on next page)

AP-4
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1 (Continued from previous page)

6 FILES 2 SAVE DATA (MARK/LINE, NAVLINE/WPT, SETTING DATA, INSTALL DATA,

OWN TRACK, TARGET TRACK*1, ALERT HISTORY, LOG FILE)
3 LOAD DATA (MARK/LINE, NAVLINE/WPT, SETTING DATA, INSTALL DATA,
OWN TRACK, TARGET TRACK*1)
4 DELETE DATA (MARK/LINE, NAVLINE/WPT, SETTING DATA, INSTALL DATA, OWN
TRACK, TARGET TRACK*1, ALERT HISTORY, LOG FILE)
5 REMOVE EXT MEDIA (NO, YES)
7 INFORMATION 2 OWN SHIP 2 HDG 2 HDG SOURCE (GYRO1, GYRO2)
BOX INFO 3 SPEED 2 SHIP SPEED (LOG(BT), LOG(WT), EPFS,
MANUAL, REF, ECDIS)
3 MANUAL SPEED INPUT (0.0kn to 9.9kn)
4 SET DRIFT (OFF, ON)
4 OWN SHIP 2 POSITION SOURCE (EPFS1, EPFS2,
POSN LAN, ECDIS, DEAD RECKONING)
3 MANUAL L/L INPUT
(00°00.000 to 90°00.00 N/S,
000°00.000 to 180°00.000 E/W)
4 SIO DATA LAN OUTPUT (OFF, ON)
POSITIONING SYSTEM
5 DATE 2 DATE-TIME (UTC, LOCAL)
3 ADJUST LOCAL TIME (-14:00 to +14:00; +00:00)
3 DISPLAY NAV DATA (OFF, ON)
4 NAV DATA SETTINGS 2 DEPTH (OFF, ON; m, ft)
3 DEPTH GRAPH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100,
200, 500)
4 DEPTH MARK (000 to 500)
5 CURRENT (OFF, ON)
6 WIND (OFF, ON; kn, m/s)
7 WIND REFERENCE (APPARENT, NORTH,
Next page THEORETICAL)
2 TEMPERATURE (OFF, ON; ºC, ºF)
3 WPT DATA (OFF, REL, TRUE)
5 ZOOM (OFF, 2TIMES, 3TIMES)
6 ZOOM DISPLAY (STAB GND, STAB HDG, STAB NORTH, TT TRACK)
7 TARGET DATA (1BOX, 2BOX, 3BOX, LARGE)
8 NAV LINE•WPT 2 NAV LINE DATA SOURCE (OFF, EXT DATA, INTERNAL DATA,
WPT MARK*1)
3 NAV LINE SELECT (Unselected, 01 to 30; FORWARD, REVERSE)
4 SKIP NEXT WPT
*1: Shown for 5 NAV LINE WIDTH (0.00NM to 9.99NM)
A/B-types only. 6 WPT SET 2 WPT No. SELECT (001 to 198)
*2: For R-types, max.
is 85°00.00. 3 WPT NAME (Blank, maximum 15 characters)
3
* : Shown for B-types 4 WPT L/L (00°00.000 to 85°00.00*2 N/S,
only. 000°00.000 to 180°00.000 E/W)
5 CLEAR DATA (NO, YES)
7 WPT LIST
8 NAV LINE SET 2 SELECT NAV LINE (01 to 30, (blank))
3 NAV LINE NAME (Blank, maximum 15 characters)
4 NAV LINE ENTRY
5 CLEAR DATA (NO, YES)
9 NAV LINE LIST
Next page
2 WPT ARRIVAL DIST (OFF, ON*3; 0.00NM to 9.99NM)
3 TURNING LINE (OFF, ON, REVISED)
1 4 DISPLAY WPT No. (OFF, ON)
(Continued on next page) 5 DISPLAY WPT NAME (OFF, ON)

AP-5
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1 (Continued from previous page)

9 INITIAL SETTINGS 2 BRILL 2 ECHO COLOR (YEL, GRN, WHT, AMB*1, M-GRN*1, M-CYA*1)
3 PALETTE (DAY-GRY, DAY-BLU, DAY-GRN, DUSK-GRY,
DUSK-BLU, DUSK-GRN, NIGHT-GRY, NIGHT-BLU)
4 CONTROL PANEL (Slide-bar)
5 CHARACTERS (Slide-bar)
*1: Shown for 6 CURSOR (Slide-bar)
B-type only. 7 ECHOES (Slide-bar)
8 TRAILS (Slide-bar)
9 HL (Slide-bar)
Next page
2 RANGE RINGS (Slide-bar)
3 BEARING CURSOR (Slide-bar)
4 EBL (Slide-bar)
5 VRM (Slide-bar)
6 PI LINES (Slide-bar)
7 TT SYMBOLS (Slide-bar)
8 AIS SYMBOLS (Slide-bar)
9 L/L GRID (Slide-bar)
0 MARKS (Slide-bar)
3 SELECT ANTENNA (Details for the antennas currently
in use are displayed here)
2 DISP1 ANTx (MASTER, SLAVE)*2
3 DISP2 ANTx (MASTER, SLAVE)*2
4 DISP3 ANTx (MASTER, SLAVE)*2
*2: “x” indicates
5 DISP4 ANTx (MASTER, SLAVE)*2
antenna number
(assigned at 9 SAVE INTER-SWITCH (NO, YES)
installation). 0 CLEAR INTER-SWITCH (NO, YES)
4 USER SETTINGS 2 PILOT SETTING (NO, YES)
3 USER 1 SAVE (NO, YES)
4 USER 1 LOAD (NO, YES)
5 USER 2 SAVE (NO, YES)
6 USER 2 LOAD (NO, YES)
5 OPERATION 2 MOUSE WHEEL DIR (NORMAL, REVERSE)
3 KEY BEEP (OFF, LOW, MID, HIGH)
4 OWN SHIP VECTOR (OFF, HDG, COURSE)
*3: Shown for
5 STERN UP RM (OFF, ON)*3
A/B-types only.
6 SHUTTLE FERRY (OFF, MODE1, MODE2)
7 ICING PREVENTION (OFF, ON)
8 HDG FINE ADJUST (-9.9º to +9.9º; +0.0º)
6 FUNCTION 2 F1 2 ECHO 2 (CUSTOM SELECT, IR, ES, EAV,
KEY SETUP NOISE REJ, ANT SELECT, PULSE
LENGTH, AUTO-SEA, AUTO-RAIN,
TUNE SELECT, 2ND ECHO REJ,
STC CURVE, STC RANGE, PM,
SART, ECHO TRAIL, TRAIL T/R,
WIPER*1, ACE, ACE HIGH
SENSITIVITY)
3 STD 2 (ALERT ACK, STBY TX, HL OFF, EBL
KEY OFFSET,
ORIENTATION-MODE,OFFCENTER,
CU-TM RESET, PI LINE, VECTOR
TIME, VECTOR MODE, TARGET LIST,
BRILL, MARK, MENU, RANGE UP,
RANGE DOWN, ACQ, TARGET DATA,
TARGET CANCEL)
(Continued on next page) 2 3 4

AP-6
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

(Continued from previous page)

2 3 4
4 TT•AIS 2 (TT-DISP, AIS-DISP, TARGET
DATA & ACQ, PAST POSN
INTERVAL, REF MARK, CPA LIMIT,
CPA, TCPA, AZ1, AZ2, TARGET LIST
SORT, TRIAL MANEUVER, TRIAL
MODE CHANGE, ASSOCIATION,
AIS MESSAGE, AIS SCALED
SYMBOL)
5 DELETE 2 (MARK DELETE, MARK ALL
DATA DELETE, OWN TRK DELETE,
OWN TRK ALL DELETE, TGT
TRK DELETE*1 , TGT TRK ALL
DELETE*1)
6 OPERATION 2 (BUZZER STOP, ECHO
AREA*1, ECHO COLOR,
PALETTE, RING(ON/OFF),
ZOOM, MOB, ALARM1,
ALARM2, WATCH ALERT
RESET, TLL*1, MAP ALIGN,
ANCOR WATCH, DROP
MARK, SCREEN SHOT)
3 F2 (Same options as F1, default: ES)
4 F3 (Same options as F1, default: AUTO-SEA)
5 F4 (Same options as F1, default: AUTO-RAIN)
7 TESTS 2 DIAGNOSTIC TEST
3 SENTENCE 2 HDG
*1: Shown for B-type only. MONITOR 3 GPS
*2: Requires antenna 4 LOG
rotation. 5 AIS
6 AMS
7 ECDIS
8 LAN1
9 LAN2
4 TT SIMULATION MODE*2

CURSOR MENU (Right-click the operational display area to show this menu)
2 ↓ (scrolls selection cursor downwards)
(TARGET DATA / ACQ, TARGET CANCEL, TT TGT DATA / ACQ, REF MARK, EBL
OFFSET, OFF CENTER, ZOOM, TARGET TRACK ON, TARGET TRACK OFF,
MARK DELETE, OWN TRACK DELETE, TGT TRACK DELETE, MAP ALIGN, TRAIL
ERASER)
8 ↑ (scrolls selection cursor upwards)
Next page
2 TGT DATA/ACQ SETTING (ANY, TT ONLY, AIS ONLY)
3 TGT CANCEL SETTING (ANY, TT ONLY, AIS ONLY)

AP-7
APPENDIX 2 LONGITUDE ERROR TA-
BLE (96 NM SCALE)
The longitude lines concentrate on the north pole and south pole, namely, 1 nm is equivalent to 1
minute at 0 degree latitude, 2 minutes at 60 degrees latitude, 3 minutes at 70 degrees latitude and
so on. For this reason, a longitude error occurs on the radar display.

For example, when own ship is at 60°N and 135°E, even if the cursor indication is 62°N and 139°E,
the real cursor position is deviated to the left (west) side. The table below shows the longitude er-
ror, represented from 0° to 90° at 96 nm from the radar center (own ship).

Real cursor position Real cursor position

R: Error
62°N °N
Cursor position Cursor position
indicated indicated

96 nm
q

60°N LAT °E
135°E 139°E OS position

(nm)
q
LAT 5° 10° 15° 20° 25° 30° 35° 40° 45°

75° 0.2256 0.4444 0.6496 0.8350 0.9950 1.1248 1.2202 1.2786 1.2980
70° 0.21980213 0.43290201 0.632803 0.8134132 0.96923215 1.09551918 1.1884382 1.24517456 1.26402037
65° 0.21229339 0.41810678 0.61115946 0.78556318 0.93600295 1.05790007 1.14755221 1.20224625 1.22034042
60° 0.20316898 0.40012949 0.58486463 0.75173456 0.89565021 1.0122297 1.09793265 1.15016811 1.16737294
55° 0.19249832 0.37910698 0.55411863 0.71218478 0.84848102 0.95885565 1.03998717 1.08933651 1.10552105
50° 0.18036264 0.35519924 0.51915545 0.66721485 0.79485438 0.89818413 0.97406698 1.02021439 1.03525547
45° 0.16685429 0.32858822 0.48024119 0.61716701 0.73517843 0.83067689 0.90076355 0.94332783 0.95711098
40° 0.15207608 0.29947644 0.437672 0.56242216 0.66990732 0.7568477 0.82060477 0.85926197 0.87168229
35° 0.13614047 0.26808546 0.39177186 0.53339693 0.59953781 0.67725844 0.73420069 0.76865661 0.77961957
30° 0.11916876 0.2346542 0.3428901 0.44054055 0.52460545 0.59251483 0.6422089 0.67220131 0.68162348
25° 0.10129001 0.19943707 0.29139874 0.37433139 0.44568053 0.50326182 0.54532952 0.57063015 0.57843983
20° 0.08264056 0.16270211 0.23768966 0.30527334 0.36336372 0.41017869 0.44429984 0.46471615 0.47085389
15° 0.06336208 0.12472888 0.18217162 0.23389198 0.27828148 0.31397386 0.33988878 0.35526538 0.35968447
10° 0.04360137 0.0858064 0.12526714 0.16073056 0.19108136 0.21537949 0.23289096 0.24311083 0.24577764
5° 0.02350833 0.04623087 0.0674093 0.08634588 0.10242699 0.11514595 0.1241207 0.12910605 0.13000029
0° 0.00323737 0.0063035 0.00903844 0.01130406 0.01299309 0.01403609 0.0144058 0.0141187 0.01323356

AP-8
 APPENDIX 2 LONGITUDE ERROR TABLE (96 NM SCALE)

(nm)
q
LAT 50° 55° 60° 65° 70° 75° 80° 85° 90°

75° 1.2780 1.2192 1.1233 0.9933 0.8332 0.6479 0.4431 0.2249 0

70° 1.24442563 1.18701379 1.09356117 0.96694117 0.81103484 0.3061092 0.43117887 0.21881975 0
65° 1.20131324 1.14577786 1.05546143 0.93315023 0.78260251 0.60843159 0.41596331 0.21107193 0
60° 1.14905813 1.09582188 1.00932899 0.89225746 0.74821409 0.58162173 0.397582 0.20171772 0
55° 1.08805799 1.03752602 0.95551494 0.84457408 0.70813132 0.55038538 0.37617487 0.19082831 0
50° 1.0187708 0.97133397 0.89442885 0.79046297 0.66265924 0.51496026 0.35190481 0.17848659 0
45° 0.94174265 0.89774948 0.82653562 0.73033596 0.61214392 0.47561599 0.32495654 0.16478648 0
40° 0.85754099 0.81733258 0.75235195 0.66465066 0.55696981 0.43265198 0.29553516 0.14983224 0
35° 0.76681293 0.73069528 0.63744242 0.59390696 0.49755683 0.38639524 0.26386458 0.13373769 0
30° 0.67024897 0.63849695 0.58741521 0.51864327 0.43435714 0.33719779 0.23018583 0.11662531 0
25° 0.568584 0.54143927 0.49791741 0.43943239 0.36785173 0.28543407 0.19475522 0.09862535 0
20° 0.46259176 0.44026091 0.40463016 0.35687717 0.29854675 0.23149802 0.15784242 0.07987479 0
15° 0.35307892 0.3357319 0.30826343 0.2716059 0.22696965 0.17580013 0.11972833 0.06051633 0
10° 0.2487894 0.22864776 0.20955062 0.18426754 0.15366517 0.1187643 0.08070304 0.0406973 0
5° 0.12684572 0.11982348 0.10624302 0.09552679 0.0791912 0.04106355 0.04106355 0.02056855 0
0° 0.01184713 0.01008727 0.008104 0.00605903 0.00411455 0.00111154 0.00111154 0.00028325 0

AP-9
APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MES-
SAGES & MEANINGS
For ALF format alerts, the alert identifier (the first three digits of the alert code), is displayed on the
alert list and in the alert box. The alert instance (the last one or two digits of the alert code), is
transferred along with it's identifier to the connected Bridge Alert Management System. The table
below alert ID for ALF formats alerts, with the instance separated by a comma. ALR format alerts
have no instance assigned.

ALR ALF Priority &

Alert title Alert description
Alert ID Alert ID Category
- 52190,1 TARGET CAPACITY Caution
Message: "TT TARGET 95%(AUTO)"
Cat: B
Meaning: Automatically acquired tar-
get capacity has reached 95%.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Remove TT symbols manually.
523 190,2 TARGET CAPACITY Warning Message: "TT TARGET FULL(AUTO)"
Cat: A Meaning: Automatically acquired tar-
get capacity has reached 100%.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Remove TT symbols manually.
- 52190,3 TARGET CAPACITY Caution Message: "TT TARGET 95%(MAN)"
Cat: B Meaning: Manually acquired target ca-
pacity has reached 95%.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Remove TT symbols manually.
525 190,4 TARGET CAPACITY Warning Message: "TT TARGET FULL(MAN)"
Cat: A Meaning: Manually acquired target ca-
pacity has reached 100%.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Remove TT symbols manually.
- 52190,5 TARGET CAPACITY Caution Message: "AIS DISPLAY 95%"
Cat: B Meaning: AIS display capacity has
reached 95% (333 targets).
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Adjust [AIS DISP FILTER] settings to decrease the number
of targets displayed.
531 190,6 TARGET CAPACITY Warning Message: "AIS DISPLAY FULL"
Cat: A Meaning: AIS display capacity has
reached 100% (350 targets).
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Adjust [AIS DISP FILTER] settings to decrease the number
of targets displayed.
- 52190,8 TARGET CAPACITY Caution Message: "AIS CAPACITY FULL"
Cat: B Meaning: AIS capacity has reached
100% (1200 targets).
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Adjust [AIS DISP FILTER] settings to decrease the number
of targets displayed.
- 52190,9 TARGET CAPACITY Caution Message: "ACTIVE AIS 95%"
Cat: B Meaning: Active AIS target capacity
has reached 95% (48 targets).
Remedy: Press the Press the ALARM ACK key. Sleep all unnecessary AIS targets.
535 190,10 TARGET CAPACITY Warning Message: "ACTIVE AIS FULL"
Cat: A Meaning: Active AIS target capacity
has reached 100% (50 targets).
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Sleep all unnecessary AIS targets.

AP-10
 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS

ALR ALF Priority &

Alert title Alert description
Alert ID Alert ID Category
526 191,1 CPA/TCPA Alarm Message: "TT DANGER OF COLLI-
Cat: A SION"
Meaning: TT is within CPA/TCPA
threshold, danger of collision.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Take evasive action if necessary. Adjust CPA/TCPA settings.
536 191,2 CPA/TCPA Alarm Message: "AIS DANGER OF COLLI-
Cat: A SION"
Meaning: AIS target is within CPA/
TCPA threshold, danger of collision.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Take evasive action if necessary. Adjust CPA/TCPA settings.
521 192,1 NEW TARGET Warning Message: "TT NEW TARGET"
Cat: A Meaning: A new TT target has entered
the Acquisition Zone.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Confirm location of new target.
529 192,2 NEW TARGET Warning Message: "AIS NEW TARGET"
Cat: A Meaning: A new AIS target has en-
tered the Acquisition Zone.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Confirm location of new target.
527 193,1 LOST TARGET Warning Message: "TT TARGET LOST"
Cat: A Meaning: TT target is lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lost target indication (blinking in red) is removed.
528 193,2 LOST TARGET Warning Message: "REF TARGET LOST"
Cat: A Meaning: REF targets is lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lost target indication (blinking in red) is removed.
537 193,3 LOST TARGET Warning Message: "AIS TARGET LOST"
Cat: A Meaning: AIS target is lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lost target indication (blinking in red) is removed.
720 194,1 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "NO HEADLINE SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: Heading marker signal inter-
rupted/lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
721 194,2 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "NO AZIMUTH SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: Antenna signal is interrupt-
ed/lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
722 194,3 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "NO TRIGGER SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: Antenna trigger interrupted/
lost
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
723 194,4 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "NO VIDEO SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: Video signal interrupted/lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
70 194,5 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "CTRL UNIT COM ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: Keyboard (RCU-014/015/
016) signal interrupted/lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
782 194,6 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "PM COM ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: PM communication error.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.

AP-11
APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS

ALR ALF Priority &

Alert title Alert description
Alert ID Alert ID Category
48 194,7 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "TUNE ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: TUNE error due to faulty set-
tings or malfunction.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
727 194,8 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "RADAR ANT COM ER-
Cat: B ROR"
Meaning: Signal between processor
and antenna interrupted/lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
781 194,9 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "MTR-DRV COM ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: Signal between antenna’s
SPU and MTR-DRV interrupted/lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
783 194,10 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "RF-CONVERTER COM
Cat: B ERROR"
Meaning: Signal between antenna’s
SPU and RF-CONVERTER interrupt-
ed/lost.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore signal or rectify reason for signal loss.
784 194,11 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "LAN1 NETWORK ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: LAN1 IP address is use by
other equipment.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check IP settings and assign a unique IP address.
785 194,12 SYSTEM ERROR Warning Message: "LAN2 NETWORK ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: LAN1 IP address is use by
other equipment.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check IP settings and assign a unique IP address.
495 52495,1 ANCHOR WATCH Warning Message: "OUT OF ANCHOR
Cat: B WATCH ZONE"
Meaning: Ship position outside set an-
chor watch zone.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Confirm Own Ship location and adjust as necessary.
- 52540,1 AIS MSG Caution Message: "TRANSMIT ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: Unable to transmit AIS bina-
ry message.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check power to AIS unit.
450 52601,1 SENSOR ERROR Warning Message: "NO GYRO SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: No heading information re-
ceived from gyrocompass for five sec-
onds.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Match the on-screen indication with the actual gyrocompass.
278 52601,2 SENSOR ERROR*1 Warning/ Message: "NO LOG(WT) SINGAL"
Caution Meaning: No speed data received for
Cat: B five seconds when [LOG(WT)] is set as
speed reference.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check SDME sensor. Use a different sensor if necessary.
284 52601,3 SENSOR ERROR*2 Warning/ Message: "NO LOG(BT) SIGNAL"
Caution Meaning: No speed data received for
Cat: B thirty seconds when [LOG(BT)] is set
as speed reference.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check SDME sensor. Use a different sensor if necessary.

AP-12
 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS

ALR ALF Priority &

Alert title Alert description
Alert ID Alert ID Category
170 52601,4 SENSOR ERROR Warning Message: "NO POSITION SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: EPFS Error. No position data
received from EPFS device for thirty
seconds.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the signal. This indication cannot be erased if the
position signal is missing. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is restored.
469 52601,5 SENSOR ERROR Warning Message: "POSITION DATUM UN-
Cat: B KNOWN"
Meaning: DTM sentence not received
for thirty seconds, or erroneous data
received.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Use the WGS-84 datum.
272 52601,6 SENSOR ERROR Warning Message: "NO UTC SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: UTC error. No date or time
data received for thirty seconds. No
ZDA sentence input.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the signal to remove this indication.
- 52601,7 SENSOR ERROR Warning Message: "AIS COM ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: No AIS data received for thir-
ty seconds.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check power and connection to AIS unit.
279 52601,8 SENSOR ERROR Warning Message: "NO COG/SOG SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: EPFS Error. No COG/SOG
data received from EPFS device for
thirty seconds.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the signal. This indication cannot be erased if the
COG/SOG signal is missing. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is restored.
50 52601,9 SENSOR ERROR Warning Message: "ECDIS COM ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: No ECDIS data received for
thirty seconds.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check power and connection to ECDIS unit.
- 52602,1 SOURCE CHANGE Caution Message: "POSN SOURCE CHG"
Cat: B Meaning: Positioning sensor input lost,
automatically changed sensors.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is
restored or a different sensor is selected.
- 52602,2 SOURCE CHANGE Caution Message: "SPD SOURCE CHG"
Cat: B Meaning: Speed sensor input lost, au-
tomatically changed sensors.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is
restored or a different sensor is selected.
- 52602,3 SOURCE CHANGE Caution Message: "HDG SOURCE CHG"
Cat: B Meaning: Heading sensor input lost,
automatically changed sensors.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. The indication is automatically removed when the signal is
restored or a different sensor is selected.
740 52740,1 EXT RADAR ERROR Warning Message: "EXT RADAR NO SIGNAL"
Cat: B Meaning: Selected radar has an error.
(Only displayed when Interswitch is ac-
tive.)
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Restore the external radar to normal operating condition.

AP-13
APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS

ALR ALF Priority &

Alert title Alert description
Alert ID Alert ID Category
750 52740,2 EXT RADAR ERROR Warning Message: "EXT RADAR COM ER-
Cat: B ROR"
Meaning: Communication with exter-
nal radar interrupted or lost. (Only dis-
played when Interswitch is active.)
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check connection and power to the external radar.
790 52790,1 ARRIVAL Warning Message: "ARRIVED AT WPT"
Cat: B Meaning: Ship has entered the desti-
nation arrival alert zone.
Note: This alert appears on B-type ra-
dars only.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. No other action required.
791 52791,1 XTD LIMIT Warning Message: "XTD LIMIT EXCEEDED"
Cat: B Meaning: Cross-track error, ship is off-
course.
Note: This alert appears on B-type ra-
dars only.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check course and adjust as necessary.
950 52950,1 BAM COM ERROR*3 Caution Message: "BAM COM ERROR"
Cat: B Meaning: Communication with the
Bridge Alert Management System in-
terrupted.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check connection to BAM. Check power to BAM.
- 52001,1 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RPU:FAN1 SPD ERROR"
TICE Cat: B Meaning: FAN1 in the processor unit
has low RPM.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan.
- 52001,2 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RPU:FAN2 SPD ERROR"
TICE Cat: B Meaning: FAN2 in the processor unit
has low RPM.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan.
- 52001,3 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RPU:FAN3 SPD ERROR"
TICE Cat: B Meaning: FAN3 in the processor unit
has low RPM.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan.
- 52001,4 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RPU:HIGH TEMP"
TICE Cat: B Meaning: Temperature in the proces-
sor unit is above limit.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lower the temperature.
- 52001,5 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MONITOR:HIGH TEMP"
TICE Cat: B Meaning: Temperature in the monitor
unit is above limit.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lower the temperature.
- 52001,11 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MD TYPE MISMATCH"*4
TICE Cat: B Meaning: Unable to detect the MD
board bandwidth.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check connections to the antenna.

- 52001,12 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "PM TYPE MISMATCH"*4

TICE Cat: B Meaning: FAN1 in the processor unit
has low RPM.

AP-14
 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS

ALR ALF Priority &

Alert title Alert description
Alert ID Alert ID Category
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the fan.

- 52001,21 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:TEMP HIGH"

TICE Cat: B Meaning: MTR-DRV board tempera-
ture is above limit.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Lower the temperature.
- 52001,22 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:OVER CUR-
TICE Cat: B RENT"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board power in-
put from the motor is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the motor.
- 52001,23 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:MOTOR POW-
TICE Cat: B ER ERROR"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board motor’s
voltage is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the motor.
- 52001,24 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:P12V POWER
TICE Cat: B ERROR"
Meaning: Voltage in the +12V line of
the MTR-DRV motor is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power supply.
- 52001,25 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:HALL SENSOR
TICE Cat: B ERROR"
Meaning: Error in the hall sensor signal
detected by the MTR-DRV board.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the hall sensor.
- 52001,26 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:ANTENNA
TICE Cat: B LOCK"
Meaning: Antenna lock detected by the
MTR-DRV board.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Unlock the antenna.
- 52001,27 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:POWER SUP-
TICE Cat: B PLY ERROR"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board detected
an drop in power.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power supply.
- 52001,28 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:BRAKE RESIS-
TICE Cat: B TANCE ERROR"
Meaning: MTR-DRV board detected
an error in the brake resistance.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the antenna brake.

- 52001,29 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "MTR-DRV:OVERLOAD"

TICE Cat: B Meaning: MTR-DRV board detected
an overload.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the motor.
- 52001,31 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "PM:P12V POWER ER-
TICE Cat: B ROR"
Meaning: Voltage in the +12V line of
the PM board is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power supply.

AP-15
APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS

ALR ALF Priority &

Alert title Alert description
Alert ID Alert ID Category
- 52001,32 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "PM:PLL UNLOCK"
TICE Cat: B Meaning: PM board’s PLL is unlocked.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the PM board.
- 52001,41 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RF-CONV:P6V POWER
TICE Cat: B ERROR"*5
Meaning: Voltage in the +6V line of the
RF-Converter is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power.
- 52001,42 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RF-CONV:P48V POWER
TICE Cat: B ERROR"*5
Meaning: Voltage in the +6V line of the
RF-Converter is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the power.
- 52001,43 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RF-CONV:IF PLL UN-
TICE Cat: B LOCK"*5
Meaning: PLL lock on the IF side of the
RF-Converter is unlocked.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the RF-Converter.
- 52001,44 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RF-CONV:PLL UN-
TICE Cat: B LOCK"*5
Meaning: PLL lock on the RF side of
the RF-Converter is unlocked.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the RF-Converter.
- 52001,45 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RF-CONV:OUTPUT SIG-
TICE Cat: B NAL LEVEL ERROR"*5
Meaning: Signal output from the RF
Converter is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the RF-Converter.
- 52001,46 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "RF-CONV:INTPUT SIG-
TICE Cat: B NAL LEVEL ERROR"*5
Meaning: Signal input to the RF Con-
verter is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the RF-Converter.
- 52001,47 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "HPA:OUTPUT SIGNAL
TICE Cat: B LEVEL ERROR"*5
Meaning: Signal output from the HPA
board is outside rating.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the HPA board.
- 52001,48 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "HPA:OUTPUT PEAK CUR-
TICE Cat: B RENT ERROR"*5
Meaning: Peak current detected in the
signal output from the HPA board.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the HPA board.
- 52001,51 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "HPA:TEMP HIGH"*5
TICE Cat: B Meaning: Excessively high tempera-
ture detect on the HPA board.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the HPA board.
- 52001,52 HW STATUS NO- Caution Message: "VSWR ERROR"*5
TICE Cat: B Meaning: Abnormal VSWR detected
by the RF Converter.

AP-16
 APPENDIX 3 ALERT CODES, MESSAGES & MEANINGS

ALR ALF Priority &

Alert title Alert description
Alert ID Alert ID Category
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the antenna.
- 52002,01 HW STATUS ER- Warning Message: "RPU FAN1 NO ROTA-
ROR Cat: B TION"
Meaning: Fan1 in the processor unit is
stopped or disconnected.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit.
- 52002,02 HW STATUS ER- Warning Message: "RPU FAN2 NO ROTA-
ROR Cat: B TION"
Meaning: Fan2 in the processor unit is
stopped or disconnected.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit.
- 52002,03 HW STATUS ER- Warning Message: "RPU FAN3 NO ROTA-
ROR Cat: B TION"
Meaning: Fan3 in the processor unit is
stopped or disconnected.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Have a qualified technician check the processor unit.
- 52729,01 POSN INT ERROR Caution Message: "POSN INTERVAL ER-
Cat: B ROR"
Meaning: Positioning interval (Lat/Lon)
cycle has exceeded 10 seconds for a
period of three minutes or more.
Remedy: Press the ALARM ACK key. Check the output settings for the connected EPFS device.
Adjust output interval (cycle) as required.
*1: When LOG(WT) is not selected, the alert priority for this alert is changed to "Caution". Caution
level alerts are not shown on B-type radars.

*2: When LOG(BT) is not selected, the alert priority for this alert is changed to "Caution". Caution
level alerts are not shown on B-type radars.

*3: This alert is output only when [TYPE] is set to [R].

*4: This alert is output for magnetron radars only.

*5: This alert appears on S-BAND SSD radars only.

AP-17
APPENDIX 4 DATA COLOR AND
MEANING
Validity and integrity of input data (mode indicator)

Data color HDG L/L SPD COG/SOG

Normal color THS-A, E GNS-A, D * , F, P, R and (NAV status: S, V) VBW-A
1 VTG-A, D, P
(normal data) VHW RMC-A, D,
GGA-1, 2 *1, 3, 4, 5
HDT F, P, R and
GLL-A, D and (status: A)
(status: A)
RMC-A, D, F, P, R and (status: A) and (NAV
and (NAV
status: S, V)
status: S,
V).
Yellow-or- GNS-E, M, S VTG-E, M, S
ange color GGA-6, 7, 8 RMC-E, M,
(invalid data) GLL-E, M, S and (status: A) S, and (sta-
RMC-E, M, S and (Status: A) tus: A)
Yellow color GNS-A, D*1, F, P, R, and (NAV status: C, U) RMC-A, D,
(low integrity) RMC-A, D, F, P, R and (status: A) and (NAV F, P, R and
status: C, U) (status: A)
and (NAV
status: C, U)
***.* THS-M, V, S GNS-N VBW-V VTG-N
GGA-0 RMC-N (sta-
RMC-N, (status: V), (NAV status: N) tus: V)
GLL-N, (status: V)
*1: “Age of differential GPS data” in GGA and GNS sentences is ten seconds or higher. In this
case, ship’s latitude and longitude are displayed in yellow.

AP-18
APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS
A:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
ACK Acknowledge ACQ Acquire
Act Activate ACE Automatic Clutter Elimination
ANT Antenna AIS Automatic Identification System
AP Autopilot ATON Aids to Navigation
AUTO Automatic A/C RAIN Anti Clutter Rain
A/C SEA Anti Clutter Sea AID Aid
ALF ALF sentence ALR Alarm
AMB Amber AMS Alert Management System
APR April ARC Arc
AUG August
B:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
BLU Blue BCR Bow Crossing Range
BCT Bow Crossing Time BRG Bearing
BRILL Brilliance BT Bottom Tracking
C:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
CALC Calculated CALIB Calibrate
CH Channel CHG Change
CCRP Consistent Common Refer- CONT Continue
ence Point
CPA Closest Point of Approach CORR Corrected/Correction
CPU Central Processing Unit CRS Course
CTW Course Through the Water COG Course Over Ground
CU Course Up CYA Cyan
D:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
DTM Datum DEC December
deg degree(s) DEST Destination
DGPS Differential GPS DISP Display
DIST Distance DR Dead Reckoning

AP-19
APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS

E:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
E East EAV Echo Averaging
EBL Electronic Bearing Line ECDIS Electronic Chart Display and In-
formation System
EP Estimated Position EQUIP Equipment
ERR Error ES Echo Stretch
ES Echo Stretch ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD Estimated Time of Departure EXT External
F:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
FEB February FILT Filter/Filtered
FUNC Function
G:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
GAP Gap GC Great Circle
GND Ground GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and
Safety System
GPS Global Positioning System GRAD Gradation
GRN Green GRY Gray
GT Gross Tonnage
H:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
HD Heading HDG Heading
HL Heading Line HSC High Speed Craft
I:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
IBS Integrated Bridge System ID Identification
IMO International Maritime Or- INT Interval
ganization
INS Integrated Navigation Sys- INFO Information
tem
IR Interference Rejection IP ADDRESS Internet Protocol Address
J:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
JAN January JUN June
JUL July
L:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
L Long pulse LAT Latitude
LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LIM Limit L/L Latitude/Longitude
LOG Log LON Longitude
LOP Line Of Position

AP-20
 APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS

M:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
MAG Magnetic MAG Magenta
MAN Manual MAR March
MAX Maximum MAY May
MBS Main Bang Suppression M-CYA Multi Cyan
MD Modulator MENU Menu
MFDF Medium Frequency Direction MIC Monolithic Integrated Circuit
Finder
M-GRN Multi Green M1 Medium pulse 1
MID Middle M3 Medium pulse 3
M2 Medium pulse 2 MON Monday
MOB Man Over Board MSC Maritime Safety Committee
Msgs Messages MTR-DRV Motor Drive
N:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
N North NAV Navigation
NLT Not Less Than NMT Not More Than
NOV November NR Noise Rejector
O:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
OS Own Ship OCT October
P:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
PAST POSN Past Positions PC Personal Computer
PI Parallel Index Line PLT Palette
PLL Phase Locked loop PM Performance Monitor
PNK Pink POSN Position
PPI Plan Position Indicator
R:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
RACON Radar beacon RAD Radius
RAM Random Access Memory RAIN Anti Clutter Rain
RD Read RED Red
REF Reference/Echo Reference R, REL Relative
REJ Rejection RENC Regional ENC Co-ordinating Cen-
tre
RFC board RF Control board RL Rhumb Line
RM Relative Motion RNG Range
ROM Read Only Memory ROT Rate Of Turn
RTE Route RTGT Reference Target
RX Receive

AP-21
APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS

S:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
S South S1 Short pulse1
S2 Short pulse2 S57 IHO Special Publication 57
SAR Search and Rescue SART Search and Rescue Transponder
SD Secure Digital SEA Anti Clutter Sea
SEL Select SENC System ENC
SEP September SIO Serial Input Output
SOG Speed Over Ground SOLAS Safety of Life at Sea
SPD Speed SPU Signal Processing Unit board
STAB Stabilized STBD Starboard
STBY Standby STC Sensitivity time control
Std Standard STW Speed Through Water
SW Switch SYM Symbol
Symb Symbol(s)
T:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
T True TAG Tag
TCPA Time to CPA TGT Target
TM True Motion TPL Transferred Line Of Position
True-G True ground stabilized True-S True sea stabilized
TT Target Tracking/Tracked Target TTG Time To Go
TX Transmit
U:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
UNCAL Uncalibrated UTC Coordinated Universal Time
V:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
VECT Vector VRM Variable Range Marker
W:
Abbreviation Word Abbreviation Word
W West WAT Water
WGS World Geodetic System WHT White
W/O Without WOP Wheel Over Point
WP Waypoint WPT Waypoint
WR Write WT Water Tracking
WTC Water Tracking Current
X:
Abbreviation Word
XTE Cross Track Error
Y:
Abbreviation Word
YEL Yellow

AP-22
 APPENDIX 5 ABBREVIATIONS

Units of measurement
Unit abbreviation Meaning Unit abbreviation Meaning
deg Degree(s) ft Foot/feet
H Hour(s) km Kilometer(s)
KM Kilometer(s) kn Knot(s)
KYD Kiloyard(s) min Minute(s)
m Meter(s) MHz Megahertz
NM Nautical miles sec Second(s)
SM Statute mile(s) ° Degree(s)

AP-23
APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS
The pages following list the symbols which can be displayed on your radar. For B-type radars,
some symbol colors can be changed (see section 1.42.3).

General radar symbols

Symbol Name
Power Symbol
(on power switch)
X Own Ship Marker

Origin Marks

Fixed Range Rings

Variable Range Markers

(from left, VRM1, VRM2)

Electronic Bearing Lines

(from left EBL1, EBL2)

OS Mark

+ Cursor

| Heading Line

North Marker
Stern Marker
Barge Icon

Drop Mark

AP-24
 APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS

Radar map symbols (All radar types)

Symbol Name

Mark
Danger Highlight
Buoy
Buoy
Buoy
Buoy
Buoy

Danger Highlight

Mark

Mark

Mark

Mark

Mark
Mark
Mark
Nav Line (map)
Coastline
Contour
Prohibited Area
(cable) Danger Highlight

(w/line) Buoy

(w/line) Mark

(w/line) Mark

(w/line) Mark

AP-25
APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS

Radar map symbols (IMO type)

Symbol Name Symbol Name

Red Buoy Orange Mark
Green Buoy Orange Mark
Red Buoy Orange Mark
Green Buoy Magenta Navline (map)

Red Buoy White Coastline

Green Buoy Gray C o n t o u r L in e

Red Buoy Magenta Danger Highlight

Green Buoy Magenta (cable) Danger Highlight
Magenta Danger Highlight Orange Mark
Magenta Danger Highlight Orange Mark
TT/AIS symbols

TT symbols
Symbol Name

Acquired targets (from left: initial

acquisition, one minute after acquisition,
steady tracking, lost target, target
selected for data readout)

Acquisition zone

S Performance test
AIS symbols
Symbol Name

AIS symbols (from left: activated

target, ROT higher than preset
ROT, dangerous target, lost target,
A target selected for data display,
sleeping target, CPA/TCPA lost
target)

Other AIS symbols (from left, AIS

SART (ACTIVE), AIS SART (TEST),
AIS Base station, AIS search and
rescue (SAR) Aircraft, AIS Search and
∟shown in red when active Rescue (SAR) Vessel)

AIS message received

AP-26
 APPENDIX 6 SYMBOLS

AIS Physical AIS Virtual

AtoN Symbol AtoN Symbol Meaning

Basic shape

RACON

Emergency wreck mark

North cardinal mark

East cardinal mark

South cardinal mark

West cardinal mark

Port hand mark

Starboard hand mark

Isolated danger

Safe water

Special mark

Off position (Displayed with yellow

line and yellow text)

Light fail or at reduced range

(Displayed with yellow text)

RACON error
(Displayed with yellow text)

Missing
(Displayed with yellow dashed
line and yellow text)

AP-27
APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION
Control Unit RCU-014

Rear cover of RCU-014

Remove to show PCBｓ

Trackball PNL board

Module 03P9649
Buzzer
03P9362

Control unit RCU-015/RCU-016

KEY TB
Trackball board
Module 03P9650

AP-28
 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION

Processor Unit RPU-025

FAN
(attached to plate) TB board
03P9648

LAN Signal
Converter*
MAIN board
03P9652
FIL board
03P9545
(Under LAN Signal Converter

Remove top layer (inner chassis)

Fuse locations to show PWR1 and PWR2 boards.

RPU-025 front view

Remove caps to replace fuses

PWR1board
03P9543

PWR2 board
03P9527

FAN* FAN

*: The presence of this component depends on configuration purchased.

AP-29
APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION

Scanner Unit RSB-128 (FAR-2218(-BB), FAR-2318, FAR-2228(-BB), FAR-2328)

*: RTR-105 or RTR-106.
Depends on
configuration
purchased.

RF Unit*

Performance
Monitor Inside rear cover

Rear cover De-icer

board

Front
Cover

RF Unit* Inside front cover

Rear of RSB-128 De-icer

board
*: RTR-105 or RTR-106.
Depends on configuration
purchased.

AP-30
 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION

Motor

Fan
MTR-DRV board

Front view of RSB-128

(front cover removed)

RF Unit RTR-105/106 (FAR-2218(-BB), FAR-2318, FAR-2228(-BB), FAR-2328)

Remove cover to show

RF PWR board.
RTR-105: 03P9537A
RTR-106: 03P9537B

Base

RF TB board IF board
03P9570 03P9568A

MMIC board
03P9567
(located below MD board
Remove base to show IF board)
MD board and IF Board RTR-105: 03P9565A
(underside of unit). RTR-106: 03P9565B

AP-31
APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION

Scanner Unit RSB-129 (FAR-2238S(-BB), FAR-2338S)

Remove RF UNIT (RTR-107) to

Performance monitor access motor and MTR-DRV board.

RSB-129 RF Unit Motor

rear RTR-107
cover

MTR-DRV board
03P9560
(inside case)
Remove rear cover to show the RF UNIT (RTR-107)

RF Unit RTR-107 (FAR-2238S(-BB), FAR-2338S)

MIC board
03P9569
RF TB board
03P9570 Remove cover to
show IF board
03P9568B

Remove cover to
show RF PWR
board 03P9537C

Remove base to show

RTR-107 - right-side SPU board 03P9561

Remove covers to show:

MD board 03P2568B
Pulse Transformer 03TF00080
Curculator Fan
&
Magnetron Limiter
MG5223F
LAN
signal
coverter

RTR-107 - left-side RTR-107 rear-view

AP-32
 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION

Scanner Unit RSB-130 (FAR-2328W)

RSB-130 - rear view

RSB-130 front cover

RF TB board
03P9570
Inside front and rear cover

Performance MTR-DRV board

Monitor 03P9560
De-icer
RSB-130 rear cover
board

RSB-130 - front view

Motor

AP-33
APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION

RF Unit RTR-108 (FAR-2328W)

RTR-108 - Case cover removed

RF cover

Magentron
MG5436

Remove the RF
cover to show RF TB board
the magnetron. 03P9570
(inside case)

RTR-108 - RF Unit removed from case (top view)

Fan

Cover
Remove the fan and cover to
show RF PWR board 03P9537B.

RTR-108 - RF Unit removed from case (bottom view)

Remove covers Magnetron

to show SPU fan
SPU board
board 03P9561 03P9561

Remove the SPU board to show:

MD board 03P9565B
IF board 03P9568A
MMIC board 03P9567
Pulse Transformer 03TF00073

AP-34
 APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION

Scanner Unit RSB-131 (FAR-2338SW)

RSB-131 - rear view

RF TB board
03P9570
Performance
Monitor Motor
Rear cover
of RSB-131 MTR-DRV
board
03P9560

MD board
Remove the rear cover of 03P9565C Remove the RF TB and MD
the RSB-131 to show the boards to access the motor
MD and RF TB boards. and MTR-DRV board.

RF Unit RTR-109 (FAR-2338SW)

RTR-109 - case cover removed

Pulse transformer
03TF00080
MD board
03P9565C

Remove TX case cover to Magnetron

show magnetron, MD board MG5223F
and pulse transformer

RTR-109 - case cover removed

IF board
03P9568B
MIC
03P9569

Remove TX case
Remove IF cover to to access case fan
show IF board and MIC

AP-35
APPENDIX 7 PARTS LOCATION

RTR-109 - Top view, case cover removed

Remove SPU chassis to

access RF TB board and
RF TB board
SPU board.
03P9570
Remove to show
RF PWR board
03P9537C
Remove RF TB board and
SPU chassis cover to show
SPU board 03P9561

Scanner Unit RSB-133 (FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT)

Performance monitor

RSB-133 RF Unit
rear RTR-111
cover

Remove rear cover to

access the RF Unit.

RF Unit RTR-111 (FAR-2238S-NXT(-BB)/2338S-NXT)

RTR-111 - rear view RTR-111 - front view

RF TB board
03P9570

RF-CONV board
HPA board
03P9577
03P9552
RF PWR board
TR Module
03P9538
03P9555
03P9556
SPU board 03P9588
03P9546

AP-36
FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES

SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR

FAR-2xx8 SERIES
1 ANTENNA RADIATOR
1.1 Type Slotted waveguide array
1.2 Beam width and sidelobe attenuation
X-band S-band
Radiator type
XN12CF XN20CF XN24CF SN24CF SN30CF SN36CF
Length 4 ft 6.5 ft 8 ft 8 ft 10 ft 12 ft
Horizontal beam width 1.9° 1.23° 0.95° 2.6° 2.3° 1.8°
Vertical beam width 20° 25°
Sidelobe within ±10° -24 dB -28 dB -28 dB -24 dB
㸫
Sidelobe outside ±10° -30 dB -32 dB -32 dB -30 dB
Sidelobe within ±20° -23 dB -24 dB
㸫 㸫
Sidelobe outside ±20° -27 dB -30 dB
1.3 Polarization Horizontal
1.4 Rotation 24 rpm or 42 rpm (for high speed craft)
1.5 Wind load 100 kn relative
1.6 De-icer (option) On: when temperature goes down to 0°C
Off: when temperature goes up to +5°C

2 TRANSCEIVER
2.1 TX Frequency and modulation
X-band (Magnetron) 9410 MHz ±30 MHz, P0N
S-band (Magnetron) 3050 MHz ±30 MHz, P0N
S-band (Solid state) CH1 P0N: 3043.75 MHz/ Q0N: 3063.75 MHz ±5 MHz or
CH2 P0N: 3053.75 MHz/ Q0N: 3073.75 MHz ±5 MHz
2.2 Output power
FAR-2218(BB)/2318 12 kW
FAR-2228(BB)/2328/2328W 25 kW
FAR-2238S(BB)/2338S/2338SW 30 kW
FAR-2238S-NXT(BB)/2338S-NXT 250 W (equivalent to magnetron radar 30 kW)
2.3 Range scale, Pulse Repetition Rate and Pulselength
Magnetron radar: FAR-2218(BB)/2318/2228(BB)/2328/2328W/2238S(BB)/2338S/2338SW
PRR Range scale (NM)
(Hz approx.) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96
3000* S1
3000* S2
1500 M1
1200 M2
1000 M3
600** L
1/2/4/8/16/32 NM ranges: B-type radar only
*: 2200 Hz with TT range on 32 NM. **: 500 Hz on 96 NM range.

SP - 1 E3652S01E-M
FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES

Solid state radar: FAR-2238S-NXT(BB)/2338S-NXT

PRR Range scale (NM)
(Hz approx.) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96
2400* S1
2000* S2
1500 M1
1060 M2
1000 M3
600 L
1/2/4/8/16/32 NM ranges: B-type radar only
*: 1800 Hz (S1) and 1500 Hz (S2) with TT range on 32 NM.

3 PROCESSOR UNIT
3.1 Minimum range 22 m
3.2 Range discrimination 26 m
3.3 Range accuracy 1% of the maximum range of the scale in use or 10 m,
whichever is the greater
3.4 Bearing discrimination
X-band: 2.1° (XN12CF),1.5° (XN20CF), 1.2° (XN24CF),
S-band: 2.8° (SN24CF), 2.5° (SN30CF), 2.0° (SN36CF)
3.5 Bearing accuracy ±1°
3.6 Range scale and Range ring interval (RI)
Range (NM) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 48 96
RI (NM) 0.025 0.05 0.1 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 4 4 8 8 16
Number of rings 5 5 5 3 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 6
3.7 Warm-up time 3 min. approx. (solid state radar excluded)
3.8 Presentation mode Head-up, STAB head-up, Course-up, North-up (RM/TM), Stern-up
3.9 Marks Cursor, Range ring, Heading mark, North mark, Bearing mark,
Target trail, VRM, EBL, Acquisition zone
3.10 Target tracking (TT) Auto or manual acquisition: 100 targets in 24/32 NM
(range selected from menu for maintenance)
Auto tracking on all acquired targets,
Tracking: 5/10 pts on all activated targets
Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min
3.11 AIS Display capacity: 350 targets,
Tracking: 5/10 pts on all activated targets
Vector time: Off, 30 s, 1-60 min
3.12 Radar map 20,000 pts
3.13 Acquisition zone 2 zones
3.14 Interswitch function Selectable from menu

4 MONITOR UNIT
4.1 Screen type
MU-190 19-inch color LCD, 1280 x 1024 (SXGA)
MU-231 23.1-inch color LCD, 1600 x 1200 (UXGA)
MU-270W 27-inch color LCD, 1920 x 1200 (WUXGA)
4.2 Brightness
MU-190 450 cd/m2 typical
MU-231/270W 400 cd/m2 typical

SP - 2 E3652S01E-M
FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES

4.3 Visible distance

MU-190/270W 1.02 m nominal
MU-231 1.2 m nominal
4.4 Radar effective diameter
MU-190 282 mm
MU-231 340 mm
MU-270W 350 mm

5 INTERFACE
5.1 Number of port (processor unit)
Serial 7 ports (IEC61162-1/2: 2 ports, IEC61162-1: 4 ports, AD-10: 1 port)
Alarm output 6 ports: contact signal, load current 250mA
(Normal close/ open: 4, System fail: 1, Power fail: 1)
DVI output 2 ports: DVI-D, DVI-I or RGB picture data (for VDR)
(RGB resolution 1280x1024 (SXGA), 60.0Hz or
1440x900 (WXGA+), 59.9Hz)
LAN 2 ports: Ethernet 100Base-TX
RS-232C 1 port: brilliance control
Sub display (for ECDIS) 2 ports: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal
5.2 Data sentences (IEC61162-1/2)
Input ABK, ACK, ACN, ALR, BWC, BWR, CUR, DBK*1, DBS*1, DBT,
DDC, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, GNS, HBT, HDT*1, MTW, MWV,
OSD, RAQ, RMB, RMC, ROT, RTE, THS, VBW, VDM, VDO,
VDR, VHW, VSD, VTG, VWR*1, VWT*1, WPL, ZDA
Output ABM, ACK, AIQ, ALC, ALF, ALR, ARC, BBM, DDC, EVE, HBT,
OSD, RSD, TLB, TLL*2, TTD, TTM, VSD
*1: for retrofit. *2: for B-type radar
5.3 Ethernet interface for IEC61162-450
Port (LAN2) 100Base-TX, IPv4, 8P8C connector
Data sentences Same as 5.2 sentences
IEC61162-450 transmission group
Input MISC, TGTD, SATD, NAVD, TIME, PROP
Output Arbitrary (default: TGTD)
Multicast address 239.192.0.1 to 239.192.0.16
Destination port 60001 to 60016
Re-transmittable binary image transfer
Multicast address 239.192.0.26 to 239.192.0.30
Destination port 60026 to 60030
Other network function excepted IEC61162-450
SNMP, HTTP, Syslog, Furuno Management Protocol (FMP)
5.4 Output port on antenna unit
Sub display (for radar) 1 port: HD, BP, Trigger and Video signal

6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Processor unit (w/ antenna and transceiver unit)
FAR-2218/2318 100-230 VAC: 2.2-1.1 (2.8-1.4) A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
FAR-2228/2328/2328W 100-230 VAC: 2.6-1.3 (3.9-1.7) A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
FAR-2238S/2338S/2338SW 100-230 VAC: 3.9-1.7 (6.6-2.8) A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz

SP - 3 E3652S01E-M
FURUNO FAR-2xx8 SERIES

FAR-2238S-NXT/2338S-NXT 100-230 VAC: 3.0-1.5 (5.8-2.6) A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz

( ): 42 rpm
6.2 Monitor unit
MU-190 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
MU-231 100-230 VAC: 1.0-0.6 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
MU-270W 100-230 VAC: 0.7-0.4 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz
6.3 HUB (option) 100-230 VAC: 0.1 A max. 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
6.4 Transformer (RU-1803, option)
440 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
6.5 De-icer (option) 100-115/220-230 VAC: 2.6/1.3 A, 1 phase, 50-60 Hz

7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
7.1 Ambient temperature
Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C (storage: -25°C to +70°C)
Indoor units -15°C to +55°C (storage: -20°C to +70°C)
7.2 Relative humidity 95% or less at +40°C
7.3 Degree of protection
Antenna unit IP56
Processor/ monitor unit IP22
Transceiver/ control unit IP20
HUB IP20 (HUB-100), IP22 (HUB-3000)
7.4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4

8 UNIT COLOR
8.1 Antenna unit N9.5
8.2 Processor/ transceiver unit N2.5
8.3 Control/ monitor unit N2.5
8.4 HUB N3.0 (HUB-100), N2.5 (HUB-3000)
8.5 Radar console 2.5GY5/1.5 (standard), 7.5BG7/2, 2.5G7/2, N7.5

9 PERFORMANCE MONITOR
9.1 PM-32 (X-band)
Frequency range 9380 to 9440 MHz
Input power +18 dBm to +30 dBm
Output power -21 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -41 dBm (1st pulse min. output)
Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse)
9.2 PM-52A (S-band, MAG)
Frequency range 3040 to 3080 MHz
Input power +25 dBm to +40 dBm
Output power -38 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -58 dBm (1st pulse min. output)
Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse)
9.3 PM-52B (S-band, SSD)
Frequency range 3063.75 ±2 MHz
Input power +5 dBm to +25 dBm
Output power -52 dBm (1st pulse max. output), -72 dBm (1st pulse min. output)
Step level 8 to 12 dB (1st pulse to last pulse)

SP - 4 E3652S01E-M
INDEX
A AZ............................................................ 3-20
Acquisition zone ...................................... 3-20 B
acknowledge AZ alert............................ 3-21 Background colors .................................. 1-80
activate AZ1 .......................................... 3-20 Bearing measurement............................. 1-50
AZ shape ............................................... 3-22 EBL key ................................................. 1-50
AZ stabilization ...................................... 3-22 methods ................................................ 1-50
AZ2 polygon .......................................... 3-21 on-screen box ....................................... 1-51
change AZ reference............................. 3-22 true/relative ........................................... 1-51
sleep a zone .......................................... 3-21
AIS C
CPA/TCPA alarm .................................. 4-17 Color palettes .......................................... 1-80
pop-up info ............................................ 4-10 CPA/TCPA .............................................. 3-19
AIS lost target acknowledge alarm ............................... 3-19
filtering................................................... 4-15 set ranges .................................... 3-19, 4-17
AIS operation Customized echo
activate target.......................................... 4-7 editing.................................................... 1-41
auto activate function enable/disable ...... 4-7 restoring to factory default settings ....... 1-43
auto activate function limit settings ......... 4-8 restoring to saved settings .................... 1-42
controls.................................................... 4-2 D
CPA/TCPA ............................................ 4-17 Display mode .......................................... 1-95
create and save messages ................... 4-20 DRIFT...................................................... 3-18
display AIS alerts .................................. 4-22
display filter ............................................. 4-6 E
how to set up for a voyage ...................... 4-9 EBL collision assessment
how to sleep all targets ........................... 4-8 assess risk............................................. 1-52
how to sleep individual targets ................ 4-8 set reference point ................................ 1-53
how to sleep targets ................................ 4-8 Echo colors ............................................. 1-81
manually activate target .......................... 4-7 F
messages .............................................. 4-20 False echoes
own ship data ........................................ 4-19 multiple echoes ....................................... 2-3
ROT setting ........................................... 4-16 shadow sectors ....................................... 2-5
symbols and meanings ........................... 4-4 sidelobe echoes ...................................... 2-4
system messages ................................. 4-22 virtual images .......................................... 2-4
target data ............................................. 4-10
transmit messages ................................ 4-21 H
TT/AIS association ................................ 4-18 Heading line
view messages...................................... 4-21 how to hide the heading line ................. 1-74
AIS opertation I
lost target .............................................. 4-15 Interswitch
past position display .............................. 4-14 antenna information .............................. 1-84
past position orientation ........................ 4-15
L
past position stabilization ...................... 4-15
Lost target alert
symbol attributes ................................... 4-13
enable/disable alert ........................ 3-8, 4-16
symbol brilliance.................................... 4-13
symbol color .......................................... 4-13 M
AIS target data Maintenance
how to display AIS target data .............. 4-11 major parts life expectancy...................... 6-3
how to remove AIS target data.............. 4-12 periodic schedule .................................... 6-2
Alerts Marks
alert icons and meanings ...................... 1-93 barge mark ............................................ 1-76
alert list.................................................. 1-91 delete marks................................... 1-74, 5-5
descriptions ........................................... 1-91 hide heading line ................................... 1-74
Automatic Clutter Elimination how to inscribe a mark ......... 1-73, 1-77, 5-4
(ACE) function......................................... 1-36 INS mark ........................................ 1-75, 5-6

IN-1
INDEX

mark inscription position................. 1-72, 5-3 TTG to VRM ...........................................1-49

mark type ....................................... 1-71, 5-2 VRM key.................................................1-48
origin mark stabilization.................. 1-77, 5-4 VRM units...............................................1-49
own ship symbol settings .......................1-75 Range rings
radar map marks ....................................1-75 hide/show rings ......................................1-48
show/hide radar map marks...................1-75 RTE ............................................................2-7
show/hide stern mark .............................1-74
S
Menu operations ......................................1-10
SART .........................................................2-5
main menu .............................................1-10
bandwidth.................................................2-6
menu layers............................................1-10
description................................................2-5
N radar sidelobes.........................................2-7
Nav data range errors..............................................2-6
display settings.......................................1-81 show/hide SART marks............................2-6
enable/disable display............................1-82 SC card
Noise rejector ...........................................1-38 delete data .............................................1-98
NR ............................................................1-38 load data ................................................1-98
read data ................................................1-98
O
save data................................................1-98
Observation
Search and rescure transponder................2-5
bearing accuracy......................................2-3
SET ..........................................................3-18
false echoes .............................................2-3
SET DRIFT...............................................3-18
range measurement .................................2-3
Static trial maneuver ................................3-25
resolution..................................................2-2
Symbols
Off-center .................................................1-57
general radar symbols.........................AP-24
Orientation modes
IMO map radar symbols......................AP-26
description..............................................1-45
radar map............................................AP-25
selection .................................................1-45
radar(AIS symbols) .............................AP-26
P radar(TT symbols)...............................AP-26
Parallel index lines ...................................1-67
T
bearing and interval................................1-67
Target alarm.............................................1-65
bearing reference ...................................1-68
alarm settings.........................................1-66
displayed lines........................................1-67
deactivate...............................................1-66
length adjustment...................................1-69
mute .......................................................1-66
orientation ..............................................1-68
on/off ......................................................1-65
reset .......................................................1-68
setting.....................................................1-65
Past position
Target tracking
POSN plotting intervals ................ 3-17, 4-14
activate/deactivate tracking......................3-4
set points to display...................... 3-17, 4-15
controls.....................................................3-2
show/hide past POSN .................. 3-17, 4-14
display/remove target data.....................3-11
Past position display ................................3-17
echo referenced speed ............................3-5
PAST POSN ............................................3-17
hide target list.........................................3-12
Performance monitor
lost target .................................................3-8
activate/deactivate .................................1-87
lost target filter..........................................3-8
check radar performance .......................1-88
mode selection .........................................3-3
PI..............................................................1-67
on-screen box overview ...........................3-2
PI lines .....................................................1-67
own ship speed ........................................3-5
R remove target data .................................3-11
RACON ......................................................2-7 selection criteria .....................................3-30
Radar map .................................................5-1 show target list .......................................3-12
disable map alignment .............................5-8 simulation mode .....................................3-29
enable map alignment..............................5-8 sort target list..........................................3-12
map marks ...............................................5-7 symbol brilliance.....................................3-10
Radar Target Enhancer .............................2-7 symbol color ...........................................3-10
Range and bearing measurement ...........1-54 symbols and attributes .............................3-9
how to measure......................................1-55 system messages ..................................3-28
Range measurement ...............................1-47 Target trails ..............................................1-58
on-screen box ........................................1-49 clutter prevention....................................1-61

IN-2
 INDEX

hide trails............................................... 1-60

narrow trails........................................... 1-60
trail erase/restart ................................... 1-61
trail gradation ........................................ 1-60
trail level ................................................ 1-60
trail stabilization..................................... 1-60
trail time................................................. 1-59
true/relative ........................................... 1-58
Trial maneuver
static trial ............................................... 3-25
Troubleshooting
advanced troubleshooting ....................... 6-5
basic troubleshooting .............................. 6-4
diagnostics .............................................. 6-7
TT............................................................ 1-58
static trial maneuver .............................. 3-25
V
Vector modes .......................................... 3-15
description ............................................. 3-15
vector length.......................................... 3-17
vector time............................................. 3-17
Video plotter
create waypoints ................................... 5-13
delete own ship’s track.......................... 5-11
delete waypoints ................................... 5-14
display waypoint list .............................. 5-15
display waypoint name/number............. 5-16
enter waypoints ..................................... 5-13
orientation modes.................................... 5-1
own ship’s track....................................... 5-9
own ship’s track color ............................ 5-10
own ship’s track plot interval ................. 5-10
radar map ................................................ 5-1
waypoints .............................................. 5-13
W
Wiper....................................................... 1-38

IN-3